THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
 LOGIN BROS. 
 
 MEDICAL BOOKS 
 1114 W HARRISON ST. CHICAGO
 
 NORMAL FUNDUS, 
 grange Gofer.)
 
 MANUAL 
 
 CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY 
 
 BY 
 
 HOWARD F. HANSELL, M.D., 
 
 LECTURER ON OPHTHALMOLOGY IN THE JEFFERSON MEDICAL COLLEGE; CHIEF CLINICAL 
 
 ASSISTANT IN EYE DEPARTMENT, JEFFERSON MEDICAL COLLEGE HOSPITAL; 
 
 MEMBER OF AMERICAN OPHTHALMOLOGICAL SOCIETY; FELLOW 
 
 OF THE COLLEGE OF PHYSICIANS, PHILADELPHIA, ETC., 
 
 AND 
 
 JAMES H. BELL, M.D., 
 
 LATELY DEMONSTRATOR OF ANATOMY IN JEFFERSON MEDICAL COLLEGE ; MEMBER OP 
 
 OPHTHALMOLOGICAL STAFF, JEFFERSON MEDICAL COLLEGE HOSPITAL; 
 
 OPHTHALMIC SURGEON TO SOUTHWESTERN HOSPITAL 
 
 AND DISPENSARY, ETC. 
 
 WITH 120 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA: 
 P. BLAKISTON, SON & CO., 
 
 1012 WALNUT STREET. 
 1892.
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1892, BY P. BLAKISTON, SON & Co. 
 
 PTCM or WM. F. Fru. * Co. 
 1220-24 SANSOM ST.
 
 TO 
 
 WILLIAM THOMSON, M. D., 
 
 PROFESSOR OF OPHTHALMOLOGY, JEFFERSON MEDICAL COLLEGE, 
 
 AS A DISTINGUISHED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE SCIENCE, 
 
 IN RECOGNITION OF HIS FRIENDSHIP, 
 
 THIS VOLUME IS INSCRIBED 
 WITH THE SINCERE RESPECT AND ESTEEM OF 
 
 THE AUTHORS.
 
 PREFACE, 
 
 It has been our purpose in the following pages to place 
 before the undergraduate and general practitioner of medi- 
 cine, a brief review of the anatomy, physiology, refraction, 
 and common diseases of the eye. No attempt has been 
 made to treat the subjects exhaustively. Simplicity and 
 brevity of statement have not been sacrificed to the mere 
 attractiveness of literary finish. We have, in a word, 
 endeavored in good faith, to make the volume conform to 
 the purpose for which it was written, by giving it the 
 character, directness, and practicability of clinical teaching 
 and practice. 
 
 We have been equally and jointly engaged in the com- 
 position and arrangement of each and every chapter, and 
 for all portions of the book we are, therefore, equally and 
 jointly responsible.
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS, STRUCTURAL AND PHYSIOLOGICAL. 
 
 Sclera. Cornea. Choroid. Ciliary Body. Ciliary Processes. 
 Iris Retina. Anterior Chamber. Posterior Chamber. 
 , Vitreous Chamber. Hyaloid Membrane. Ligament of the 
 Lens. Crystalline Lens. Anterior Capsule. Optic Nerve. 
 Optic Tracts. Chiasm. Nerves. Arteries and Veins. Lym- 
 phatics. Muscles. Optic Axis. Conjunctiva. Lacrymal Ap- 
 paratus. Accommodation. Relative Accommodation. The 
 Metre Angle. Test Cards and Lenses. Field of Vision. 
 The Perimeter. Colors. Color-Sense. Color-Blindness, .... 9-41 
 
 PART II. 
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 
 
 Reflection. Refraction by Plane, Prismatic, Spherical, and Cylin- 
 drical Lenses. The Dioptric System. The Ophthalmoscope. 
 Formation of Images by Direct and Indirect Methods, 42-52 
 
 PART III. 
 REFRACTION. 
 
 Normal Refraction. Emmetropia. Hypermetropia. Myopia. 
 Astigmatism. The Refraction Ophthalmoscope. Direct 
 Examination. Indirect Examination. Determination of Refrac- 
 tion by the Ophthalmoscope. Retinosocpy by the Plane 
 
 Mirror. Presbyopia. Mydriatics, 53"77 
 
 vii
 
 VI11 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 PACK 
 
 THE OCULAR MUSCLES. 
 
 Paralysis of. Ophthalmoplegia Externa and Interna. Nystagmus. 
 Orthophoria. Hetcrophoria. Orthotropia. Heterotropia. 
 The Tests for Muscular Strength Symptoms of Heterophoria. 
 Diagnosis of Heterophoria. Treatment of Heterophoria. 
 Strabismus, 78-9,' 
 
 PART V. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CONJUNCTIVA. 
 
 Hyperaemia. Conjunctivitis: Acute Catarrhal, Chronic Catarrbal, 
 Vernal, Follicular, Granular, Blennorrhoeal, Phlyctenular, 
 Croupous, Diphtheritic. Xerosis. Pterygium. Tumors, . . . 92-105 
 
 PART VI. 
 DISEASES OF THE LIDS. 
 
 Coloboma. Epicanthus. Congenital Ptosis. Traumatism. Phleg- 
 mon. Hordeolum. -Blepharitis. Marginal Blepharitis. 
 Erythema. CEdema. Emphysema. Rodent Ulcer. Epithe- 
 lioma. Lupus. Xanthelasma. Chancre. Chalazion. Ecchy- 
 mosis. Milium. Trichiasis. Alopecia. Pediculus Pubis. 
 Entropion. Ectropion. Blepharospasm. Blepharophimosis. 
 Acquired Ptosis. Symblepharon. Ankyloblepbaron. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 
 
 Hypertrophy of Lacrymal Gland. Abscess of Lacrymal Gland. 
 Fistula of Lacrymal Gland. Malposition of Puncta Lacry- 
 malia. Stricture of the Nasal Duct. -Blennorrhcea of Lacrymal 
 Sac. Dacryocystitis. Abscess of Lacrymal Sac. Fistule of 
 Lacrymal Sac, Io6-I2l 
 
 PART VII. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CORNEA. 
 
 Phlyctenular Keratitis. Herpes. Pannus. Ophthalmic I lerpes 
 Zoster. Resorption Ulcer. Serpiginous Ulcer Interstitial or 
 Parenchymatous Keratitis. Abscess. Neuro- Paralytic Kera- 
 titis. Necrosis. Arcus Senilis. Opacities. Conical Cor- 
 nea. Staphyloma. Tumors. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE SCLERA. 
 Scleritis. Anterior Staphyloma. Posterior Staphyloma 122-135
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX 
 
 PART VIII. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CRYSTALLINE KENS AND LENS CAPSULE. 
 Cataract: Central, Anterior Polar, Posterior Polar, Zonular, Total, 
 Senile, Traumatic. Dislocation of the Lens. Apliakia. Depo- 
 sition on Anterior and Posterior Surfaces of Capsule. Wounds. 
 Secondary Cataract, 136-146 
 
 PART IX. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE UVEAL TRACT. 
 
 The Iris. Congenital Anomalies. Aniridia. Coloboma. Persis- 
 tent Pupillary Membrane. Polycoria. Albinism. Hyper- 
 semia. Plastic Iritis. Serous Iritis. Parenchymatous or Sup- 
 purative Iritis. Mydriasis. Myosis. Argyll - Robertson 
 Pupil. Hyphsemia. Detachment. Tumors. The Ciliary 
 Body. Cyclitis. Sympathetic Inflammation. Chronic Cyclitis. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CHOROID. 
 Choroiditis. Disseminated. Areolar. Central. Central Senile 
 
 Atrophy. Central Guttate, 147-162 
 
 PART X. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE VITREOUS. 
 Hyalitis. Muscae Volitantes. Synchisis. Synchisis Scintillans. 
 
 Hyaloid Artery. Foreign Bodies, 163-165 
 
 PART XL 
 GLAUCOMA. 
 Simple, Chronic Inflammatory, Acute Inflammatory, Fulminating, 
 
 Secondary. Glaucomatous Degeneration 166-171 
 
 PART XII. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 
 
 Hyperremia. Anaemia. Embolism Central Retinal Artery. 
 Hemorrhage. Opaque Nerve Fibres. Hemorrhagic Reti- 
 niti?. Albuminuric Retinitis. Diffused Chronic Retinitis. 
 Retinitis Pigmentosa. Detachment. Acute Central Reti- 
 nitis. Hyperaesthesia. Anaesthesia. Glioma 172-184
 
 X TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PART XIII. 
 
 PAD! 
 
 DISEASES OK THE Optic NERVK. 
 Acute Neuritis. Papillitis. Retro- Bulbar Neuritis. Atrophy. 
 
 Tobacco and Alcohol Amblyopia. Hemianopsia, i<\=; !')_ 
 
 PART XIV. 
 
 * 
 
 DISEASES OF THE ORBITAL CAVITY. 
 Periostitis. Phlegmon. Tumors. Exophthalmus. Enophthalmus. 193-194 
 
 PART XV. 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 Cataract Extraction with Iridectomy. Cataract Extraction without 
 Iridectomy. Discission. Iridectomy. Iritomy. Paracentesis 
 Cornea. Sc-emisch Incision. Conical Cornea. Staphyloma 
 Cornea and Sclera. Tattooing. Foreign Bodies in Conjunctiva, 
 in Cornea, in Anterior Chamber, in Lens, in Vitreous Cham- 
 ber. Tenotomy. Graded or Partial Tenotomy. Advancement 
 of Tendon. Enucleation. Symblepharon. Ankyloblepharon. 
 Canthotomy. Canthoplasty. Tarsorraphy. Excision of 
 Cilize. Entropion. Ectropion. Chalazion. Ptosis. Stricture 
 of Lacrymal Duct. Epithelioma. Ulcer. Naevi. Warty Kx- 
 crescences, 195-223
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.* 
 
 KIG. PAGE 
 
 1. Vertical Section of the Cornea, II 
 
 2. Vertical Section of the Choroid, 12 
 
 3. Antero- Posterior Section of the Cornea and Sclerotic, 13 
 
 4. Anterior Quadrant of a Horizontal Section of the Eyeball, Cornea, 
 
 and Lens, 15 
 
 5. Vertical Section of Human Retina, . . 16 
 
 6. Section of the Fovea Centralis, 17 
 
 7. Fibres of the Lens, 19 
 
 8. Diagram of the Decussation of the Optic Tracts, 19 
 
 9. Horizontal Section of the Entrance of the Optic Nerve and the Coats 
 
 of the Eye, 20 
 
 10. Diagram of the Blood-vessels of the Eye, 23 
 
 n. Lateral View of the Muscles of the Eyeball, . . . . 26 
 
 12. Vertical Section through the Upper Eyelid, 28 
 
 13. Lacrymal Apparatus 30 
 
 14. Scheme of the Accommodation for Near and Distant Objects, ... 32 
 
 15. Test Case 35 
 
 16. McHardy's Perimeter, 38 
 
 17. Spectrum Obtained by Means of a Prism, 40 
 
 1 8. Refraction by Medium with Parallel Sides, 43 
 
 19. Refraction by a Prism, 44 
 
 20. Juxtaposed Prisms, 45 
 
 21. Different Forms of Spherical Lenses, 45 
 
 22. Refraction of Parallel, Diverging and Converging Rays by Convex 
 
 Lens, 46 
 
 23. Refraction of Parallel Rays by Concave Lens, 48 
 
 24. Cylinders, 48 
 
 25. Direct Examination by Ophthalmoscope, 51 
 
 * None of the illustrations are original ; they have been taken from the works of Meyer, 
 Netileship, Landois and Stirling, Littell, Harlan, and Jaeger. E. A. Yarnall & Co. have 
 furnished the cuts for the instruments, and J. L. Borsch & Co. for lenses and for an astig- 
 matic chart. 
 
 xi
 
 Xll LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 FIG. PAGE 
 
 26. Indirect Examination by Ophthalmoscope, 52 
 
 27. Condition of Refraction in the Normal Passive Eye and During 
 
 Accommodation, 53 
 
 28. Condition of Refraction in the Normal Eye During Accommodation, 54 
 
 29. Hypermetropic Eye 55 
 
 30. Myopic Eye, 57 
 
 31. Action of an Astigmatic Surface on a Cone of Light, 60 
 
 32. Astigmatic Clock for Testing Astigmatism 62 
 
 33. Morton's Ophthalmoscope, 64 
 
 34. The Entrance of the Optic Nerve with the Adjacent Parts of the 
 
 Fundus of the Normal Eye, 65 
 
 35. Illustration of Retinoscopy by the Plane Mirror, 69 
 
 36. Diagrams of Range of Accommodation in E., H., and M., .... 74 
 
 37. Scheme of the Action of the Ocular Muscles, 79 
 
 38. Pathological Convergence : Homonymous Diplopia, 80 
 
 39. Pathological Divergence : Heteronymous Diplopia, 8l 
 
 40. Conjunctival and Subconjunctival Injection, 93 
 
 41. Granular Conjunctivitis, 96 
 
 42. Pannus Affecting Upper Half of Cornea, 98 
 
 43. Phlyctenular Ophthalmia, Conjunctival Form, 102 
 
 44. Pterygium, . 105 
 
 45. Epicanthus, 106 
 
 46. Ptosis, 107 
 
 47. Meibomian Cyst. Lid Forceps, 1 1 1 
 
 48. Trichiasis, 1 1 3 
 
 49. Distichiasis, 113 
 
 50. Entropion of Lower Lids, 114 
 
 51. Ectropion of Lower Lid 115 
 
 52. Symblepharon, 117 
 
 53. Ankyloblepharon, 117 
 
 54. Lacrymal Gland 118 
 
 55. Fistule of Lacrymal Sac, 120 
 
 56. Phlyctenular Ulcer 123 
 
 57. Perforating Ulcer of the Cornea ; Adhesion of Iris, 126 
 
 58. Onxy and Hypopyon, 126 
 
 59. Acute Serpiginous Ulcer of the Cornea 127 
 
 60. Interstitial Keratitis, 128 
 
 61. Partial Staphyloma of the Cornea, 130 
 
 62. Partial Staphyloma of the Cornea and Iris, 130 
 
 63. Total Staphyloma of the Cornea and Iris, 131
 
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. xiii 
 
 FIG. PAGE 
 
 64. Staphyloma of Sclera 133 
 
 65. Post-Staphyloma, 134 
 
 66. Posterior Polar Cataract, 136 
 
 Illustrations of Cataract, 139 and 140 
 
 67. Posterior Synechia, 148 
 
 68. Serous Iritis, 151 
 
 69. Atrophy after Syphilitic Choroiditis, 159 
 
 70. Central Choroiditis, 159 
 
 71. Central Guttate Senile Choroiditis, 160 
 
 72. Glaucomatous Excavation of the Optic Nerve (Vertical Section), . 168 
 
 73. Glaucomatous Excavation (Ophthalmoscopic View), 168 
 
 74. Embolism of the Central Artery of the Retina, 173 
 
 75. Retinitis x Albuminurica, 177 
 
 76. Retinitis Pigmentosa, 180 
 
 77. Ophthalmoscopic Appearance of Detached Retina, 181 
 
 78. Optic Neuritis, 186 
 
 79. Atrophic Excavation, 189 
 
 80. Lid Speculum, 196 
 
 81. Fixation Forceps, 196 
 
 82. Graefe Cataract Knife, 196 
 
 83. Iris Forceps, 197 
 
 84. Iridectomy Scissors, 197 
 
 85. Cystotome 198 
 
 86. Expulsion of the Cataract, 198 
 
 87. Graefe Cataract Spoon and Cystotome, 198 
 
 88. Wire Loop, 200 
 
 89. Lens Extractor, 200 
 
 90. Discission, 201 
 
 91. Soft Cataract Needle, 202 
 
 92. Escape of Lens Masses from Anterior Chamber, 202 
 
 93. Linear Incision at the Superior Margin of the Cornea, 203 
 
 94. Iridectomy Knife, 203 
 
 95. Artificial Pupil as seen in Anterior Chamber after Iridectomy, . . . 204 
 
 96. Iridotomy Knife, 204 
 
 97. De Wecker's Iritomy Scissors, 205 
 
 98. Paracentesis Knife, 205 
 
 99. Needles in Position (Ant. Staphyloma), 206 
 
 100. Excision of the Staphyloma, 207 
 
 101. Appearance of the Stump after Excision of the Staphyloma, . . . 207 
 
 102. Tattooing Needle 208
 
 XIV LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 FIG. PACK 
 
 103. Spud 209 
 
 104. Incision of the Conjunctiva 210 
 
 105. Section of the Tendinous Insertion, 210 
 
 106. Strabismus Hook 210 
 
 107. Conjunctival Scissors, 211 
 
 108. Enucleation Scissors, 214 
 
 109. Operation for Symblepharon, 215 
 
 no. Aril's Method 215 
 
 111. Canthoplasty, 216 
 
 112. Tarsorrhaphia, 217 
 
 113. Horn Plate, 217 
 
 114. Lid Forceps, 217 
 
 115. Operation for Distichiasis, .'.... 218 
 
 1 1 6. Operation for Ectropion, 220 
 
 117. Operation for Ectropion, 220 
 
 118. Canaliculus Knife, 221 
 
 119. Probing the Nasal Duct, 222 
 
 1 20. Bowman's Probes, 222
 
 ERRATUM. 
 
 Page 77, line 9. Hydrobromate should read Hydrochlorate.
 
 A MANUAL 
 
 CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY, 
 
 PART I. 
 
 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS STRUCTURAL 
 AND PHYSIOLOGICAL. 
 
 The human eyeball is spheroidal in shape ; 24 mm. in its 
 antero-posterior, 23 mm. in its transverse, and 23 mm. in 
 its vertical axis. Three tunics are commonly described, 
 namely, an inner percipient coat, the retina, a middle vas- 
 cular coat, the choroid, and an outer and protecting coat, 
 the sclera, with its transparent continuation in front, the 
 cornea. 
 
 The sclera is a bluish-white, opaque, dense, resisting 
 membrane, composed of closely interlacing connective tis- 
 sue fibres with a sparse intermingling of fine elastic tissue. 
 Among the fibres are numerous lymph channels communi- 
 cating with the lymph system of the cornea, the underlying 
 peri-choroid, and with the overlying capsule of Tenon. A 
 few small blood-vessels and nerves are distributed through- 
 out its substance. Slightly below and four mm. to the nasal 
 side of the posterior extremity of the horizontal axis of the 
 
 9
 
 IO A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 ball is an incomplete opening, \y* mm. in diameter, the 
 sclerotic foramen, over which is stretched a white fibrous 
 veil, the lamina cribrosa, pierced by the optic nerve, central 
 artery and vein of the retina. At the margin of this fora- 
 men the sclera is one mm. thick, being reinforced by a 
 deflection of the outer sheath of the optic nerve, and gradu- 
 ally thins off anteriorly, to be again reinforced six to eight 
 mm. back of the limbus cornea, corneo-sclcral margin , by the 
 expanding tendons of the recti muscles. It is marked just 
 at its corneal border by a slight depression, the su/cus schra. 
 The sclera is pierced ten to twelve mm. from the foramen 
 sclera by the posterior ciliary vessels and nerves ; again 
 midway between the optic nerve entrance and cornea, by 
 four or five large veins, venae vorticosae, which empty into 
 the ophthalmic vein. It is again perforated two mm. from 
 the limbus cornea by the anterior ciliary vessels, four or 
 five in number. 
 
 The cornea is the anterior, smaller and transparent por- 
 tion of the external tunic, measuring eleven mm. vertically, 
 twelve mm. horizontally, and one mm. in thickness at its 
 apex. The layers may be multiplied indefinitely by resort- 
 ing to useless and confusing subdivision ; three are here 
 given. The anterior layer consists of columnar epithelium 
 continuous with the epithelium of the conjunctiva, and a 
 homogeneous elastic, basement membrane (Bowman's). The 
 second or middle layer composes the tissue proper of the 
 cornea, and is formed by sixty or more laminae of fibrous 
 tissue, containing, in great number, irregularly placed 
 lymph spaces, in which lie the corneal cells, connected 
 with each other in all directions by canaliculi. The poste- 
 rior layer consists of a homogeneous basement membrane 
 (Descemet's), on which is a single layer of hexagonal cells 
 continuous with that on the anterior surface of the iris.
 
 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 
 
 II 
 
 In health the cornea is devoid of blood-vessels, except at 
 its periphery, and contains under Bowman's membrane a 
 few terminal branches of the ciliary nerves. There is ana- 
 tomically no distinct line of union between the sclera and 
 cornea, but the former slightly overlaps the latter on its 
 anterior aspect, and beneath this shelving border of sclera, 
 in clear cornea, lies the canal of Schlemm, which is con- 
 
 FIG. i. 
 
 : . ..'. : ->-^ --'>> ti:"-x--v /-.:/ ..:- 
 
 VERTICAL SECTION OF THE CORNEA, STAINED WITH GOLD CHLORIDE. 
 
 n. Nerve-fibrils, a. Perforating branch, r. Nucleus. /, b. Inter-epithelial termination of 
 fibrils, s. Anterior elastic laminae. 
 
 nected with the angle of the anterior chamber by the 
 spaces of Fontana. 
 
 The choroid is the vascular and pigmentary coat, extend- 
 ing posteriorly from fo& foramen opticus choroidea, through 
 which the optic nerve passes, and anteriorly to the ciliary 
 region. Its outer surface lines the sclera from which it is 
 separated by a double layer of serous membrane, supra- 
 ckoroidal lymph space, and its inner surface is attached to the 
 basal membrane of the pigment coat of the retina as far for- 
 ward as the ora serrata. The choroid may be divided into
 
 12 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 two layers : an outer, containing relatively larger vessels and 
 more pigment, and an inner, containing capillary vessels and 
 less pigment. The most conspicuous vessels of the external 
 layer are the veins, which, converging, form the vena vorti- 
 cosce. The capillary vessels of the inner layer are derived 
 
 FIG. 2. 
 
 VERTICAL SECTION OF THE CHOROID AND A PART OF THE SCLEROTIC. 
 
 i. Sclerotic. 2. Lamina suprachoroidea. 3. Layer of large vessels. 4. Limiting layer. 5. 
 Chorio-capillaris. 6. Hyaline membrane. 7. Pigment epithelium, g. Large blood- 
 vessels. /. Pigment cells, c. Sections of capillaries. 
 
 mainly from the short ciliary arteries. The pigment, con- 
 sisting of hexagonal cells filled with dark-brown granules, 
 is scattered throughout both layers, occupying the meshes 
 between the vessels in quantity and density sufficient to 
 absorb light. 
 
 The ciliary body comprises the ciliary muscle and pro-
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
 ANTERO-POSTERIOR SECTION OF THE CORNEA WITH THE SCLEROTIC. 
 
 a. Anterior corneal epithelium, b. Bowman's lamina, c. Corneal corpuscles. /. Corneal 
 lamellae (the whole thickness lying between b and d is the substantia propria cornea). 
 d. Descemet's membrane, e. Its epithelium, f. Junction of cornea with the sclerotic. 
 ^. Limbus conjunctivae. //. Conjunctiva ; canal of Schlemm. k Leber's venous plexus 
 (is regarded by Leber as belonging to i). m, m. Meshes in the tissue of the ligamentum 
 iridis pectinatum. n. Attachment of the iris. o. Longitudinal, /, circular (divided 
 transversely) bundles of fibres of the ciliary muscle, u. Transverse section of a ciliary 
 artery, v. Epithelium of the iris (a continuation of that on the posterior surface of the 
 cornea), iv. Substance of the iris. x. Pigment of the iris. z. A ciliary process. 
 
 13
 
 14 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 cesses, and the space they occupy, together with the cor- 
 responding circular strip of sclera, is the ciliary region. 
 The ciliary muscle, attached anteriorly to the ligaincntuni 
 pectinatum iridis and lost posteriorly in the choroid oppo- 
 site to the ora serrata, consists of radiating and circular 
 bundles of unstriped muscular fibre, containing the arterial 
 circle, the circulus ciliaris. 
 
 The ciliary processes consist of an anterior prolongation 
 of the pigment stroma and blood-vessels of the choroid, 
 with a reduplication into sixty or seventy folds, resting on 
 the anterior periphery of the vitreous. 
 
 The Zone of Zinn is the pigmented indentations made 
 by the ciliary processes in the hyaloid membrane. 
 
 The Iris is a circular framework of elastic and non-striped 
 muscular fibres, lined anteriorly by flat epithelium, con- 
 tinuous with the membrane of Descemet, and posteriorly 
 by the uvea, or pigment coat, continued forward from the 
 ciliary processes. It is suspended in the aqueous humor 
 2 l /t mm. behind the cornea, and in front of the lens and 
 ciliary processes. By the ciliary ligament (ligamentum 
 pectinatum iridis) its circumference is attached to the limbus 
 cornea;. It is perforated by a nearly circular hole, the 
 pupil, the margin of which, the pupillary border, lies in 
 contact with the anterior capsule of the lens. The sphincter 
 pupillce is a circular band of muscular fibres surrounding the 
 pupil. The dilator iridis is, according to late authorities, 
 not a muscle, but a fibre-elastic tissue. The iris has two 
 circles of anastomosing vessels, the larger surrounding the 
 ciliary and the smaller the pupillary border, branches of the 
 anterior and long ciliary. Filaments from the lenticular 
 (ophthalmic) ganglion, containing motor fibres from 3rd, 
 sensitive from ist division of 5th, and sympathetic filaments 
 from the carotid plexus, furnish its nerve supply.
 
 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 
 
 The Retina, or nervous, tunic, is composed of three main 
 layers : the inner, fibre and nerve-cell, the middle, granular, 
 and the internal, or layer of rods, cones and pigment. The 
 
 FIG. 4. 
 
 ANTERIOR QUADRANT OF A HORIZONTAL SECTION OF THE 
 EYEBALL, CORNEA, AND LENS. 
 
 Substantia propria of the cornea, b. Bowman's elastic membrane, c. Anterior 
 corneal epithelium, d. Descemet's membrane, e. Its epithelium, f. Conjunctiva. 
 g. Sclerotic, h. Iris. i. Sphincter iridis. j, Ligamentum pectinatum iridis, with the 
 adjoining vacuolated tissue, k. Canal of Schlemm. /. Longitudinal, m, circular mus- 
 cular fibres of the ciliary muscle, n. Ciliary process, o. Ciliary part of the retina. 
 q. Canal of Petit, with Z, Zonule of Zinn, in front of it, and /, the posterior layer of the 
 hyaloid membrane, r. Anterior, v, posterior part of the capsule of the lens. t. Cho- 
 roid. 4 u. Perichoroidal space. T. Pigment epithelium of the iris. x. Margin of the 
 lens. 
 
 first or inner layer consists of the expanded intra-ocular ex- 
 tremity of the optic nerve fibres, stripped of their medullary 
 sheaths, with numerous multipolar cells ; the second, of
 
 i6 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 granular and granulated cells, arranged in four strata, con- 
 necting the inner and outer ; the third is the sentient layer 
 proper, and is composed of elongated nerve-cells, the rods 
 
 FIG. 5. 
 
 VERTICAL SECTION OF HUMAN RETINA. 
 
 a. Rods and cones. l>. Ext. and, /, int. limit, memb. c. Ext. and,/, int. nucl. layers, e. Ext. 
 and, g, int. gran, layers, h. Blood-vessels and nerve cells. /. Nerve-fibres. 
 
 and somewhat shorter cones, inserted into the pigment 
 layer. Each layer is transparent, with the exception of 
 the pigment coat. The retina is about .25 mm. in thick- 
 ness, covers the under surface of the choroid from the
 
 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. \"J 
 
 foramen choroidea to the ora serrata, or notched and den- 
 tated anterior margin of the retina, allowing the lining mem- 
 brane of vitreous to come into immediate contact with the 
 choroid for the space of a few mm. behind the ciliary body. 
 The macula lutea is a yellowish spot, as seen by the ophthal- 
 moscope, irregular in shape, but usually circular, 0.5 mm. 
 in diameter, and lies slightly to the temporal side of the 
 posterior end of the optic axis. In the centre of the macula 
 
 FIG. 6. 
 
 SECTION OF THE FOVEA CENTRALIS. 
 
 a. Cones, b and g. Int. and ext. limit, memb. c. Ext. and e, nuclear layer, d. Fibres. 
 f. Nerve-cells. 
 
 is the fovea centralis (Fig. 6), .2 mm. in diameter, charac- 
 terized by an absence of all the layers of the retina, except- 
 ing modified rods and cones. The central artery and vein 
 of the retina pass through the poms opticus, a comparatively 
 large aperture in the lamina cribrosa, and, dividing, ver- 
 tically, into large and, horizontally, small vessels, are 
 distributed in the fibre layer of the retina, anastomosing at 
 .the ora serrata with the choroidal and, at the optic nerve 
 entrance, with the short ciliary vessels.
 
 l8 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 The anterior chamber is an angular space, bounded in 
 front by the posterior surface of the cornea, at its angle by 
 the ligamentum pectinatum iridis, and behind by the 
 anterior surface of the iris. It secretes and contains the 
 aqueous humor, a feebly saline, transparent fluid. 
 
 The smaller posterior chamber is bounded in front by the 
 posterior surface of the iris, and behind by the ciliary pro- 
 cesses, suspensory ligament of the lens and lens, and con- 
 tains aqueous humor. The anterior and posterior chambers 
 are in free communication through the pupil. 
 
 The vitreous chamber is bounded by the retina, ciliary 
 processes and lens, and contains the vitreous humor, a 
 transparent, jelly-like substance, supported by numerous 
 septa. 
 
 The Hyaloid membrane is a fine, transparent layer of con- 
 nective tissue, enclosing the vitreous, and forms, by division 
 anteriorly at the ciliary processes, the suspensory ligament 
 of the lens. The canal of Petit is the name given to the 
 space between the layers of the suspensory ligament at the 
 periphery of the lens. Anteriorly the vitreous presents a 
 well-marked depression, the hyaloid fossa, in which rests 
 the posterior convexity of the lens. The vitreous is tra- 
 versed in its antero-posterior axis in the foetus by the 
 canal of Cloquet, containing the hyaloid artery. 
 
 The crystalline lens is a biconvex and transparent body, 
 varying in consistence at different ages, from 8-10 mm. in 
 diameter and 34 mm. in depth at its axis. It is enveloped 
 in front by the capsule, at its periphery by the suspensory 
 ligament, and behind by the hyaloid. Its substance is 
 arranged in concentric lamellae, composed of minute fibril- 
 lae, hexagonal in horizontal section (Fig. 7, 2). Between 
 the lamellae and among the fibres is an oil-like material, 
 Liquor Morgagni, which permits of change of form without
 
 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 19 
 
 friction. The concentric lamellae are approximated by 
 sutures, thus dividing the lens into sections along radiat- 
 ing planes. Considered as a whole, the lens consists of a 
 nucleus, the almost structureless centre, and cortex, the outer 
 fibrillary and softer portion. 
 
 Fie. 7. 
 
 FIG. 8. 
 
 FIG. 7. FIBRES OF THE LENS. 
 
 2. Transverse sections of the lens fibres. 
 
 FIG. 8. DIAGRAM OF THE DECUSSATION OF THE OPTIC TRACTS. 
 
 T. Semi-decussation in the chiasma. T, Q. Decussation of fibres behind the ext.geniculate 
 bodies (C, G). a',b. Fibres which do not decussate in the chiasma. 6',a'. Fibres pro- 
 ceeding from the right eye and coming together in the left hemisphere (L, O, G). 
 L,O,G,K. Lesion of the left optic tract, producing right lateral hemianopsia. a. Lesion 
 in the left hemisphere, producing crossed amblyopia (right eye). T. Lesion producing 
 temporal hemianopsia. n, n. Lesion producing nasal hemianopsia. 
 
 The anterior capsule is tough and elastic, and is lined on 
 its posterior surface by a layer of hexagonal cells, whose 
 function it is to nourish the fibres. 
 
 The fibres of the optic nerves (Fig. 8) arise in two bands, 
 the optic tracts, from the corpora geniculata, corpora quad-
 
 20 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 FIG. 9. 
 
 HORIZONTAL SECTION OF THE ENTRANCE OF THE OPTIC NERVE AND 
 THE COATS OF THE EYE. 
 
 , Inner, i>. Outer, layers of the retina, c. Choroid. d. Sclerotic, t. Physiological cup. 
 f. Central artery of retina in axial canal, g. Its point of bifurcation, h. Lamina cri- 
 brosa. /. Outer (dural) sheath, m. Outer (subdural} space. . Inner (subarachnoid) 
 space, r. Middle (arachnoid) sheath. /. Inner (pial) sheath. i. Bundles of nerve- 
 fibres, k. Longitudinal septa of connective-tissue.
 
 NERVES. 2 1 
 
 rigemina and ophthalmic ganglion, which are connected by 
 radiating fibres with the cortical centre in the occipito- 
 angular region of the cortex. Each optic tract winds 
 obliquely across the corresponding crus cerebri, converges 
 forward to meet its fellow on the opposite side, forming at 
 their intersection the optic commissure, or chiasm. In the 
 chiasm is a partial crossing of the fibres from each tract. 
 The nerves arise from the chiasm, diverge, and each passes 
 through the optic foramen in the corresponding lesser 
 wing of the sphenoid bone. Each nerve is covered by pro- 
 longations of the membranes of the brain, which form its 
 sheaths and between which are the intervaginal and sub- 
 dural lymph-spaces. Just before the nerve reaches the 
 lamina cribrosa, the network of connective tissue extending 
 across the foramen sclera, the dura mater passes over into 
 the sclera, the arachnoid and pia mater are discontinued, the 
 medullary covering of the nerve fibres is dropped, and only 
 the axes-cylinders pass through the foramen sclera and 
 choroidea to form the nerve-fibre layer of the retina. 
 Eighteen mm. posterior to this point, the ophthalmic artery 
 and vein pierce the nerve obliquely, and having reached its 
 centre, continue forward, and, passing through the porus 
 opticus, are distributed to the retina. 
 
 NERVES. 
 
 The eyeball and its appendages are supplied by sensory 
 branches from the first and second divisions of the fifth pair, 
 motor branches from the third, fourth, sixth, and seventh pairs 
 of cranial nerves, and sympathetic filaments from the carotid 
 and cervical plexuses. The ciliary ganglion, lodged in the 
 orbit below the superior and to the median side of the ex- 
 ternal rectus behind the ball, receives sympathetic fibres from 
 the carotid plexus, sensory from the first or ophthalmic divi-
 
 22 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 sion of fifth, and motor fibres from the third. From it a small 
 twig joins the branch of the third, supplying the inferior 
 oblique, and from three to six branches, subdividing into 
 twenty, the short ciliary, enter the sclera around the optic 
 nerve. The ophthalmic division of the fifth gives off three 
 purely sensitive branches just before passing through 
 the sphenoidal fissure; the lacrymal, accompanying the 
 lacrymal artery, runs along the external rectus muscle to 
 the lacrymal gland, supplying it, conjunctiva, and integu- 
 ment of the upper lid ; the frontal, running forward above 
 the levator palpebra? muscle, supplies by its two terminal 
 branches the corrugator supercilii, occipito-frontalis, orbicu- 
 laris palpebrarum, and the integument of the lids, forehead, 
 and scalp ; the nasal, passing through the orbit and giving 
 off a twig to the ophthalmic ganglion, as well as two or 
 more branches the long ciliary nerves, which perforate 
 the sclera with the short ciliary, and run forward between 
 the sclera and choroid to be distributed to the ciliary body, 
 iris, and cornea; and the infra-troclilear to the conjunctive 
 and appendages of the eye. 
 
 The third nerve, motor oculi, supplies the internal, supe- 
 rior and inferior recti, inferior oblique, levator palpebnr, 
 ciliary muscle, and iris, and furnishes a motor root to the 
 ophthalmic ganglion. 
 
 The fourth nerve, trochlear, supplies the superior oblique. 
 
 The sixth nerve, abducens, supplies the external rectus. 
 
 The seventh nerve, facial, supplies the orbicularis palpe- 
 brarum. 
 
 ARTERIES. 
 
 The ball and its appendages (Fig. 10) are supplied with 
 blood directly from the ophthalmic branches of the 
 internal carotid, and indirectly by anastomoses between
 
 ARTERIES. 
 
 its terminal branches and similar branches of the ex- 
 ternal carotid. 
 
 The lacrymal artery supplies the lacrymal gland, upper 
 
 FIG. 10. 
 
 DIAGRAM OF THE BLOOD-VESSELS OF THE EYE. {Horizontal view ; veins 
 black, arteries light, with a double contour.') 
 
 aa. Short posterior ciliary, t. Long posterior ciliary, cc'. Anterior ciliary artery and vein. 
 dd 1 ' . Artery and vein of the conjunctiva. ee f . Central artery and vein of retina. 
 f. Blood-vessels of the inner, and, g, of the outer optic sheath, h. Vorticose vein. 
 i. Posterior short ciliary vein confined to the sclerotic, k. Branch of the posterior short 
 ciliary artery to the optic nerve. /. Anastomosis of the choroidal vessels with those of 
 the optic nerve, m. Chorio-capillaris. n. Episcleral branches, o. Recurrent choroidal 
 artery. /. Great circular artery of iris (transverse section), q. Blood-vessels of the 
 iris. r. Ciliary process. .?. Branch of a vorticose vein from the ciliary muscle, u. Cir- 
 cular vein. v. Marginal loops of vessels on the cornea, -cu. Anterior artery and vein of 
 the conjunctiva.
 
 24 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 lid, and conjunctiva; the supraorbital,\\\z superior rectus 
 and levator palpebne muscles, inner canthus, skin and mus- 
 cles of the forehead ; the two palpebral, the lids ; the nasal, 
 a branch to the lacrymal sac ; the short ciliary, pierce the 
 sclera around the optic nerve and are the main supply to 
 the choroid ; the long ciliary, supply the ciliary body and iris ; 
 the anterior ciliary, given off from the muscular, perforate 
 the sclera near the limbus, and supply the ciliary body and 
 iris; the hvo muscular, supply the external ocular muscles. 
 
 LYMPH SYSTEM. 
 
 Lymph vessels, with their own walls, are found in the 
 lids and conjunctiva, and empty into the parotid and sub- 
 maxillary glands, accompanying the venae facialis and tem- 
 poralis. In the conjunctiva is a superficial and deep net- 
 work of canals communicating freely with one another, and 
 in close connection with the lymph systems of the cornea 
 and sclera. The spaces in the cornea communicate prob- 
 ably with the great lymph space of the anterior chamber 
 by means of Schlemm's canal and the spaces of Fontana. 
 On the sclera lies another lymph space, Tenon s capsule, 
 composed of two layers of delicate connective tissue, an 
 inner, episcleral, and an outer, muscular layer. The inner 
 lies immediately on the sclera as far forward as the insertion 
 of the tendons, where it is reflected into the outer. Between 
 the tendons it is carried forward nearer the cornea, and is 
 there reflected. Both layers are lined with epithelium and 
 extend backward to the foramen sclera, communicating 
 with the intervaginal lymph space. Between the sclera and 
 choroid is a third space, the pcricJioroidca, communicating 
 with Tenon's capsule by fine canals through the sclera. The 
 vitreous body and lens are nourished by the surrounding
 
 MUSCLES. 25 
 
 blood-vessels of the uveal tract, and do not certainly possess 
 lymph vessels proper, as does the cornea. In the foetus, the 
 lens is nourished by the hyaloid artery, which is given off 
 from one of the branches of the arteria centralis retinae, 
 and pursues a straight course through the vitreous, termi- 
 nating in fine branches on its posterior lenticular surface. 
 
 It is said that from the ciliary body a stream of lymph 
 flows downward and backward through the vitreous, then 
 forward and through the canal of Petit to the posterior 
 chamber ; downward and forward through the pupil into 
 the anterior chamber, and outward to the angle, whence it 
 escapes through the membrane of Descemet and ligamentum 
 pectinatum to the canal of Schlemm. Tributary streams of 
 lymph flow into the posterior chamber from the posterior 
 surface of the iris and from the ciliary body, and into the 
 anterior chamber from the anterior surface of the iris and 
 meshes of Fontana's space. The corneal, scleral, con- 
 junctival, perichoroidal, and Tenon's lymph spaces also 
 communicate with the anterior chamber. The lymph 
 canals of the retina accompany the retinal vessels and 
 discharge through the poms opticus. 
 
 MUSCLES. 
 
 The position of the eyeba.ll in the orbit is maintained 
 and its movements governed by the action of six muscles, 
 namely, four straight and two oblique. The recti, superior, 
 inferior, external, and internal, and the superior oblique have a 
 nearly common origin from the margin of the optic foramen 
 in the lesser wing of the sphenoid bone. The recti, diverg- 
 ing in the directions indicated by their names, run forward 
 parallel to the orbital wall, perforate the capsule of Tenon, 
 and are inserted into the sclera at distances varying from six 
 3
 
 26 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 to eight mm. from the cornea. The superior oblique passes 
 forward and upward to the upper and inner angle of the 
 orbit, thence through a bony and cartilaginous pulley out- 
 ward and backward under the superior rectus, to be inserted 
 into the sclera on its posterior and superior surface. The 
 inferior oblique arises from a depression in the superior 
 
 FIG. ii. 
 
 LATERAL VIEW OF THE MUSCLES OF THE EYEUAI.I.. 
 
 5. Trochlea or pulley of the superior oblique muscle. /, z, 6. Optic nerve. 8. Superior, 
 9, inferior, and 12, external rectus. 13. Inferior oblique. 
 
 maxillary bone at the inferior and anterior angle of the 
 median wall of the orbit, passes outward and backward 
 under the globe, and is attached to the sclera on its external 
 and posterior surface. 
 
 The Uvator palpebra arises from the upper portion of the 
 bony wall of the optic foramen, passes forward and upward
 
 THE APPENDAGES OF THE EYE. 2/ 
 
 to be inserted into the cartilage of the upper lid. Its func- 
 tion is to elevate the lid. 
 
 The orbicularis palpebrarum is a broad, circular muscle, 
 arising from the inner canthus and from the soft tissues im- 
 mediately adjacent to the nose, passes under the skin of the 
 lids and between them and the orbital ridges, and is inserted 
 close to its origin. By its contraction the lids are closed. 
 
 The optic axis is a line drawn from the centre of the 
 cornea to the centre of the retina. The ends are called 
 respectively anterior and posterior poles. 
 
 The visual axis is a line drawn from the fovea centralis to 
 the object in view. 
 
 The angle a is formed at the intersection of the visual 
 with the optic axis. In H.* it is usually larger and may 
 cause an apparent divergence. In M. it is small, or may be 
 absent (negative), i. e., the optic and visual axes coincide. 
 This may give rise to the appearance of convergence. The 
 angle Y is at the centre of rotation of the ball, and is the 
 angle formed at the junction of a line drawn from the cen- 
 tre of rotation to the object in view with the optic axis. 
 
 THE APPENDAGES OF THE EYE. 
 
 The lids (Fig. 12) are composed of skin, muscle, dense, 
 fibrous tissue or cartilage, the tarsus, and mucous mem- 
 brane. The cutaneous layer of the upper lid, containing 
 partly-developed papillae and numerous fine hairs and some 
 sweat glands, is loose and distensible ; at the margin it 
 becomes modified, and is continued on the under sur- 
 face, where it becomes mucous membrane. Connective 
 tissue in wide meshes, highly vascular, separates the in- 
 
 * Abbreviations : E. Emmetropia. II. Hypermetropia. M. Myopia. As. 
 Astigmatism.
 
 28 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOI .< >< .V. 
 
 FIG. 12. 
 
 to- 
 
 YIKIICAL SKCTION THROUGH THK UITER KYKI.II>. 
 
 .1. ('mis; i. Epidermis; 2. Corium ; t>. and 3. Subcutaneous connective-tissue; C. and 7. 
 Orbicularis muscle ; D. Loose submuscular connective tissue; E. Insertion of H. Miil- 
 ler's muscle; F. Tarsus; G. Conjunctiva;/. Inner, A". Outer edge of the lid ; 4. Pig- 
 ment cells ; 5. Sweat-gland ; 6. Hair follicles ; 8 and 23, Sections of nerves ; 9. Arter- 
 ies ; 10. Veins; n. Cilia; 12. Modified sweat-glands : 13. Circular muscle of Riolan ; 
 14. Meibomian gland; 15. Section of an acinus of the same; 16. Posterior tarsal 
 glands, submuscular connective tissue ; ai and 22. Conjunctiva, with its epithelium ; 
 24. Fat; 25. Loosely-woven posterior end of the tarsus; 26. Section of a palpebral 
 artery.
 
 THE CONJUNCTIVA. 29 
 
 tegument from the second or muscular layer, the lid por- 
 tion of the orbicularis palpebrarum. The tarsus of the 
 upper lid consists of dense, closely-interwoven fibrous 
 tissue, connected rather loosely with the muscle above and 
 closely with the mucous membrane below. It is 9 mm. in 
 height, 20 mm. in length, and .8 mm. in thickness. Into its 
 upper margin is inserted the tendon of the levator palpebrae. 
 The lower border is free and in its substance are found 
 tarsal or meibomian glands and hair follicles, the ciliae. 
 
 In the lower lid the cartilage is almost undeveloped, and 
 the glands are fewer and relatively insignificant. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVA. 
 
 The conjunctiva, continuous with the Schneiderian mu- 
 cous membrane of the nose and the integument of the 
 lids at their free margins, is a mucous membrane com- 
 posed of columnar epithelium with its basement mem- 
 brane, and is richly supplied with vessels and nerves. It 
 is divided into palpebral, the portion lying in juxtaposi- 
 tion to the lid ; fornix, the upper and lower cul-de-sac, 
 where the conjunctiva leaves the lid and is reflected over 
 into the sclera, and ocular, the portion lying on the ball. 
 The epithelium is continued over the cornea, forming its 
 first layer, while the loose, connective tissue ends at the 
 corneo-scleral margin. The palpebral portion is thick, 
 contains numerous papillae and glands, and is highly vas- 
 cular. The ocular conjunctiva is less dense, loosely con- 
 nected with adjacent parts, and transparent. The conjunc- 
 tiva forms a small fold at the inner angle, \\\& plica scniilnnaris, 
 adjoining which on the nasal side is a small conical body, 
 caruncula laaymalis, composed of muscular fibre, fat, and 
 mucous membrane, and supporting a few fine hairs.
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 
 
 The lacrymal gland, which secretes the tears, is held by a 
 few fibrous bands in a depression in the frontal bone at the 
 upper and outer angle of the orbit. Its under surface rests 
 upon the ball and adjacent portions of the superior and ex- 
 ternal recti muscles. It is about the size and shape of an 
 almond, and opens into the outer and upper fornix by a 
 
 FIG. 13. 
 
 LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 
 
 i. Upper lid. 2. Lower lid. 3. Canaliculi. 
 4. Lacrymal sac. 5. Puncta. 6. Plica 
 semilunaris. 7. Caruncula. 8. Nasal 
 duct. 9. Lacrymal gland. 10. Tubules. 
 
 number of tubules, through which the tears are conveyed 
 into the conjunctival sac. From this point, tears flow over 
 the conjunctiva and cornea, cleansing and lubricating these 
 parts, and are forced by winking into the f>nncta lacryinalia, 
 two small openings opposite one another near the nasal 
 extremity of the ciliary borders of upper and lower lids; 
 thence into the caiialiculi, two small canals 1 2 mm. long, by
 
 ACCOMMODATION. 3! 
 
 which they are conveyed into the lacrymal sac, the expanded 
 upper extremity of the nasal duct. The sac is lodged in a 
 depression formed by the lacrymal and nasal process of the 
 superior maxillary bone, and is covered and compressed by 
 the tendo-tarsi muscle and by the fibrous expansion of the 
 tendo-oculi. From the sac the tears pass into the nasal duct, 
 a membranous and bony canal, 20 mm. long, emptying 
 into the inferior meatus of the nose. 
 
 ACCOMMODATION. 
 
 By accommodation is meant the power that resides in 
 the ciliary muscle of so altering the length of the antero- 
 posterior diameter of the lens, that the eye becomes adapted 
 in its focal length to any distance within infinity. By 
 contraction of the radiating fibres of the ciliary muscle 
 toward their fixed points in the choroid, the angle of the 
 anterior chamber is drawn inward and backward, while the 
 diameters of the lens are simultaneously shortened by the 
 contraction of the circular fibres of the same muscle. The 
 effect of this double contraction is to relax the suspensory 
 ligament of the lens. Thus in the act of accommodating 
 the lens is increased in convexity, the iris is contracted, 
 and the anterior chamber becomes shallower. (Fig. 14.) 
 
 Accommodation is said to be positive or negative. It is 
 positive when the ciliary muscle contracts in the manner 
 just described, and negative when the refracting power of 
 the lens is difriinished instead of increased, and this is 
 accomplished, theoretically, by supposing the angle of the 
 anterior chamber to be the fixed and the choroid the mov- 
 able points, inducing a flattening of the lens or a positive 
 diminution in the antero-posterior diameter of the vitreous 
 by a dragging forward of the choroid and retina.
 
 32 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 The range of accommodation is the distance from the far 
 point, r, to the near point, p. The amplitude of accom- 
 modation is the accommodative effort of which an eye 
 is capable, and is equal to the difference between the refrac- 
 tion when the eye is at rest, or adapted for its far point (/), 
 and when the accommodation is exercised to its fullest 
 extent (/>). Hence a p r. Example : in emmetropia, 
 
 FIG. 14. 
 
 SCHEME OF ACCOMMODATION FOR NEAR AND DISTANT ' 
 
 The right side of the figure represents the condition of the lens during accommodation for 
 a near object, and the left side when the eye is at rest. The letters indicate the S.IIM-- 
 parts on both sides ; those on the right side are marked with a dash. A. Left, /' right 
 half of the lens; C. Cornea; S. Sclerotic; CS. Canal of Schlemm ; /"A". Anterior 
 chamber ; J. Iris; P. Margin of the pupil ; V, Anterior surface ; //. Posterior surface 
 of the lens; R. Margin of the lens ; /'. Margin of the ciliary processes ; a and b. Space 
 between the two former; the line ZX indicates the thickness of the lens during accom- 
 modation for a near object ; /.Y. The thickness of the lens when the eye is p.. 
 
 p = 6 cm., r = oo (infinity) ; a = 6 cm. oo ; a = 6 cm., 
 or its range extends from infinity to a point 6 cm. from the 
 eye. Its amplitude or power expressed in diopters is 
 obtained thus: 6 cm. divided into 100 = 16.6 diopters. 
 In other words, a convex glass, 16.6" placed before the eye 
 makes parallel the rays which diverge from the near point 
 and substitutes the greatest contraction of the ciliary muscle.
 
 ACCOMMODATION. 33 
 
 RELATIVE ACCOMMODATION. 
 
 Accommodation and convergence bear a constant relation 
 to one another, within the limits of the amplitude of ac- 
 commodation on the one hand and the amplitude of con- 
 vergence on the other. Thus with the visual lines parallel, 
 accommodation may be determined by placing before the 
 eyes minus glasses of constantly increasing strength. The 
 highest number that can be overcome, vision always f , is 
 the measure of the accommodation exercised independently 
 of convergence. Convergence, when accommodation re- 
 mains unchanged, may be estimated by prisms. The 
 strongest prism, angle in, through which binocular vision 
 is maintained at 6 m., is the measure of the limit of the 
 converging power, independent of accommodation. The 
 strongest prism, angle out, through which single vision is 
 maintained under the same conditions, is the measure of the 
 limit of minus convergence. 
 
 Tlie Metre Angle. For every distance nearer than 6 m., 
 convergence bears a fixed relation to accommodation. 
 Thus, by the exercise of I D. of accommodation in emme- 
 tropia, the internal recti so direct the visual axes that they 
 cross at I m. from the basal line uniting the two eyes, and 
 form with the perpendicular to that line at its centre, an 
 angle, called the metre angle. By the exercise of 2 D. of 
 accommodation, the convergence will equal two metre 
 angles, with 3 D. of accommodation it will equal three 
 metre angles, and so on. Again, if the object is situated 
 at i m., convergence will equal one metre angle, if at 50 
 cm., it will equal two metre angles, etc. 
 4
 
 34 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 TEST CARDS, TEST LENSES, ETC. 
 
 The test letters commonly in use are so constructed that 
 their vertical diameter shall be the sine of the angle of 5'. 
 Suppose two lines are drawn, one from the top and the other 
 from the bottom of such a letter, so that they meet in the 
 lens of an eye. They are not mathematically parallel, but 
 they are so nearly parallel that the angle of 5' which they 
 form with each other, at their crossing point in the posterior 
 part of the lens, is disregarded, and they are considered 
 parallel. This angle is chosen, because it is the smallest 
 which includes recognizable objects. But mathemati- 
 cally parallel rays can come only from an object at an 
 infinite distance. Hence we say that all objects included 
 in the lines forming this angle are at an infinite distance. 
 The farther removed from the eye the greater the size 
 of such objects must be, although their images on the 
 retina are of the same size. Thus, the card 
 
 50 BN 
 
 = A 
 
 40 ER 
 
 = 1 
 
 30 N C D 
 
 = 
 
 20 P R F H 
 
 i 
 
 15 LCBDT 
 
 & 
 
 10 EPGBU 
 
 a 
 
 5 TCNDEOF 1 
 
 The extremities of the vertical lines of B N measure the 
 sine of the angle of 5' at 50 m. The normal eye sees B N 
 at 50 m., but at no greater distance ; E R at 40 m., but at 
 no greater distance ; TCNDEOF at 5 m., but at no 
 greater distance. The acuity of vision is expressed by a 
 fraction, the numerator of which is the distance of the
 
 TEST CARDS, TEST LENSES, ETC. 
 
 35 
 
 patient from the test-card, and the denominator the line he 
 reads at that distance. Hence, normal acuity equals f, f , 
 or i. A diminished acuity would be, for example, ^5-, -/$. 
 If the acuity should be so low that B N cannot be seen at 
 5 m., we must bring the card closer to the patient or use 
 larger letters. 
 
 FIG. 15. 
 
 TEST CASE. 
 
 The metric system of numbering lenses according to 
 their refracting power and not according to their focal 
 length, as in the obsolete inch system, is now universally 
 employed by properly equipped ophthalmic surgeons and 
 opticians. A lens which will bend parallel rays of light to 
 a focus at the distance of I m. is called " I Diopter,"
 
 36 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 expressed I D. The word diopter, literally signifying the 
 refractive media of the eye, is transferred to the glass. 
 One-half diopter (.50 D.) will focus parallel rays at the dis- 
 tance of 2 m., 2 D. at y 2 m., 3 D. at % m., 4 D. at ^ m., etc. 
 The weakest lens ordinarily used is .25 D., 4 m. in focal 
 length, and the strongest 20 D., 5 cm. in focal length. 
 
 The refracting power of a minus lens, negative focal 
 length, is the same as that of a plus lens of the same 
 number. 
 
 The cylinders are plus and minus, and are marked like 
 sphericals, in strengths from .25 D. to 6 D. Higher 
 strengths, which are seldom required, may be obtained by 
 superimposed cylinders, whose sum is the refracting power 
 desired. 
 
 The frame for holding lenses before the patient's eyes, 
 consists essentially of two circular lens-holders, marked in 
 degrees from o to 180, held together by a nose-piece and 
 a horizontal bar, along which they can be moved. 
 
 FIELD OF VISION. 
 
 When refraction and accommodation are normal and the 
 media clear, subnormal vision is attributable to some lesion 
 of the retina, choroid, optic nerve or cerebro-spinal system, 
 and when this is the case, it becomes necessary to accurately 
 measure the field of vision, the area over which objects can 
 be seen while the eye remains fixed on a given point. The 
 objects thus bounded by the ultimate range of peripheric 
 vision without changing the direction of the visual line, mark 
 the limits of the visual field, which may be contracted in 
 various ways under pathological influences. The field may 
 be concentrically smaller, it may be diminished or altogether 
 lost on the nasal or temporal side horizontal hemianopsia ;
 
 FIELD OF VISION. 37 
 
 the superior or inferior fields may be similarly affected, 
 vertical hemianopsia, or irregularly shaped defects may be 
 found in its centre or elsewhere, scotomata. 
 
 The sensibility of the retina rapidly diminishes from the 
 fovea to the periphery, and it should be remembered that 
 the bridge of the nose considerably limits the visual field 
 in its inner half, and that the optic disc projects a blind 
 spot of proportionate size to the temporal side of the fixa- 
 tion point, but when the normal field is diminished in 
 any particular section, there is lessened sensibility of the 
 retina. 
 
 The visual field may be approximately measured by direct- 
 ing the patient to sit facing and about twelve inches away 
 from a blackboard in the centre of which a small white 
 cross is marked with a piece of chalk, and to look steadily 
 at this cross with the eye under examination, the other eye 
 being closed, while the examiner with a piece of chalk 
 attached to a dark handle marks on the blackboard the 
 points, in all meridians, at which it fades from peripheric 
 vision. The point at which the patient first sees the chalk 
 as it is moved toward the centre, or at which it disappears 
 from view when moved from the centre, is marked on the 
 blackboard, and is a measure of the visual field. The 
 quantitative field of vision thus determined is not to be 
 confounded with the central smaller area, or qualita- 
 tive field, in which small objects, such as letters, are dis- 
 cernible. 
 
 The perimeter, a simple and comparatively inexpensive 
 instrument, exactly defines the field of vision, and its 
 employment has very generally superseded measurements 
 by the earlier and clumsier methods. It consists essentially 
 of an arc comprising a quadrant, or semicircle, marked in 
 degrees, and adjustable at any angle, and an upright bar to
 
 3 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 which is attached a movable chin rest. On the arc, in the axis 
 of the instrument, is a white mark or cross, thirty cm. from 
 patient's eye, and a sliding clip containing white or colored 
 test. The white test should be eleven mm., and the blue, 
 red and green five mm. in diameter. The patient's ga/c is 
 directed toward the cross while the clip is moved from 
 
 MCHARDY'S PERIMETER. 
 
 the centre toward the periphery. The point at which 
 it disappears from the patient's vision is the limit of 
 the perception of the retina in that direction. A chart 
 is thus made and the visual field for white and colors 
 measured in degrees. The limit of the normal field, 
 subject to variations according to the conformation of the
 
 COLORS. 39 
 
 face, for white, blue, red and green, is illustrated in the 
 following table : 
 
 White. Blue. Red. Green. 
 
 Externally, 7o-9o 65 60 40 
 
 Internally, 5O-6o 60 50 40 
 
 Upwards', 45-55 45 4O 3o-35 
 
 Downwards, 65-7o 60 50 35 
 
 (Landois and Stirling.) 
 
 COLORS. 
 
 Solar light, which is uniform and colorless, is transmitted 
 through what we vaguely term the luminiferous ether in 
 transverse waves of varying length, which, separated, give 
 rise to certain visual impressions that are the source of all 
 color sensations. The dispersion of a beam of light into 
 its separate wave-lengths is effected by means of a prism, 
 which disposes them, refracting each ray in proportion to 
 the shortness of its wave, in a colored spectrum, or band, 
 from which they can by reversion through a similar prism 
 be reformed into a beam of colorless light. Without going 
 into a discussion of the Young-Helmholtz, or Hering the- 
 ories of color vision, which are elaborated in the larger 
 text-books on Physiology, it may be stated that the so- 
 called spectrum colors so shade off, one into the other, that 
 their division by name is largely a matter of arbitrary ar- 
 rangement. Red, blue, and yellow are regarded as primary 
 colors, and form, by combination, secondary colors, that is to 
 say, combinations of blue and red will give purple and 
 violet ; yellow and red combined give orange; and blue and 
 red combined make green. Our color sensations admit of 
 certain other relations and combinations of colors, giving 
 by association in one case, and disassociation in the other, 
 respectively complementary, and contrast or confusion colors. 
 
 COLOR SENSE is quickly and most accurately determined
 
 4O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 by the distinction and separation of various colors without 
 designating them by name. For this purpose it is usual to 
 employ Holmgren's worsteds, a set of skeins of wool made 
 up of the primary, secondary, and confusion or mixed 
 colors. Among them are three large skeins, a light green, 
 a light purple, and a scarlet red. The patient is first asked 
 to match the green, which the examiner does not desig- 
 nate by name. If blind for green, he will confuse with it 
 grays, browns, yellows and drabs. Or if blind for red, 
 he will choose purple, blue and light shades of violet, 
 
 FIG. 17. 
 
 SPECTRUM OBTAINED BY MEANS OF A PRISM. 
 
 red, gray and green. If the patient's color sense is nor- 
 mal, there will be no confusion of the colors in separating 
 the skeins. 
 
 COLOR-BLINDNESS. The question of congenital achro- 
 matopsia, or color-blindness, has acquired considerable im- 
 portance of late years, or since the discovery of the fact that 
 about i in 25 of the entire male population is partially 
 affected by it. The proportion of color-blind is signifi- 
 cantly small in women, being about I in 400. The defect 
 usually is not suspected until its presence is revealed by
 
 COLORS. 41 
 
 examination. Railway men, sailors and soldiers are almost 
 universally compelled to undergo an examination for color- 
 blindness previous to employment 
 
 Acquired achromatopsia is an occasional symptom of 
 disease of the optic nerve, or of hysterical amblyopia, and 
 is treated under these heads.
 
 PART II. 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 
 
 Light proceeds from all luminous bodies through "the 
 ether," a medium independent of the atmosphere, by un- 
 dulations of inappreciable height. The principal source of 
 light is the sun. We conceive that all visible objects con- 
 sist on their surface of innumerable luminous points from 
 which rays of light travel in all directions. It follows that 
 some of the diverging rays from each luminous point must 
 enter the pupil of the eye in straight parallel lines. Rays 
 are assumed to be parallel, in physiological optics, that 
 proceed from a small object removed 6 m. or more from the 
 eye, and an object thus far removed, is said to be at an in- 
 finite distance. 
 
 Refection is the bending or turning back of a ray of light 
 from a surface that neither absorbs, transmits, nor scatters it. 
 
 Refraction is the deviation of light from a straight line 
 in passing obliquely through transparent media of different 
 densities. 
 
 The index of refraction of a substance expresses in num- 
 bers the relative power that medium possesses of bending 
 oblique rays of light which pass through it, away from the 
 direction pursued by them before entering it, or the ratio 
 of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the 
 angle of refraction. The index of refraction of air is taken 
 as I, that of water, as 1.336 (sin. : i. : sin. : r. : : 4 : 3); that 
 of glass, as 1.535 (sin. : i. : sin. : r. : : 3:2). 
 
 42
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 43 
 
 In passing from one medium to another of different 
 density air to glass a ray of light, a a, entering the second 
 medium perpendicular to its surface continues its course 
 unchanged. (Fig. 18.) On the other hand, an oblique ray, 
 b, passing from a lighter to a denser medium, ;//, is bent 
 toward the perpendicular, and from a denser to a lighter 
 medium away from the perpendicular, and if the two sides 
 of the refracting medium are parallel, the emerging ray, b, 
 pursues its course parallel to the incident ray, simply under- 
 going parallel displacement. 
 
 FIG. 1 8. 
 
 REFRACTION BY MEDIUM WITH PARALLEL SIDES. 
 
 The angle of incidence, x, equals the angle of emer- 
 gence, y. 
 
 The incident and emergent rays are not parallel, how- 
 ever, when a ray of light traverses a medium with non- 
 parallel surfaces, but are angularly displaced. In physio- 
 logical optics we simply apply the law of angular deviation 
 experienced by a ray of light in its course through a 
 medium of non-parallel surfaces. This law is best studied 
 in the action of a prism upon rays of light. 
 
 Thus (Fig. 19), in the prism ;//, b is the incident, and b'
 
 44 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 the emergent, ray. It is thus shown that the rays of light 
 are always bent toward the base of the prism, while the 
 source of the rays is apparently displaced toward the apex, a. 
 The angle formed by the meeting of the prolongation of 
 the incident and emergent ray is the angle of deviation, 
 and is about one-half the size of the apex angle. 
 
 Prisms are numbered according to the number of degrees 
 included in the apex. A new nomenclature by which they 
 shall be numbered according to their refractive power, or 
 size of angle of refraction, is under discussion. 
 
 FIG. 19. 
 
 REFRACTION BY A PRISM. 
 
 The lenses used for the correction of spherical errors of 
 refraction are of two kinds (Fig. 20), and may be practically 
 considered as formed by two juxtaposed prisms which, 
 joined by their bases, form convex, and, by their apices, 
 concave lenses. Bearing in mind that in the case of a lens, 
 as in a prism, the rays are always refracted toward its base 
 (thickest portion), the subject is greatly simplified. It is 
 obvious that rays of light are made to converge by the 
 action of a convex, and to diverge by the action of a 
 concave, lens.
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 
 
 45 
 
 The lenses commonly used in ophthalmic practice are 
 made of flint glass or pebble rock crystal, and form either 
 the segment of a sphere, spherical glasses, or the segment 
 
 FIG. 20. 
 
 of a cylinder, cylindrical glasses. Both influence alike the 
 course of rays, but spherical glasses having a centre of cur- 
 vature form images, while cylindrical glasses, having no 
 
 FIG. 21. 
 
 DIFFERENT FORMS OF SPHERICAL LENSES. 
 
 curve parallel to their axes, focus all incident rays into a 
 line parallel to the axis of the cylinder. 
 
 Six modifications of spherical lenses are employed 
 double convex, plano-convex, converging concavo-convex,
 
 46 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 Kir. 22. 
 
 I I 
 
 REFRACTION OF PARALLEL, DIVERGING AND CONVERGING RAYS HY 
 CONVEX LENS.
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 47 
 
 or parabolic, double concave, plano-concave, and diverging 
 concavo-concave. In Fig. 21 these lenses are shown in the 
 order named, from left to right. 
 
 The centre of the lens is called the optical centre, o, (Fig. 
 22, I). The principal axis, m m, is a line passing through 
 the optical centre perpendicular to the surface, and is not 
 refracted. All other rays are refracted, but those passing 
 through the optical centre undergo but slight refraction, 
 emerge in the same direction as they entered, and are 
 called secondary axes, n n. 
 
 Rays of light in passing through a convex lens parallel 
 to its axis, a, II, converge to a point on its distal side, the 
 principal focns, f. The distance from the centre of the 
 lens to the principal focus is the focal distance of the lens, 
 o f, and the degree of bending, or the refraction of the 
 rays, as controlled by the index of refraction and the curve 
 of the surfaces, is the refracting power. Converging incident 
 rays also come to a focus, b, III, on the distal side at a point 
 nearer to the lens than its principal focus, f, and diverg- 
 ing incident rays focus to a point, 1, IV, which is farther 
 removed than the principal focus, f. It follows that incident 
 rays diverging from the principal focus emerge in parallel 
 lines ; that incident rays diverging from a point nearer to the 
 lens than its principal focus, diverge on emerging; and, 
 lastly, that incident rays diverging from a point farther from 
 the lens than its principal focus, converge on emerging. 
 
 The nearer the principal focus the greater the refracting 
 power of the lens. 
 
 CONCAVE LENSES AND THEIR ACTION ON RAYS OF LIGHT. 
 In passing through a concave lens, parallel rays a b, a' b' 
 (Fig. 23), are rendered divergent, c d, c' d', as if proceed- 
 ing from a point F on the line of the principal axis between 
 and on the same side of the lens with the parallel incident
 
 4 8 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 rays (negative form). This point is the virtual focus, and its 
 distance from the lens is the measure of its negative foe it I 
 length. Rays diverging from the principal focus are ren- 
 
 FIG. 23. 
 
 dered still more divergent, and converging rays are ren- 
 dered less converging. 
 
 A cylinder (Fig. 24) having its curve in one direc- 
 
 FIG. 24. 
 
 tion only, must refract rays of light in one direction, namely, 
 in its axis, or in the line passing through the summit of the 
 curve in a convex, and the depth of the depression in a con-
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 49 
 
 cave, cylinder, at right angles to the curve. Let us imagine 
 the cylinder is composed of an infinite number of curved 
 lines in juxtaposition, each one being just wide enough to 
 admit of a single beam of light. Each line will then focus 
 each beam to a point, but the lines are in juxtaposition, 
 hence the points of focus must also be in juxtaposition. 
 Since a line is made up of points, the focus of a cylinder 
 must be a line. The refracting power, focal distance, and 
 other qualities of a cylinder, are spoken of in the same 
 meaning as of a spherical lens, always bearing in mind the 
 fact that it focuses in a line and not in a point. The minus 
 cylinders have negative qualities, as the minus sphericals. 
 
 Around the lens-holders in the test frame is a semicircle 
 marked in degrees, and one end of the axis of the cylinder 
 may be turned to any desirable degree. Hence we say, 
 cyl. ax. 90, or ax. 180, or ax. zjj, etc. When adjusted to 
 the patient's face, the left extreme end is arbitrarily chosen 
 as o, the right or opposite end as 180, and between these 
 extremes, the semicircular bar is marked at intervals of 5. 
 
 The dioptric system, or the refracting media of the eye, 
 which influences the course pursued by rays of light, is 
 composed of structures which differ in density and in the 
 curvature of their surfaces, but it suffices, practically, to 
 average the refracting indices of the several factors, and to 
 consider them as forming, in combination, a double convex 
 lens. A double convex lens of this description is found 
 by intersecting the cornea by an imaginary line continuous 
 with the posterior surface of the lens. The focal length 
 of the combined surfaces thus formed is 22.23 mni -, and 
 the media have a common index of refraction of 1.33. 
 
 Parallel rays impinging upon the cornea of a normal 
 (emmetropic) eye, are brought to a focus upon the retina 
 in the absence of accommodation. Under the same condi-
 
 5<D A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 tion of rest, diverging rays will come to a focus, theoreti- 
 cally, at a point behind the retina, and converging rays will 
 come to a focus at a point in front of the retina. Therefore, 
 in a normal eye at rest, rays which proceed from the focus 
 upon the retina will emerge out of the cornea parallel, those 
 from behind the retina converging, and those from in front 
 of it diverging. 
 
 In examining the fundus of an eye by the ophthalmo- 
 scope, the foregoing optical principles are observed. For 
 instance, if the observer's eye is of normal refraction, and 
 at rest, not accommodating, the details of the fundus of the 
 eye under observation will be seen, provided the observed 
 eye is also suitably illuminated, at rest, and normal in its 
 refraction. Without the aid of artificial light the reflection 
 of light from the observed eye, which is projected along 
 the visual axis of the two eyes, is too feeble for illumi- 
 nation, and the pupil appears black. The pupil of observed 
 eye will still appear black when a light is interposed in 
 the line of vision between it and the observing eye, since 
 the two eyes are adapted to parallel rays only, and the 
 diverging rays from the interposed light would illuminate 
 both eyes, and the returning rays would focus at the 
 interposed light, as if proceeding from a point behind the 
 retina, and an inverted image of the interposed flame 
 would be focused upon the retinae of the two eyes. There- 
 fore, it is not only necessary, in order to see the fundus of 
 the eye under examination, that the observed and observ- 
 ing eyes shall be artificially luminous, but also that the 
 light shall be placed in such a position that its flame will 
 be effective as a source of illumination. 
 
 This necessary arrangement of the light was first accom- 
 plished by Helmholtz, who constructed an instrument by 
 which the light was suitably placed behind the observed
 
 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS. 51 
 
 eye. The invention of this instrument, the ophthalmoscope, 
 has placed ophthalmology among the fixed sciences, and 
 given to its study and practice an interest and effectiveness 
 surpassed by no other department of the medical sciences. 
 Prior to its discovery, the appearance in the living sub- 
 ject of the intra -ocular tissues was unknown. Indeed, our 
 knowledge of the subject was of a kind with the belief, 
 universally held and taught at that time, that there was 
 complete absorption of the light entering the eye. 
 
 FIG. 25. 
 
 DIRECT EXAMINATION BY OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 EXAMINATION BY THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. There are two 
 methods of examining the eyes by the ophthalmoscope, 
 the direct and indirect. 
 
 By the former (Fig. 25), a real, erect, and four-fold 
 magnified image is seen by the observer. A is the observ- 
 ing, B the observed eye, 55 the plane mirror, and x the 
 source of illumination. The rays of light from x impinge
 
 52 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 upon the mirror and are reflected along the dotted lines 
 cd c'd' into B, illuminating the fundus. A, looking 
 through opening in SS, along the line of the reflected 
 rays, sees /?'s retina around b. The dotted lines come 
 to a focus behind b at y. But b is now the source of 
 illumination, and rays emerging out of B pursue a 
 parallel course and are focused by the dioptric apparatus 
 of A at a. 
 
 FIG. 26. 
 
 INDIRECT EXAMINATION BY OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 By the indirect method, an inverted image is formed in 
 the air by the interposition of a strong convex lens 
 (i4 D -2O D ) (Fig. 26). M, observer's, K, observed eye ; S, the 
 mirror. Rays from the mirror S, pass through the lens C 
 (the refraction of these rays is not shown in figure), enter K, 
 and strike on the retina at A. On returning and being 
 refracted by the media of eye K, rays enter the lens C, and 
 are focused by it at B, forming an inverted aerial image, 
 of a portion of A"s retina.
 
 PART III. 
 REFRACTION. 
 
 Normal refraction is dependent on three conditions: 
 (i) on the antero-posterior diameter of the globe, (2) the 
 transparency of the refracting media, and (3) the curve of 
 their surfaces. When an eye is of the right length antero- 
 posteriorly, the refracting media clear, and their surfaces 
 normal in curvature, parallel rays of light are brought to a 
 focus on the percipient layers of the retina, the rods and 
 
 FIG. 27. 
 
 _ 
 
 CONDITION OF REFRACTION IN THE NORMAL PASSIVE EYE AND DURING 
 ACCOMMODATION. 
 
 cones, and the refraction is normal. The refraction is ab- 
 normal when parallel rays of light are not brought to a 
 focus on the retina in the absence of accommodation. 
 
 EMMETROPIA is the term used to denote normal refrac- 
 tion. In an emmetropic eye, parallel rays of light, rr, are 
 brought to a focus (Figs. 27, 28) on the retina, r lt without 
 accommodation, and diverging rays proceeding from a 
 point, p, nearer than infinity, are brought to a focus on 
 
 53
 
 54 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 the retina, /t, by the exercise of a normal amount of 
 accommodation. Such an eye, to be exact, will recog- 
 nize any properly illuminated object whose height is equal 
 to the sine of an angle of 5'. An emmetropic eye of nor- 
 mal acuity of vision is an extremely rare condition, about 
 four per cent. 
 
 A normal refraction and a normal eye are distinct and 
 separate conditions, and should not be confounded. An 
 eye may be of normal refraction and yet be blind from 
 disease. 
 
 AMETROPIA is a generic term used to express variations 
 
 Fie. 28. 
 
 CONDITION OK REFRACTION IN THE NORMAL EYE DURING ACCOMMODA- 
 
 TION. 
 
 from the normal refraction, and has no reference to the 
 kind or degree of refractive error. An ametropic eye may 
 be hypermetropic, myopic, or astigmatic. 
 
 HYPERMETROPIA, HYPEROPIA (Fig. 29). is the most preva- 
 lent form of ametropia, and is that condition of refraction 
 in which parallel rays of light are never focused when the 
 eye is at rest, that is to say, when the eye is not accom- 
 modating. The curvature of the cornea and of the lens, 
 one or both, is so altered that parallel rays are intercepted 
 by the retina before they converge to a focus. In other 
 words, the antero-posterior diameter of the eye, the distance 
 between the apex of the cornea and the layer of rods and
 
 REFRACTION. 55 
 
 cones, is too short. Such an eye is adapted to converging 
 rays. By contraction of the ciliary muscle, the curvature 
 of the anterior, and possibly the posterior, surface of the lens 
 is made more convex, and its antero-posterior diameter 
 is thus increased. In emmetropia this contraction of 
 the ciliary muscle, accommodation, is only necessary for 
 the perception of points of an object nearer the eye than 
 six metres. In hypermetropia, on the other hand, no point 
 can be seen at any distance without accommodation. 
 Hypermetropia is said to be latent when it is concealed 
 by constant contraction of the ciliary muscle ; and hyper- 
 
 FIG. 29. 
 
 HYPERMETROPIC EYE. 
 
 metropia which the contraction of the ciliary muscle, or 
 accommodation, cannot overcome is said to be manifest. 
 The sum of the two, latent and manifest, constitute the 
 total hypermetropia. The degrees of latent and manifest 
 hypermetropia depend on the power of accommodation, 
 the elasticity of the crystalline lens, and on the length of 
 the globe antero-posteriorly. The total hypermetropia 
 depends on the antero-posterior diameter of the eye alone. 
 The symptoms of latent hypermetropia will depend on 
 the age, sex, occupation, and on the acquired and heredi- 
 tary predisposition of the patient. A well-marked case 
 will complain of headache, either constant or following near
 
 56 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 use of the eyes, pain in the eyes, blurring of letters in reading, 
 and lacrymation. No complaint will, be made of bad visi< >n. 
 The diagnosis may be partially made by the ophthalmo- 
 scope, but it can only be completely and satisfactorily 
 determined by retinoscopy, or by test lenses after the 
 accommodation has been paralyzed by a mydriatic. Let 
 us illustrate this by a case : A young man, clerk, age 
 twenty, has suffered for several years from a nearly con- 
 stant headache, which is aggravated by his long hours of 
 office work. General treatment and hygiene have afforded 
 no relief, and he has given up reading at night on account of 
 consequent pain. V. = , made worse by plus, perhaps im- 
 proved by weak minus lenses. Ophthalmoscope shows 
 normal fundus. Headache relieved in three quarters of an 
 hour after instillation of Duboisine, gr. ij-Sj, but V. de- 
 clined to -j 6 ^. Ophthalmoscope gives + 2 D , Retinoscopy 
 -|- 2, and -f 2 D =. Latent Hypermetropia = 2 D . By 
 means of constant over-action of the ciliary muscle, the 
 patient was enabled to increase the antero-posterior diameter 
 of the lens two diopters. 
 
 The symptoms of combined manifest and latent hyper- 
 metropia, are defective vision, blurring of letters in reading, 
 headache, and pain in eyes, aggravated by their use in near 
 work. Case : V. fy, -f I s = $ . During paralysis of accom- 
 modation, V. = ^, -f 3 8 = f . Order, -f 2.50" for constant 
 use. In this case the manifest hypermetropia equals i", 
 latent equals 2 D , and the sum of the two, or total hyper- 
 metropia, = 3. 
 
 It will be noticed that the full correction (total H.), after 
 the paralysis of accommodation has passed away, will 
 not give perfect vision, or -|, in a patient under forty years 
 of age. The reason is obvious. The hypermetropia is 
 concealed both from patient and physician by contraction
 
 MYOPIA. 57 
 
 of the ciliary muscle before instillation of the mydriatic, as 
 well as after its effect has passed away. Hence addition of 
 the glass correcting latent H, unless relaxation of the muscle 
 takes place, must decrease acuity of vision by rendering the 
 eye artificially myopic. Persistent wearing of the correct- 
 ing glasses will eventually cause the latent H. to become 
 manifest, and visual acuity in the distance will thus become 
 normal. 
 
 The range of accommodation in hypermetropia is ex- 
 pressed by the equation a = p -j- r, a representing accom- 
 modation, / the near point, and r the far point. To the 
 
 FIG. 30. 
 
 MYOPIC EYE. 
 
 lens which equals in focal distance the near point must be 
 added the lens which adapts the eye to parallel instead of 
 converging rays. Thus, if / = 20 cm. (5), and + 2 is 
 needed to correct total H., Ace. = 5 + 2 D = 7. 
 
 MYOPIA. 
 
 In emmetropia, it will be remembered, the antero-posterior 
 diameter of the globe is of such length that parallel rays 
 of light come to a focus upon the retina, and that in hyper- 
 metropia this axis of the ball is shorter, and parallel rays 
 
 tend to a focus behind the retina. In myopia, the antero- 
 6
 
 58 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 posterior diameter of the globe is longer than it is in 
 emmetropia, and parallel rays are focused in front of the 
 retina. In the myopic eye, therefore, as in the hyperme- 
 tropic eye, the retina receives only circles of diffusion, vary- 
 ing in extent with the degree of the myopia. The imme- 
 diate cause of the longer axis of the myopic eye is found 
 in the too great convexity of the cornea or lens, or both, 
 or in the stretching of the sclerotic coat. Myopia is con- 
 genital or acquired, and is usually progressive, that is to 
 say, it has a tendency to increase. It is said to be low when 
 the myopia is 3 or less ; moderate in the degrees between 
 3 and 6 D , and high in the degrees above 6 D . The far point 
 of a myopic eye is the distal limit at which vision equals 
 that of an emmetropic eye, and the near point \s, the approx- 
 imate limit at which the retina is enabled to distinguish 
 small objects (fine print). The former depends on the degree 
 of the myopia, the latter on the power of accommodation. 
 The distance between the far and near points, is the range 
 of accommodation, and is expressed a = p r, because 
 the lens which gives full acuity of V for distance must be 
 subtracted from the lens whose focal length equals the dis- 
 tance of the near point, since the exercise of accommodation 
 can only begin at the far point, which necessarily lies within 
 infinity. Thus,^ = 20 cm. (5), r = 50 cm. (2), a = 5 - 
 
 2 = 3. 
 
 An example of each form of myopia may serve to fix 
 the differences between them more firmly in the student's 
 mind. 
 
 Low myopia. Patient, age twenty, complains of inability 
 to see distant objects clearly. No asthenopia. Has never 
 worn glasses. V. in each eye = ^, 2 D in trial frame, 
 gives . The far point is 50 cm. ; near point, 8 cm. Order 
 full correction for distance. No glass for near is required
 
 ASTIGMATISM. 59 
 
 in the absence of astigmatism, or of heterophoria at the near 
 point, for the patient reads at 33 cm. by the exercise of I D of 
 accommodation and 3 meter angles of convergence, and no 
 symptoms will arise from the use of the unaided eyes in near 
 work, unless the relative accommodation is too much dis- 
 turbed. 
 
 Moderate Myopia. Patient, age twenty, complains of bad 
 vision for distance, headache, pain in eyes, and blurred vision 
 in near work, caused by the necessity of holding the work 
 close to the eyes, which strains the convergence, and this 
 strain quickly induces a divergence through failure of con- 
 vergence. V., in each eye, ^ ; 6. D in trial frame gives ^. 
 Far point, 16 cm.; near point, practically the same. The 
 patient does not require, and, therefore, has never developed, 
 accommodation. The correction ordered is, for far, 5-5O D ; 
 for near, 3. This correction gives far point at 33 cm., at 
 which distance the patient can comfortably read. For dis- 
 tance, less than the full correction is given, to avoid dizzi- 
 ness and other discomfort from apparent diminution in size 
 of objects. 
 
 High Myopia. Patient, age twenty, vision very bad for 
 distance, and binocular vision for reading impossible. The 
 myopia = 15. V., in each eye, = -^ ; 15 = ^-. Full 
 acuity of vision cannot be obtained on account of organic 
 changes in the interior of the eye and the apparent reduc- 
 tion in the size of all objects seen through minus glasses. 
 Order, 12 for far, and IO D for near. Accommodation 
 is entirely absent. 
 
 ASTIGMATISM. 
 
 ASTIGMATISM is that condition of refraction in which the 
 curve of the cornea or lens or both, is non-spherical, and 
 parallel rays of light entering the pupil are not focused to
 
 6o 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 a point, but in a line. Astigmatism of the cornea is either 
 regular or irregular ; regular when the two principal meri- 
 dians are at right angles to each other and have radii of 
 different length, and irregular when the corneal curve, as a 
 result of disease, is broken by a number of irregularly 
 defined facets, each one of which has its own radius. 
 Regular astigmatism is hypermetropic, myopic, compound 
 hypermetropic, compound myopic, or mixed. 
 
 In hypermetropic astigmatism one principal meridian is em- 
 metropic and the other principal meridian at right angles to 
 
 FIG. 31. 
 
 ACTION OF AN ASTIGMATIC SURFACE ON A CONE OF LIGHT. (Frost.} 
 
 a, t, c, rfis the astigmatic surface: diverging rays proceed from point_/^ and, passing through 
 c ft, come to a focus at ./>, while those passing through a, b come to a focus at/2. 
 'I he outline of the cone of rays a f>, c d, and/I? varies, as shown in the figure. 
 
 it is hypermetropic; in myopic astigmatism one meridian is 
 emmetropic, and the meridian at right angles to it, myopic. 
 Compound hypermetropic astigmatism is that condition in 
 which both principal meridians are hypermetropic, one 
 more than the other ; and in compound myopic astigmatism 
 the two principal meridians are myopic, one more than the 
 other. In mixed astigmatism one meridian is hyperme- 
 tropic, and the other meridian at right angles to it, 
 myopic. 
 
 The symptoms of astigmatism are defective vision, in-
 
 ASTIGMATISM. 6 1 
 
 ability to use the eyes in prolonged near work, pain in the 
 eyeballs, headache, and other reflex neuroses, more or less 
 obscure and ill-defined, which distract the patient until the 
 ametropia is relieved by the correcting lens. 
 
 Diagnosis and Treatment. An astigmatic test-card,* con- 
 sisting of exactly similar radiating stripes or lines (Fig. 32), 
 is placed 6 m. from the patient, who is directed to look at 
 them and tell which are the clearest and best seen. One or 
 two of these radiating lines will appear to be brighter and 
 more distinct than the rest. The patient is hypermetropic or 
 myopic for the dull lines. The plus or minus cylinder 
 required in astigmatism to supplement the defective refrac- 
 tion of the hypermetropic meridian, or to diminish the myopic 
 meridian, is placed before the eye with its axis parallel to 
 the faintest lines. When the lines are by this method ren- 
 dered equally clear, the astigmatism is corrected. In com- 
 pound hypermetropic or compound myopic astigmatism, 
 the apparent inequality of the lines may be first overcome by 
 a cylinder, and the remaining hypermetropia or myopia cor- 
 rected by a plus or minus spherical lens, or if the spherical 
 defect is so marked as to prevent recognition of the differ- 
 ences in the lines on the astigmatic test-card, a part or all 
 of such defect may be corrected by a spherical lens, and a 
 cylindrical lens used to correct the remaining astigmatism. 
 In mixed astigmatism the lines will appear to be equally 
 indistinct at 6 m., when the hypermetropic and the myopic 
 meridians are defective to the same degree, but if the astig- 
 matic card is brought nearer the patient, the lines in the 
 myopic meridian will become more clear, and those in the 
 hypermetropic meridian fainter. A minus cylinder will 
 
 * The astigmatic card depicted in Fig. 32 was recently made, at our request, 
 by Joseph A. Mullen, and may be obtained from J. L. Borsch & Co., 1324 
 Walnut Street, Philadelphia.
 
 62 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 correct the myopic, and a plus cylinder the hypermetropic, 
 meridian. The two cylinders at right angles to each other 
 
 FIG. 32. 
 
 ASTIGMATIC CLOCK FOR TESTING ASTIGMATISM. 
 
 are converted into a sphero-cylinder, which the patient is 
 instructed to wear. For example, a patient sees horizontal
 
 ASTIGMATISM. 63 
 
 lines best at I m. i c ax. 180 gives normal vision for 
 such lines, and -|- i c ax. 90 corrects vertical lines at 6 m. 
 The formula is: i c ax. 180 O + i c ax. 90, or, 
 and this is the better formula, I s o -f 2 C ax. 90. 
 
 Following are illustrations of the other forms of astig- 
 matism : 
 
 Hypermetropic Astigmatism : V. = -f , accommodation 
 paralyzed; horizontal lines seen best; -j- I s gives vertical 
 lines best without increasing acuity of vision, and I s 
 makes vision worse; -f i ax. 90 renders lines equally clear 
 and distinct in all meridians and gives -f. 
 
 Myopic Astigmatism : V. = f , vertical lines are seen best, 
 -f- I s increases dimness of lines in all meridians. I s im- 
 proves horizontal and dims vertical lines, i c ax. 180, 
 brings out clearly the lines in defective meridians, and gives 
 normal vision, . 
 
 Compound Hypermetropic Astigmatism : V. = -fy, hori- 
 zontal lines seen best but imperfectly, -f- I s improves lines 
 in all meridians, + 2 s over-corrects lines on the horizontal 
 axis + I s O -j- i ax. 90, gives the appearance of equal- 
 ity to all lines, and vision is increased to -|. 
 
 Compound Myopic Astigmatism : V. = -f% ; all lines in- 
 distinct and acuity of vision too low to discriminate differ- 
 ences in them ; 2 s improves all lines, and renders the 
 vertical lines normal in outline and color; I 8 added 
 brings out the horizontal, and dims the vertical lines. 
 Hence a stronger minus glass is required for the horizontal 
 than for the vertical meridian. The formula, 2 s o i c 
 ax. 1 80 makes all lines appear equal, and gives |-. 
 
 Irregular Astigmatism cannot be corrected, but an exam- 
 ination of the refraction will not infrequently reveal an 
 underlying spherical or astigmatic defect, the correction of 
 which will greatly improve vision.
 
 6 4 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 EXAMINATION BY THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 The refraction ophthalmoscope (Fig. 33) consists of a rect- 
 angular or round concave mirror perforated in its centre 
 by a circular opening 4 mm. in diameter. Immediately 
 back of the mirror is one or more metal discs in which is 
 placed a number of lenses, plus I D to 20 and minus 
 I D to 2O D , somewhat larger than the opening in the mirror, 
 
 FIG. 33. 
 
 MORTON'S OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 
 
 any one of which is made by a simple mechanical device 
 to rotate in position behind the opening. 
 
 In the direct examination by the ophthalmoscope, the 
 patient is placed about 50 cm. from, and with his back to, 
 the light, which should be drawn to the side of, and on a 
 level with, the eye under observation. To examine the 
 right eye, the observer holds the ophthalmoscope in his
 
 EXAMINATION BY THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 65 
 
 right hand and in front of his right eye. Looking through 
 the opening in the mirror at some little distance from 
 the patient, whose eye is illuminated by reflection of light 
 from the mirror, the observer sees a red reflex through 
 the pupil, the reflection from the choroid of the light 
 thrown by the mirror into the patient's eye. The outlines 
 
 THE ENTRANCE OF THE OPTIC NERVE WITH THE ADJACENT PARTS OF 
 THE FUNDUS OF THE NORMAL EYE. 
 
 A. Physiological excavation, b, Choroidal ring. c. Arteries, d. Veins, g. Division of 
 the central artery. A. Division of the central vein. L. Lamina cribrosa. t. Tem- 
 poral (outer) side. . Nasal (inner) side. 
 
 of the majority of the choroidal vessels are concealed by 
 the pigment coat of the retina, and only a glare is seen. 
 Approaching the eye as closely as possible, without chang- 
 ing the refraction of the ophthalmoscope, the vessels of the 
 retina are displayed, leading to and from the optic disc or
 
 66 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 papilla (Fig. 34), which appears as a pinkish-white round 
 or oval disc, slightly excavated in its centre. Only a small 
 portion of the fundus can be seen at once, but to the ob- 
 server, standing in close proximity to the patient, the field 
 covered is apparently large, the details being magnified 
 about fourfold. The principal points to be observed and 
 noted, are the condition of the media, shape of disc, 
 the distinctness of its marginal outlines, character and de- 
 gree of excavation, pulsation of veins or arteries, presence 
 or absence of pigment spots, calibre of vessels, and dis- 
 turbances in their coats. The fovea is removed about four 
 times the apparent diameter of the disc to the temporal side 
 of the nerve, and appears as a rounded red spot with a bright, 
 glistening centre, round or oval, and inclined to modify its 
 shape according to the amount, intensity, and direction of 
 the light thrown upon it. The fovea is free from visible 
 blood-vessels. Each part of the fundus should be observed 
 in turn : first, the nerve and adjacent parts, then the 
 fovea, and finally the different quadrants or sections of the 
 fundus. This is readily accomplished by having the patient 
 rotate the eye in different directions. It is good practice 
 in all ophthalmoscopic observations, to examine first the 
 cornea, using + 6 D in ophth. for this purpose, secondly, 
 the pupil and lens with -f- 5 and the anterior and pos- 
 terior portions of the vitreous with -f- 3 s , before proceed- 
 ing to the details of the fundus. 
 
 By the indirect method the light is thrown by the mirror 
 through a lens of 13 into the patient's eye. The light, 
 returning through the lens, is focused at approximately 
 its focal distance. Before the opening in the mirror is 
 -|- 4 D , to enlarge the aerial image and to replace the 
 observer's strain of accommodation. This method is
 
 EXAMINATION BY THE OPHTHALMOSCOPE. 67 
 
 especially useful in determining the condition of the 
 choroid and retina in high myopia and in opacities of 
 the media. 
 
 To determine refraction by the ophthalmoscope by the 
 direct method, theoretically, the observer's eye should 
 be emmetropic and at rest, and the accommodation of 
 the eye examined in abeyance. The mirror with the 
 observing eye immediately back of it, is held within 
 half an inch of the eye observed. The media are clear. 
 If observed and observing eyes are emmetropic, rays 
 passing from each point of the fundus of the former 
 become parallel as they emerge out of the cornea, and, 
 entering the cornea of the latter parallel, are focused upon 
 the observer's retina. If the patient is hypermetropic, ob- 
 server emmetropic, the rays emerging from his cornea are 
 divergent, details indistinct, and a plus glass will be re- 
 quired to so bend the rays that they enter observer's eye 
 parallel, and this is done by rotating the metal disc in the 
 ophthalmoscope until the glass required to clear the picture 
 comes in position behind the mirror. If the patient is 
 myopic, observer emmetropic, the rays emerging out of his 
 cornea are convergent, and a minus glass will be required 
 to render them parallel as they enter the observer's eye. 
 In both instances the observer is aware, by the dim images 
 of the small vessels near the fovea, where only an accurate 
 determination may be made, that the rays from this region 
 are not entering his eye parallel, but from this knowledge 
 alone he cannot tell whether they are converging or 
 diverging. He revolves the disc until he finds a glass 
 which defines the image, and that glass is the measure 
 of the ametropia of the observed eye. 
 
 In simple astigmatism the vessels in one meridian will be 
 seen more clearly defined than those of the opposite
 
 68 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 meridian, and the spherical lens, plus or minus, which 
 makes those vessels clear and blurs the opposite ones, will 
 designate the degree, kind and axis of the astigmatism. In 
 compound astigmatism, vessels in all meridians arc indis- 
 tinct, some more than others. The glass, plus or minus, 
 which makes each set of vessels in turn clear and distinct, 
 will be the kind and degree of ametropia for these meri- 
 dians. The disc is usually oblong, its long diameter 
 corresponding with the axis of the astigmatism. 
 
 Diagnosis of Hypermetropia by the Ophthalmoscope. The 
 retinal vessels are seen at several inches from the observed 
 eye, and apparently move in the same direction as the mirror. 
 More details are evident on closer approximation of the oph- 
 thalmoscope. The nerve and vessels are distinctly seen 
 without a lens, but they can also be seen tJirough a conrc.v 
 glass.. The first, by overcoming the divergence of rays 
 emerging from observed eye by contraction of the ciliary 
 muscle in observing eye, and the latter, by relaxation of 
 the contraction, and substitution of a convex glass for it. 
 The disc is apparently smaller than in emmetropia or 
 myopia. 
 
 The Diagnosis of Myopia by the Ophthalmoscope. The disc 
 is large, but ill defined, and can be distinctly seen only through 
 a minus glass and on close approximation. In high de- 
 grees of myopia, 8 D or more, an aerial inverted image of a 
 small part of the fundus may be seen at a distance of five 
 inches or less. The image is inverted, and vessels, there- 
 fore, move in an opposite direction to that of the mirror. 
 
 An accurate estimation of the degree of the ametropia is 
 rarely attained, but an approximate estimate is always made 
 by the experienced ophthalmoscopist.
 
 FIG. 35. 
 
 ILLUSTRATION OF RETINOSCOPY BY THE PLANE MIRROR. 
 
 1. L. Source of illumination. M. Mirror. /. Inverted image of L on retina. /. Apparent 
 
 source of illumination. If the mirror be rotated to M': I' New position of L on retina. 
 /'. New apparent position of L. Hence the shadow has moved with mirror. 
 
 2. Myopic eye, producing an inverted aerial image, since the rays coming out from the eye 
 
 cross between the cornea and mirror. 
 
 69
 
 7O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 RETINOSCOPY BY THE PLANE MIRROR. 
 
 The observer stands I m. in front of the patient, behind 
 and slightly above whose head a small, bright light is 
 placed. The mirror reflects parallel rays of light into 
 patient's eye, and the rays return out of it parallel 
 (emmetropia), diverging (hypermetropia), or converging 
 (myopia). In an cmmctropic eye, the image of the flame 
 on patient's retina moves with the movement of the 
 mirror in all meridians. If -f 3" is placed in spectacle 
 frame before the patient's eye, the rays emerging out of 
 which are parallel, they will be brought to a point at the 
 focal distance of the lens, 33 cm., the /#/>// of reversal, as it 
 is called. The point of reversal is determined by the ob- 
 server, who gradually approaches the patient, rotating 
 the mirror until he notices that the light or shadow in the 
 patient's eye ceases to move against it. No movement of 
 the light is noticed exactly at the point of reversal, but 
 nearer the patient's face, or within the focal distance of the 
 lens, the light will move in the same direction as the move- 
 ment of the mirron All meridians of the cornea must be 
 examined, and in each axis the point of reversal will be 
 found at 33 cm. from the patient's eye. 
 
 In hypermetropia t the shadow moves with the mirror. Use 
 -f 3 lens as in the previous case. If the point of reversal is 
 I m. from the patient's eye, there must be 2 D of hyperme- 
 tropia. The -j- 3" corrects all the hypermetropia and pro- 
 duces i of artificial myopia, the far point of which is I m. 
 (The rays enter the lens diverging from the patient's eye, are 
 brought to a focus at I m., hence the -f 3" over-corrects the 
 defect by i n .) If no point of reversal can be determined by 
 -f 3" at I m., the hypermetropia exceeds 2", and a stronger 
 lens will be required. Suppose we place -f 5 in spectacle 

 
 RETINOSCOPY BY THE PLANE MIRROR. /I 
 
 frame, and find that the point of reversal is at 50 cm., 
 which is the far point of 2 D of myopia, the hypermetropia 
 will, in this case, equal 3", the + 5" having over-corrected 
 the defect by 2 D . 
 
 In myopia, the shadow moves in the opposite direction to 
 the movements of the mirror. No lens is necessary unless 
 the defect is less than I D . The point of reversal will be 
 found at the far point of the eye, and the distance between 
 this point and the eye equals the refracting power of the 
 excess of curvature in the eye. Thus, if the far point is 40 
 cm., the myopia equals 2.50; if at 33 cm., the myopia 
 equals 3", or, if at 25 cm., the myopia equals 4". If the 
 far point cannot be found at 25 cm., or farther, and if the 
 shadows continue to move opposite to the mirror at 25 cm., 
 myopia of more than 4 is assured. Closer than this, an 
 inaccurate estimate of the point of reversal, when the 
 shadows cease to move against, and begin to move with the 
 mirror, causes a considerable error in the result, and to avoid 
 error it is best, under these conditions, to disperse the rays 
 by placing a minus glass in spectacle frame. The lens used 
 for this purpose must be added to the myopia determined by 
 its use. For example, if, with 3 held in trial frames the 
 point of reversal is found to be at 50 cm., the myopia = 5. 
 
 HYPERMETROPIC AND MYOPIC ASTIGMATISM are de- 
 termined by the method employed in spherical defects, 
 and are not more difficult. The point of reversal is found 
 to be at different distances for the two principal meridians. 
 For example, with -f- 3 point of reversal for horizonal 
 meridian is at I m., and for vertical meridian 33 cm., the 
 hypermetropic astigmatism is equal to 2 D ax. 90. Or 
 suppose with -f- 5 D the point of reversal for horizontal 
 meridian is at 50 cm., H = 3" ax. 90, and at 33 cm., for 
 vertical meridian H = 2 D ax. 180, it must be evident that
 
 72 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 there is compound hypermetropic astigmatism, equal to 
 + 2* o -f- i c ax. 90. If without a lens, the point of 
 reversal for vertical meridian is at 33 cm., the myopia 
 will equal 3" for that meridian. With -f I the point of 
 reversal for horizontal meridian is at I m. ; that meridian is 
 emmetropic. Glasses for this case should be, 3 ax. 180. 
 Again, suppose that without a glass point of reversal for 
 axis 45 (meridian opposite) = 50 cm. (myopia = 2 D ax. 
 45), with -\- 4 D in spectacle frames for axis 135 (meridian 
 opposite) = 50 cm. (hypermetropia 2" ax. 135), the cor- 
 rection will be, -- 2 s O -f- 4 C ax. 135. In conducting 
 examinations by retinoscopy the patient's pupil should 
 be dilated. 
 
 This method of determining the refraction is accurate, 
 rapid, scientific, and especially valuable in children and 
 illiterate persons, and in the diagnosis of irregular cornea 
 without opacities. 
 
 PRESBYOPIA. 
 
 PRESBYOPIA (P) is a failure of accommodation due to 
 senile changes, and is manifested by a recedence of the near 
 point. It is not a disease, it is not an error of refraction, 
 but a loss of elasticity of the crystalline lens, or of power 
 in the ciliary muscle, or the two combined. Greater stress 
 should be laid on the former. 
 
 Presbyopia in emmctropia, begins to manifest itself at or 
 about the age of 45 years, the subject noticing that small 
 objects, print, cannot be comfortably or distinctly seen for 
 any length of time at the usual reading distance, 35 cm., 
 and is obliged to hold the book, paper, or sewing farther 
 from the eye than formerly. Continuous reading induces 
 blurring, pain, headache, lacrymation, etc. A glass which 
 will bring the near point closer to the eye, and thus diminish
 
 PRESBYOPIA. 73 
 
 the effort to focus small objects at 35 cm., in which there is 
 an obligation to call too much on the reserve accommoda- 
 tion, is required. About the age of 45 years, the near point 
 = 20 cm., the reading distance 33 cm., and the reserve 
 accommodation = 2 D . At this age, therefore, an emme- 
 tropic person must exercise in near work all but 2 D of 
 accommodation. With -f- I D , the near point is brought 
 back to 16 cm., and he thus has for 33 cm., 3 of accommo- 
 dation in reserve. At 50 years the near point has receded to 
 25 cm., and the total accommodation equals 4, and -f 2 D 
 brings near point to 16 cm. and patient reads comfortably at 
 33 cm. with 3 of accommodation in reserve. At a more 
 advanced age, accommodation has entirely failed and must 
 be substituted by a plus glass which has a focus at a con- 
 venient distance for close work. Patients differ in showing 
 signs of advancing age, and no law governing increase 
 of glass can be laid down as unalterable, but the above 
 changes represent the average of cases, and must be modi- 
 fied to meet individual necessities. 
 
 Presbyopia in hypcrmetropia and in compound Jiypcrme- 
 tropic astigmatism. The convex lens necessary to restore 
 the receded near point, must be determined exactly as in 
 emmetropia, and added to the correction of existing hyper- 
 metropia or compound hypermetropic astigmatism. For 
 example, -f- 2 D = -| in a patient, age 50, near point 
 (with + 2" ) = 25 cm. By adding -f i.5O D , the near 
 point = 1 8 cm.; -f 2 D is ordered for distance, and -f 3-5 
 for near. Another case : Patient, age 45, -f- 1 s o + 2 ax. 
 90 = f-, which is ordered for distance, and -f- 2 o + 2 C 
 ax. 90 for near. 
 
 Presbyopia in Myopia, and Compound Myopic Astigmatism. 
 The presbyopic correction in higher grades of myopia 
 must be made at a much earlier age than in emmetropia or 
 7
 
 74 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 hypermetropia, on account of the natural feebleness from 
 non-development of the ciliary muscle. Example: 2 D = 
 . No glass will be required for near work until patient 
 has reached forty-five to fifty years, because he has used 
 but I D of accommodation for reading at 33 cm. After that 
 age plus glasses must be added, accommodation having 
 
 FIG. 36. 
 A. 
 
 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 87654 3 2 IDoolD !i 3 * 
 
 E. .M5 
 
 Acc=i2o. ; _l I I I I ! i 
 
 M.'iD. 1 r 
 Acc?120. 
 H.3Q.aetJ5. 
 Acc=12D. 
 
 rr - H- 
 
 E.aeUO 
 AccT4-5D. 
 
 E. eet.50. 
 Acc=2-5D. 
 
 M.3D.at.50. 
 .Acc=2-5D. 
 
 H.3D.ath.4Q 
 Acc?4-5D. 
 
 H.3D.aet50 
 Acc?2-5D. 
 
 
 
 DIAGRAMS OF RANGE OF ACCOMMODATION IN E., H. AND M. 
 
 A. Patient aged 15. B. From 40 to 50 years. 
 
 commenced to fail. At sixty, 2 for far, and + 1-50" for 
 near vision. Patient, age forty-five, requiring 8 O 
 2 C ax. 1 80 for distance, will wear 5 o 2 r ax. 180 
 for near. Take, as an example, next, simple myopic astig- 
 matism : 2 C ax. 135 = f, in a patient forty-five years old,
 
 MYDRIATICS. 75 
 
 the presbyopia correction is -J- I o 2 C ax. 135. At the 
 age of fifty, the correction would be -f 2 O 2. c ax. 135 
 (= + 2 c ax. 45 ). 
 
 Presbyopia in mixed astigmatism : age forty-five, I o -f- 
 3 ax. 90 = f. Add -\- I- f r near, which would give 
 as the presbyopic correction + 3 ax. 90 (+ I added to 
 i = o) ; at fifty, add + 2 D for near, which would equal -f 
 i o -\~ 3 ax. 90. 
 
 In all cases of presbyopia the weakest glass which will 
 serve all the purposes demanded should be ordered, for it 
 must be remembered that the ciliary muscle and internal 
 rectus are supplied by the same nerve, and that a strong 
 glass enforces excessive convergence. 
 
 MYDRIATICS. 
 
 In estimating total hypermetropia or hypermetropic 
 astigmatism, and especially those of minor degree, it will 
 be necessary to paralyze the accommodation in most 
 persons under forty years of age. After that age the accom- 
 modation is so limited that it may be dispensed with as an 
 important factor in the correction of ametropia. Contra- 
 indication to the use of a mydriatic in a patient more than 
 forty years of age, is based on the fact that its employment 
 may precipitate an attack of acute glaucoma in an eye pre- 
 disposed to that disease. In persons less than forty years 
 old, this disease is rarely encountered. Moreover, after 
 that time of life the accommodation has become relaxed to 
 such an extent that paralysis is not only unnecessary but a 
 positive hindrance, since it is desirable in most cases of this 
 nature to estimate the range of accommodation and pre- 
 scribe glasses for near work, and this cannot be accurately 
 done during paralysis.
 
 76 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 In low degrees of myopia and myopic astigmatism in 
 young persons, abolition of the accommodation is necessary, 
 because contraction of the ciliary muscle increases the 
 defect, and a glass ordered without mydriasis would over- 
 correct the error. 
 
 Spasm of Accommodation, which is frequently present in 
 low degrees of hypermetropia or hypermetropic astig- 
 matism, simulating myopia, cannot be corrected without 
 mydriasis. The patient should be informed that vision 
 will be temporarily disturbed by the mydriatic, and that 
 near work will not be possible during the continuance of 
 its action. The patient should also be told of the possible 
 constitutional effects, such as flushing of the face, dry 
 throat, dizziness, drowsiness, and, in rare instances, active 
 delirium. 
 
 Mydriatics are sometimes very useful in discriminating 
 nervous symptoms due to eye strain, headache, chorea, and 
 other reflex disturbances of function, from those due to 
 other causes. During paralysis of accommodation, should 
 they be due to overaction of the ciliary, or extrinsic ocular 
 muscles, they will be modified or entirely subdued, to re- 
 turn when the mydriasis has passed away. When the 
 symptoms are due to organic lesions, or disease of other 
 organs, they are not affected by paralysis of accommoda- 
 tion. 
 
 Atropine sulphate (gr. iv-5j), duboisine sulphate (gr. ij 
 5j), hyoscyamine sulphate (gr. ij-Sj), and hydrobro- 
 mate of homatropine (gr. viij-5j), are the mydriatics 
 employed for the purposes thus indicated, as well as in 
 certain inflammatory conditions of the eye to secure rest of 
 the organ, and to prevent adhesions between the iris and 
 lens capsule, or between the iris and cornea. 
 
 For determining refraction, duboisine is to be preferred to
 
 MYDRIATICS. 77 
 
 other members of the group. It acts more rapidly, and the 
 effects pass away sooner, than atropine ; and as compared 
 with hyoscyamine and homatropine, the mydriasis is more 
 complete, when induced by one or two instillations of the 
 drug. Atropine is indicated in disease. To dilate the 
 pupil for the purpose of examining the eye ground 
 homatropine is probably the best agent, its action being 
 rapid and transient. 
 
 The hydrobromate of cocaine (4 per cent, sol.) dilates 
 the pupil and partly paralyzes the accommodation, and 
 should, therefore, be classed among the mydriatics. It is, 
 however, useless as a mydriatic, because it destroys the 
 epithelium of the cornea and clouds its transparency. In 
 ophthalmic practice it is only used to induce local anaes- 
 thesia, or as an adjunct to other mydriatics to secure the 
 widest possible dilatation of the pupil.
 
 PART IV. 
 
 THE OCULAR MUSCLES. 
 
 The action of the muscles upon the eyeball should be 
 considered, first, in respect of the change of position of the 
 cornea ; and, secondly, of the change of position of the 
 vertical meridian of the cornea. 
 
 The external rectus rolls the cornea outward, the inter- 
 nal rectus inward, the superior rectus upward and inward, 
 the upper end of the meridian turning inward, and 
 the inferior rectus rolls the cornea downward and in- 
 ward, turning the upper end of the meridian outward. The 
 superior oblique muscle rolls the cornea downward and 
 outward, turning the upper end of the meridian inward, 
 and the inferior oblique rolls it upward and outward, rota- 
 ting the upper end of the meridian outward. 
 
 The globe is rolled outward by the combined action of 
 the external rectus and the two oblique muscles ; inward 
 by the internal, superior, and inferior recti ; ufnvard by the 
 superior rectus and inferior oblique, and dim' meant by 
 the inferior rectus and superior oblique. (Fig. 37). The 
 muscular apparatus of the two eyes are in intimate asso- 
 ciation, have a concerted action, and are stimulated by a 
 common nervous impulse. 
 
 PARALYSIS. 
 
 In paralysis of an ocular muscle, the symptoms are 
 marked and significant. There is double vision (diplopia) 
 with limited movement of affected eye on the side and in the 
 
 78
 
 PARALYSIS. 
 
 79 
 
 direction of the paralyzed muscle, and secondary squint, or 
 corresponding deviation of the sound eye, when fixing with 
 the affected eye. The head is disposed toward the paralyzed 
 side, and the eye has a tendency to close. Dizziness, con- 
 fusion, and incorrect estimation of position and of space, 
 
 FIG. 37. 
 
 SCHEME OF THE ACTION OF THE OCULAR MUSCLES. 
 
 Q E. Direction of traction of ext. rect. Qi, I. Of int. reel. Si. Of sup. and inf. recti. 
 ab. Of inf. oblique, c d. Of sup. oblique. O. Point of rotation. Q Qj. Transverse 
 axis. 
 
 are occasional symptoms. The two images of a single 
 object seen in the median line are more widely separated 
 when the object is moved in the direction of the action of 
 the paralyzed muscle. The true image is seen by the sound,
 
 8o 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 and the false image by the affected, eye. To determine the 
 eye and muscle affected, the position of the images and the 
 changing relation between them, induced by the move- 
 ment of head and object looked at, must be studied. It 
 may be stated in general terms that, first, the image is false, 
 and belongs to the affected eye, which, in the region of 
 
 FIG. 38. 
 
 diplopia, moves faster than the moving object; second, 
 that in pathological convergence homonymous (image on 
 same side as the eye), and in pathological divergence, hctcr- 
 onymous (image on side opposite to eye), diplopia is found ; 
 and, third, the false image stands in such relation to the 
 affected eye as the paralyzed muscle normally functionates.
 
 PARALYSIS. 
 
 8l 
 
 In paralysis of the external reclu s (Fig. 38) the diplopia is 
 homonymous (not crossed), and the images are not tilted 
 at either end. In paralysis of the internal rectus (Fig. 39) 
 the diplopia is, conversely, heteronymous (crossed), and the 
 false image is not tilted at either extremity. The diplopia 
 is crossed opposite the affected muscle in paralysis of the 
 
 FIG. 39. 
 
 ob. Object. Fob. Apparent position of object seen by right eye. 
 
 superior rectus, and the upper end of the false image 
 is tilted slightly inward. The diplopia is also crossed in 
 paralysis of the inferior rectus, the upper end of the false 
 image tilting slightly outward. There is homonymous 
 diplopia in paralysis of the superior and inferior oblique ;
 
 82 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 in the former case the upper end of the false image is* 
 tilted inward, and in the latter outward. 
 
 The position of the images is modified when more than 
 one muscle is paralyzed, and the diagnosis is, under these 
 conditions, not infrequently obscure. 
 
 OPHTHALMOPLEGIA is the name given to designate paraly- 
 sis of all the muscles of the eye. Ophthalmoplegia externa 
 is an occasional symptom of locomotor ataxia. Ophthal- 
 moplegia interna is very rare, but paralysis of accommo- 
 dation, or partial Ophthalmoplegia interna, is a common 
 sequence of diphtheria. 
 
 The affection may be caused by syphilis, rheumatism, 
 traumatism, tumors, hydrocephalus, diphtheria, meningitis, 
 spinal affections, and by basal, cortical, or nuclear disease. 
 
 Prognosis is good in syphilis, rheumatism, and diph- 
 theria, and grave in organic disease of the brain, nerve, 
 or spinal cord. 
 
 Treatment is medical or electrical, and is primarily ad- 
 dressed to the cause of paralysis. Operative interference 
 is not warranted. 
 
 NYSTAGMUS is an involuntary oscillation of the eyeball, 
 due to the instantaneous contraction and relaxation of one 
 or more muscles from defective co-ordination. It is con- 
 genital in microphthalmus, coloboma, certain forms of 
 congenital cataract, albinos, and in Friederich's disease. It 
 is present, sometimes, in lesions of transparency due to 
 ophthalmia neonatorum, and in retinitis pigmentosa. 
 Miners who are compelled to work for long periods of 
 time in strained positions, and in darkness, frequently 
 develop the disease. Internal squint is a frequent compli- 
 cation of nystagmus. 
 
 The prognosis is never encouraging under the most 
 favorable circumstances, but the vision, which is usually
 
 FUNCTIONAL MUSCULAR AFFECTIONS. 83 
 
 defective, may be improved by glasses, the squint cured by 
 operation, and some relief from the more distressing symp- 
 toms obtained by these means in cases of recent duration. 
 No further relief has been hitherto accomplished. 
 
 FUNCTIONAL MUSCULAR AFFECTIONS. 
 
 In muscular anomalies of a functional character, there 
 is a deviation, or a tendency to deviation, of the eyes from 
 equilibrium. 
 
 Accepting Stephens' nomenclature, which is accurately 
 descriptive and scientific, the different muscular anomalies 
 are defined as follows : Ortliophoria, perfect binocular equi- 
 librium ; Heterophoria, imperfect binocular equilibrium ; 
 Hyperplioria, a tendency of one eye to deviate upward ; 
 Esophoria, a tendency to deviate inward ; Exophoria, a 
 tendency to deviate outward ; Hyperesophoria, a tendency 
 to deviate upward and inward of one eye, or downward 
 and inward of the other ; Hyperexophoria, a tendency to 
 deviate upward and outward of one, or downward and 
 outward of the other, eye. 
 
 It must be borne in mind that functional deviations in- 
 volve both eyes. One eye alone cannot be at fault in con- 
 vergence. In hyperphoria, one eye may have a tendency 
 upward, or the other eye downward, and these relations 
 may be interchangeable. The term, therefore, does not 
 indicate where the fault lies. For instance, right hyper- 
 phoria means that the superior rectus of the right eye is too 
 strong for the inferior rectus of the same eye, or that the 
 inferior rectus of the left eye is too strong for its superior 
 rectus. Right hyperphoria means, then, that the right eye 
 has a tendency to turn higher than the left. 
 
 Orthotropia is a term used to express perfect binocular
 
 84 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 fixation ; lleterotropia, a turning from parallelism ; Esotropiin, 
 a turning inward, convergent squint; Exotropia t a turn- 
 ing outward, divergent squint; Hypertropia, a turning 
 upward ; Hyperesotropia, a turning of one eye upward and 
 inward, and Hyperexotropia, a turning of one eye upward 
 and outward. 
 
 The strength of an ocular muscle is measured by its ability 
 to overcome prisms, while both eyes are fixed on a small 
 light at 6 m. The external recti, abduction, overcome in 
 the average 8, and the internal recti, adduction, 30. 
 The superior rectus of one and the inferior rectus of the 
 other eye (sursumduction) overcome, on the average, 3. 
 This power to overcome prisms may be greatly increased 
 by exercise. 
 
 The procedure is not difficult. Place a small light 6 m. 
 away and instruct the patient to look steadily at the flame 
 with both eyes. To measure the strength of the internal 
 recti, adduction, place a prism of 10 with the angle /;/ 
 before the right eye. The image of the flame is thrown to 
 the right of the fovea, and double images are momentarily 
 seen until the internal rectus contracts, and thus rotates 
 the eye inward till the fovea reaches the site of the image 
 and there is fusion of the images. Another prism of 10 
 introduced before the left eye, angle in, throws the image 
 to the left of the fovea; the internal rectus contracts to the 
 same extent, and again single images are seen. This pro- 
 cedure is carried on until the internal recti can no longer 
 fuse the images. The highest prism through which single 
 images can be seen is the measure of adduction. While 
 overcoming prisms of increasing strength, the eyes are 
 seen to become more and more turned inward. To 
 measure the strength of the external recti, abduction, prisms 
 of increasing strength with their angles outward, are placed
 
 FUNCTIONAL MUSCULAR AFFECTIONS. 85 
 
 before the eyes, until about 7 are used. In order to over- 
 come the double images one eye is deflected strongly ont- 
 iunrd, that is to say, the external rectus of that eye is 
 contracted. 
 
 The angle of the prism is placed in the direction of the 
 action of the muscle to be tested. 
 
 In low degrees of heterophoria, the diagnosis depends 
 on the induction of artificial diplopia, and on establishing 
 the relation to each other of the two images thus induced 
 at infinity, and at the reading distance. In testing for hy- 
 perphoria, lateral diplopia must be produced by a prism 
 strong enough to overcome either the external or internal 
 rectus. As the external recti at 6 m. are the weaker mus- 
 cles, a prism of 4, held horizontally a few inches in front 
 of each eye, with its angle outward, may be used. In 
 orthophoria, the images of the candle flame at 6 m. will 
 be side by side in the horizontal plane. In hyperphoria 
 the images will be lateral, but one higher than the other. 
 For example, in left hyperphoria, the left eye is released 
 by the prism of 8, which the external recti cannot over- 
 come, from the necessity of maintaining binocular vision, 
 and, yielding to its abnormal disposition to deflect from 
 parallelism, turns upward. Hence its image will be lower 
 than the image of the right eye. The prism required 
 to restore it to the plane of the image of the right eye, with 
 its angle upward, will be the angular measurement of its 
 displacement, and the left hyperphoria will equal that num- 
 ber in prismatic degrees. 
 
 In testing equilibrium of the lateral muscles a prism, 
 strong enough to overcome the action of the superior or 
 inferior rectus, will give vertical diplopia. If the lateral 
 muscles are in equilibrium, the images will be in a vertical 
 plane. In esophoria, the candle flame at 6 m., seen by the
 
 86 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 right eye, will be to the right of the vertical plane passing 
 through the image seen by the left eye, homonymous 
 diplopia ; and in exophoria the image seen by the right 
 eye will be to the left, crossed diplopia, and the prism, base 
 out in esophoria and base in in exophoria, which restores 
 the image seen by the right, into the vertical plane of the 
 left, will be the angular measurement of the deviation. 
 
 For the reading distance, 35 cm., the tests are conducted 
 in precisely the same way, but the object for fixation should 
 be the size of letters ordinarily read at that distance. 
 
 Esophoria is usually greatest in the distance, and exo- 
 phoria at the near point.* Hyperphoria is the same at all 
 distances. In many cases of heterophoria it cannot be de- 
 termined which eye is at fault. We are sometimes aided in 
 diagnosis by information supplied by the patient as to which 
 image, during artificial diplopia, wanders from equilibrium, 
 which seems to the patient to be the true and which the 
 false, and by the condition of the refraction. If a refraction 
 error exists, and is greater in one eye than in the other, or 
 if the acuity of vision differs in the two eyes, the affected 
 muscle may be ascribed to the weaker eye. 
 
 As has just been intimated, heterophoria is influenced 
 by refraction. Hypermetropia and hypermetropic astig- 
 matism cause esophoria in a very considerable proportion 
 of cases, and are found associated with it. Although exo- 
 phoria cannot be said to depend on refraction error, it is 
 frequently associated with myopia and myopic astigmatism. 
 Hyperphoria seems to be largely independent of ametropia. 
 
 The local symptoms are those of accommodative strain, 
 and are of little value in the diagnosis. The reflex symp- 
 toms are at times severe headache, nausea and vomiting, 
 
 * In testing muscles, ametropic and presbyopic corrections should be worn.
 
 FUNCTIONAL MUSCULAR AFFECTIONS. 8/ 
 
 indigestion, choreic movements, and the various vague 
 and misleading phenomena of nervous prostration. On 
 the other hand, they may be slight or altogether wanting. 
 
 The diagnosis of heterophoria is not difficult, although 
 its detection may require patient and skillful manipula- 
 tion. Double vision may never have been noticed by 
 the patient, but can be often produced by covering one 
 eye with a red glass while the patient looks at a small 
 flame at 6 m. With a little perseverance, the patient will 
 acknowledge seeing the two lights, one natural in color 
 the other red, and by the relations they bear to one another, 
 the kind and degree of heterophoria may be determined. 
 And this is true whether the squint is high -or low. Even 
 in cases of long-continued internal or external strabismus, 
 where the patient has ceased to have double images by 
 the unconscious suppression of one, its existence may be 
 thus recognized ; and when the patient is convinced that 
 he really sees two lights, the diagnosis is simple. In treat- 
 ment it is important that the patient shall acknowledge the 
 two lights, for the surgeon is guided during his operation 
 by the new position of the images. 
 
 Maddox has suggested the use of a glass rod, instead of 
 prisms, in the determination of heterophoria. A glass 
 rod is a strong cylinder which distorts the natural 
 flame into a long streak of light. The difference between 
 the image seen by the eye before which the glass rod .is 
 placed and that seen by the other eye, is so marked that 
 binocular fixation is not possible in the absence of muscular 
 equilibrium. If, for instance, the rod is placed before the 
 right eye in an exactly vertical position, the streak of light 
 will be horizontal, and in orthophoria the light will be seen 
 directly in the centre of the streak. In hyperphoria the 
 light will be above or below the streak. In esophoria it 
 will be to the left, and in exophoria to the right of the
 
 88 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 streak. The light will be restored to its proper position in 
 heterophoria by a prism of necessary degree with its angle 
 in the direction indicated by the existing conditions ; or in 
 testing for esophoria or exophoria, the rod may be held 
 horizontally, and the streak of light thus rendered vertical. 
 It will then be necessary for the patient to determine whether 
 the streak is to the right or left of the light.* 
 
 Treatment. In every instance, the refraction should be 
 examined, and ametropia corrected. This procedure alone 
 will in some cases, and particularly in esophoria, be found 
 sufficient to modify the defect or even restore the muscles 
 to a condition of equilibrium. No arbitrary rules can be 
 laid down for the treatment of the muscular anomaly itself. 
 It is a functional affection, subject to variations in the 
 degree of the defect, as well as in the severity of its symp- 
 toms. In general, experience teaches that (i) prisms 
 should be tried ; (2) that the degree to be worn shall 
 approach as nearly as practicable the total degree of insuf- 
 ficiency ; (3) that they should be constantly worn, excepting 
 in exophoria for near, where there is orthophoria for dis- 
 tance ; (4) that prisms should be worn long enough to 
 allow the muscles time to spontaneously regain their equi- 
 librium ; (5) that prisms may develop latent heterophoria. 
 If the correction of the ametropia and the wearing of 
 prisms prove ineffectual, tenotomy must be performed. 
 
 HETEROTROPIA. 
 
 STRABISMUS or SQUINT. Heterotropia is a deviation of the 
 visual axis of one eye from that of the other in the act of 
 vision, the result of muscular overaction, or of muscular 
 
 * It is essential in the diagnosis of muscular anomalies, that the patient's 
 head shall be held erect, inclining to neither side.
 
 HETEROTROPIA. 89 
 
 weakness. Ordinarily, the squint is of such degree that 
 simple inspection is sufficient to designate the eye affected. 
 When the patient fixes an object indifferently with either 
 eye, the squint is alternating. If the same eye always 
 deviates, the strabismus is mono-lateral, or constant. To 
 determine the character of the deviation more accurately, 
 the patient is directed to look at a small flame at 6 m. 
 with each eye alternately, the other being covered with a 
 card, and if no deviation of the eye behind the card is 
 present there is binocular vision for that distance. The 
 light is now brought within 50 cm. of the eye and the 
 preceding test repeated. If again there is no deviation, 
 the squint is only apparent, and due to a large angle a in 
 hypermetropia, or to a small angle a in myopia. If one 
 eye suddenly deviates, the condition is termed concom- 
 itant strabismus. If the sound eye turns from fixation, 
 when covered, the movement is termed secondary deviation. 
 In differentiating paralysis of an ocular muscle from func- 
 tional squint, the action of the muscle in the former is inter- 
 mittent and limited, and the secondary is always greater than 
 the primary squint. The image of the squinting eye is after 
 a time unconsciously suppressed, and the most scientific 
 method of determining the character and degree of the de- 
 viation, is to compel recognition of the double images which 
 are invariably present. To accomplish this end, repeated 
 examinations with colored glasses adjusted before the eyes, 
 and the exercise of a considerable amount of patient manipu- 
 lation, are necessary. A deep-blue or red glass, held before 
 the fixing eye, so subdues its image that the patient will 
 more readily recognize the false and brighter image seen by 
 the deflected eye. It is not infrequently found by this 
 method that ihefa/seis not on a horizontal plane with the true 
 image, but lies above or below the plane in this meridian,
 
 90 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 demonstrating the involvement of other as well as the lateral 
 muscles. 
 
 INTERNAL STRABISMUS, ESOTROPIA, is the deviation in- 
 ward of one eye, and is in four-fifths of all cases, caused 
 by, and associated with, hypermetropia. It will be remem- 
 bered, in explanation of this statement, that the hyper- 
 metrope attains visual acuity only by the exercise of an 
 abnormal amount of accommodation, involving a corres- 
 ponding stimulation of the internal recti muscles (conver- 
 gence). If convergence equal accommodation, the visual 
 axes would cross in close proximity to the eyes, and all 
 objects beyond this point of crossing would appear double. 
 In order to maintain single and moderately clear vision, 
 the patient learns to unconsciously throw all stimulation into 
 the internal rectus muscle belonging to the eye which, by 
 reason of its higher optical defect, or impaired vision from 
 other causes, is more or less strongly converged. Images 
 are on the same side (homonymous diplopia). 
 
 Strabismus due to hypermetropia is likely to manifest 
 itself at an age when small objects, letters of the alphabet, 
 etc., are first noticed. Moderate degrees of hypermetropia, 
 two to four diopters, may be overcome, and good acuity of 
 vision obtained, by accommodation at the expense of conver- 
 gence, but in higher degrees, the accommodation is not 
 strong enough to overcome the error of refraction for any 
 length of time and, in consequence, the internal recti mus- 
 cles do not receive abnormal impulse. Hence internal 
 squint is rare in high hypermetropia. Amblyopia of the 
 squinting eye is common, but whether the imperfect vision 
 is due to the squint, or the squint to the imperfect vision, 
 is a question yet undecided. 
 
 In all cases, the error of refraction (hypermetropia) should 
 be corrected, and in a certain proportion, where the strabis-
 
 HETEROTROPIA. 9! 
 
 mus is of moderate degree and not of long standing, the 
 eyes may be brought into equilibrium by lenses which 
 remove the strain on the accommodation ; when, however, 
 binocular vision is not obtained by this means, the internal 
 recti should be divided. The performance of this operation 
 is followed by relief of the deformity, but does not mate- 
 rially improve the vision of the squinting eye. 
 
 EXTERNAL STRABISMUS, EXOTROPIA, is an outward devi- 
 ation of the visual axis of one eye from fixation, frequently 
 dependent on and associated with myopia. It is caused, 
 not by over-action of the external recti muscles, but from a 
 weakness of convergence, consequent upon the abolition of 
 the necessity for accommodation, due to the increased con- 
 vexity of the ball in myopia. It is occasionally found in 
 eyes not myopic, and is then due to insufficient action of the 
 internal recti muscles, or to acquired monocular blindness. 
 The images in divergent strabismus are crossed (heterony- 
 mous diplopia). 
 
 Before the eye becomes permanently deflected, correction 
 of the myopia which necessitates the use of a normal 
 amount of accommodation for near objects, and hence for 
 convergence, will be sufficient to effect a cure, aided by 
 the exercise of the internal recti in overcoming prisms 
 with their bases out, the patient gazing at a bright object 
 6 m. removed. Tenotomy of the external recti alone, 
 or in conjunction with advancement of the tendons of one 
 or both internal recti muscles will, in most cases, be neces- 
 sary. 
 
 Functional squint upward, or downward, is seldom mani- 
 fested otherwise than as complications of internal and 
 external strabismus.
 
 PART V. 
 DISEASES OF THE CONJUNCTIVA. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. 
 
 The terminal branches of the transverse facial, facial, 
 middle temporal, lacrymal, infraorbital, supraorbital, pal- 
 pebral, frontal, nasal and muscular arteries, ramify loosely 
 over the sclera through the subconjunctival mucous mem- 
 brane, and are injected in the different forms of conjunc- 
 tivitis. They are not normally visible, but when the tissues 
 supplied by them are irritated or inflamed, they are visibly 
 congested, tortuous and movable, their calibre gradually 
 diminishing as they approach the corneal border. In the 
 palpebral conjunctiva, the individual vessels are not always 
 seen, but a diffuse and deep-seated redness is imparted to 
 the entire surface during the continuance of an inflamma- 
 tory process. In all forms of conjunctival inflammation, 
 the discharge, an invariable symptom, is contagious. 
 
 HVPERJEMIA. Hyperaemia of the conjunctiva maybe 
 acute or chronic. In either case, it is characterized by in- 
 jection of the ocular and palpebral vessels, and by a local- 
 ized or diffused swelling, chemosis, cedema, or hyper- 
 trophy of the mucous follicles or papillae. The cause of 
 the hyperaemia will usually be found to be due to the lodg- 
 ment in the conjunctiva of a small foreign body, to lacry- 
 mal obstruction, ametropia, or to inverted ciline. The patient 
 will complain of dryness, burning and itching of the affected 
 lids, and of lacrymation. These symptoms are relieved, 
 
 92
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. 93 
 
 and the patient cured in a few days, by bathing the affected 
 eye with cold water, followed by mild astringent washes. 
 A solution of cocaine hydrochlorate (2 per cent), dropped 
 into the conjunctival sac every two or three hours, will give 
 temporary and welcome relief. 
 
 ACUTE CATARRHAL CONJUNCTIVITIS. In acute catarrhal 
 conjunctivitis, the redness and other symptoms noticed in 
 hyperaemia are more aggravated and pronounced, and, in 
 
 FIG. 40. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVAL AND SUBCONJUNCTIVAL INJECTION. 
 
 i. Pericorneal zone. 2. Conjunctival injection. 3, 3. Sclerotic injection. 
 
 addition to them, there is a discharge of mucus or muco- 
 pus from the inflamed surface. During closure of the lids in 
 sleep, the discharge collects and dries on their free margins, 
 gluing them together. There is also pain, photophobia, and 
 inability to use the eyes in prolonged, close work. It is a 
 universally common affection, occurs idiopathically and in 
 epidemic form, " pink-eye," and may arise from the causes 
 which induce hyperaemia, from inflammation of contiguous
 
 94 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 membranes, or from contagion. Treatment consists in 
 removal of the cause, in the local application of astringent 
 lotions, and in marginal inunctions to prevent gluing. 
 The patient is directed to bathe the eyes frequently through 
 the day with the following effective lotion : 
 
 R . Sodii biboratis, gr xx 
 
 Aquae camphonv, 
 
 Aquae destillat aa 31], 
 
 and to rub Pagenstecher's ointment, 
 
 K . Hydr. oxidi flavi, gr j 
 
 Ungt. petrolei, 3J, 
 
 along the margin of the lids on going to bed at night. 
 Hydrochlorate of cocaine (gr. ij 5j) may be added to the 
 lotion if there are special indications for its employment. 
 
 CHRONIC CATARRHAL CONJUNCTIVITIS is due to the long 
 continuance of one or more of the causes noticed in the 
 etiology of the acute form, to which might be added smoky 
 or dusty atmosphere, and poor hygienic surroundings. In 
 the chronic form of the disease it may be necessary, in 
 addition to the treatment already given, to frequently 
 apply to the everted conjunctiva of the lids, the nitrate of 
 silver in solution (grs. ij-5j), copper sulphate (gr. j-5j), or 
 a solution of tannic acid in glycerine.* A severe case 
 is usually followed by blepharitis marginalis or angularis, 
 dermatitis angularis, eversion of lower punctual with epi- 
 phora, and by keratitis. 
 
 The use of caustics is contraindicated in anaemia of the 
 
 * H. Tannic Acid, 
 
 Glycerine, 
 M. S. Apply to everted lids every other day.
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. 95 
 
 conjunctiva, or while the exudation is thin and sanious, and 
 indicated in high degrees of conjunctival injection when 
 the discharge is excessive, thick and purulent. The strength 
 of the solution, and the intervals between applications, 
 depend on the amount and purulency of the discharge. 
 Its strength should be lessened as the inflammation dimin- 
 ishes. 
 
 VERNAL CATARRH is characterized by hypertrophy of 
 the conjunctival epithelium, deposition of inflammatory 
 exudation at the corneo-scleral margin, vascular fullness, and 
 by peripheral opacity of the cornea. The ocular conjunctiva 
 is but slightly injected, while the palpebral conjunctiva is, on 
 the other hand, thickened, smooth, and pallid. The affection 
 is binocular, affecting children and young adults, appears 
 in the spring of the year, attains a maximum of severity 
 in a few weeks, and continues, practically uninfluenced by 
 treatment, with slight exacerbations and remissions, until 
 frost, when it slowly disappears. Its average duration is 
 four years. The symptoms are those of chronic catarrhal 
 conjunctivitis. 
 
 FOLLICULAR CONJUNCTIVITIS is characterized by the de- 
 velopment, immediately under the palpebral epithelium, of 
 small, round and prominent, pale-red follicles, consisting 
 of lymph deposits, arranged in parallel rows. These 
 deposits are more marked and numerous near the fornix 
 in the lower lid. When the inflammation has subsided, 
 they disappear, leaving no cicatrix in the conjunctiva. 
 The disease is acute or chronic. In the former case, the 
 inflammation is severe, the hypersemia intense, and there 
 is, in the region of the fornix, a marked infiltration of the 
 tissues, with pericorneal injection. The secretion is thin 
 and abundant. In four or five days after the onslaught of 
 the disease, follicles appear in both lids. In the chronic
 
 96 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 form, the signs of inflammation are not marked, and the 
 follicles are limited to the lower lids. 
 
 Follicular conjunctivitis is induced by contagion, pro- 
 longed local medication, such as applications of nitrate of 
 silver, instillation of atropine, etc., and by unhygienic sur- 
 roundings. The disease may last for weeks or months, but 
 the prognosis is favorable. The cause should be ascer- 
 tained and removed, and remedies employed to subdue the 
 
 Fin. 41. 
 
 GRANULAR CONJUNCTIVITIS. 
 
 inflammation and indirectly remove the follicles. Treatment 
 is not primarily directed toward the eradication of the 
 follicles. 
 
 GRANULAR CONJUNCTIVITIS, OR TRACHOMA, consists of 
 deposition in the stroma of the conjunctiva of small masses 
 of lymphoid cells (Fig. 41), most marked in the upper lid. 
 These cells are nourished by newly formed blood-vessels, 
 and gradually undergo transformation into connective tis- 
 sue elements. The process is a true hyperplasia, always
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. 97 
 
 attended by severe inflammation, and eventuates in per- 
 manent tissue changes in the conjunctiva and cartilage. 
 The granulations, which first develop in the upper lid, are 
 numerous, adjacent to one another, and, spreading over the 
 surface until the entire lid is involved, present the charac- 
 teristic appearance of minute bunches of grapes, of a deep 
 red color. The granulations are smaller and less thickly 
 spread over the surface of the lower lid. Through an exten- 
 sion of the inflammatory process, the ocular conjunctiva 
 and cornea are eventually involved. 
 
 The inflammation is of a high grade in the acute form of 
 the disease, develops rapidly, and, if checked before merging 
 into the chronic form, is not attended by permanent con- 
 sequences of a serious character. The chronic form, 
 which is most frequently seen in hospital practice, is 
 divided into three stages. 
 
 In the first stage, the stage of development, the injection of 
 the conjunctival vessels may be moderate or intense, and 
 there is either a gradual or rapid infiltration of the conjunc- 
 tiva of the upper lid. In the former case, the development 
 of granulations is slow ; in the latter, numerous and large 
 granulations quickly appear on the conjunctiva of the upper 
 lid, accompanied by a constant and profuse discharge, the 
 acute thus passing into the chronic form. In the second 
 stage, or stage of acme, the conjunctiva of the upper lid is 
 transformed, its proper epithelium destroyed, old blood 
 vessels enlarged, new ones formed, and granulation cells 
 deposited in its stroma Owing to these changes, the 
 conjunctival surface is irregularly roughened by eleva- 
 tions and depressions. The conjunctiva of the lower lid 
 undergoes similar alterations in a less degree. The ocular 
 conjunctiva, particularly the upper section, is hyperaemic 
 and the seat of granulations. The scleral and episcleral 
 9
 
 98 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 veins are distended. Even the cornea is invaded, usually in 
 its upper half. It becomes vascular, opaque, and denuded 
 of epithelium, which is destroyed either by extension 
 of the peculiar granular inflammation into its stroma by 
 continuity, or by friction of the roughened upper lid. 
 The keratitis thus produced is a superficial vascular inflam- 
 mation, pannus (Fig. 42). In the third stage, or stage 
 of cicatrization, the granulations have disappeared and the 
 conjunctival surface has lost its roughness. The membrane 
 is, however, shrunken and streaked with one or more hori- 
 
 Fir.. 42. 
 
 PANNUS AFFECTING UPPER HALF OK CORNEA. 
 
 zontal white lines, marking its close anatomical connec- 
 tion with the underlying cartilage, which is curved with 
 its convexity outward (entropion). The lids droop, the 
 cilia; are irregular (distichiasis), or turned inward against the 
 cornea. The palpebral space is narrowed by atrophy 
 of the conjunctiva in its entirety. The cornea is partly 
 opaque, and is traversed by a few tortuous vessels. The 
 lower lid undergoes changes and malformations of the same 
 character, but in less degee. 
 
 The symptoms are, in the first stage, pain, burning, and
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. 99 
 
 itching of the lids, discharge of pus or muco-pus, lacry- 
 mation, photophobia, and inability to use the eyes. In the 
 second stage, dimness of vision is added to the above 
 symptoms, and, in the third stage, there is a partial loss 
 of vision with the annoying symptoms caused by in- 
 verted lashes, etc. 
 
 Permanent deformity of the lids, partial ptosis, limited 
 movement of the ball, opaque cornea, and staphyloma are 
 the frequent and distressing sequelae of the dreaded disease. 
 
 It is caused by unhygienic habits of life, contagion, and 
 scrofula. 
 
 The disease occurs most frequently among young persons 
 between the ages of fifteen and thirty, and is usually binocu- 
 lar. Germans, Poles, Hungarians, Egyptians, and Italians 
 are peculiarly susceptible to granular conjunctivitis, whether 
 as the result of inherent peculiarities of temperament, or 
 from neglect of sanitary laws, has not been definitely deter- 
 mined. 
 
 The prognosis is unfavorable. Complete recovery is 
 rare. The disease lasts for years. 
 
 Treatment. The affection is greatly modified by treat- 
 ment, which is largely local. For the first stage, antiphlo- 
 gistics and antiseptic remedies are indicated, such as leech- 
 ing, applications of bichloride of mercury, 1-500 or 
 i-iooo, scarification of the everted lids, and frequent cold 
 water baths to the eye. After the granulations have 
 formed, the treatment which at present would seem to prom- 
 ise the best results, is extrusion of the granules by expres- 
 sion with the roller forceps, while the patient is under the 
 influence of anaesthesia. The older treatment, such as 
 cauterization, the application to the granules of crystals of 
 copper, or alum, or of the mitigated stick of the nitrate of 
 silver (thirty-three per cent.), atropine, and inunctions of
 
 IOO A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 yellow ointment of mercury is, at best, only palliative. It 
 should be the surgeon's aim to abort or destroy the granula- 
 tions. If pannus should form it must be combated by an 
 incision of the blood-vessels from which those of the cornea 
 are derived at the corneo-scleral border, and by instillation 
 of atropine and frequent hot-water baths to the eye. In the 
 third stage, or stage of cicatrization, diverted lashes should 
 be removed, the entropion relieved by operation, and the 
 contracted commissure widened, if any of these conditions 
 are present as a result of the inflammation. The general 
 system should be supported by tonics, pure air, good food 
 and exercise. Confinement in a dark room should be 
 avoided. 
 
 BLENNORRHOZAL, PURULENT, or GONORRHOZAL CONJUNC- 
 TIVITIS, or OPHTHALMIA NEONATORUM, is an intense inflam- 
 mation of the ocular and palpebral conjunctiva with 
 chemosis, hypertrophy of epithelium and papillae, char- 
 acterized by an excessive discharge of pus or muco- 
 pus. It is acute in its course unless a sequel of acute 
 catarrhal conjunctivitis. Within a few hours of its incep- 
 tion, the upper lid becomes greatly swollen, smooth, and 
 shiny on its cutaneous surface. The lashes are grouped 
 into bundles and covered with discharges. The lower lid 
 is puffed out, pus and tears escape from the outer canthus, 
 and the conjunctiva, infiltrated with serum, is elevated from 
 the sclera, so that the cornea appears sunken. In a few 
 days a section of the cornea loses its transparency, the 
 epithelium is cast off, forming an ulcer, which, in the graver 
 cases, advances to perforation with escape of aqueous, and, 
 finally, to sphacelus of the entire cornea ; or the inflamma- 
 tion moderates, swelling subsides, discharge lessens, and the 
 products of inflammation are gradually absorbed without 
 involvement of the cornea, or, if involved, it recovers with
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. IOI 
 
 opacity and, probably, anterior synechia. The prolonged 
 inflammation, rather than its intensity, decides the question 
 of corneal infection. The keratitis is induced by interruption 
 of the blood supply, the result of pressure on the pericorneal 
 and episcleral vessels from exudation in that region. The 
 serum may become partially absorbed, but the conjunctiva 
 is still elevated and uneven from the presence of more or 
 less exudation. During and for several weeks after the 
 termination of the acute stage, the conjunctiva of both lids, 
 the upper lid more especially, projects in horizontal ridges 
 with deep furrows between them resembling granular con- 
 junctivitis, caused by the excess of inflammatory exudation, 
 which persists long after the other symptoms of inflamma- 
 tion have subsided. 
 
 The cause is infection. Ophthalmia neonatorum is caused 
 by the absorption by the conjunctiva of other as well as 
 gonorrhceal pus. The mother giving birth to an infant 
 which becomes, in a day or two, affected with this disease, is 
 not necessarily a subject of gonorrhoea. In other words, 
 the vaginal secretion causing the disease, is not always 
 gonorrhceal in character. The inflammation primarily 
 attacks one eye, and is conveyed by the inter-communicat- 
 ing nasal ducts, or by carelessness, to the other, or both 
 eyes are affected simultaneously and from a single cause. 
 
 Treatment in the acute stage consists in applications of 
 ice, or ice water, renewed every few minutes day and night, 
 thorough cleansing of the conjunctival sac with saturated 
 solution of boric acid, which should be squirted into the 
 commissure every half hour by means of an eye-dropper, or 
 absorbent cotton may be used for the purpose. Nitrate of 
 silver (grs. v to Sj r g rs - x to 5j, if the discharge of pus 
 is abundant) should be applied to the everted lids once 
 or twice daily. These remedies, with atropine (gr. iv-5j),
 
 IO2 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 when the cornea is threatened or attacked, are the most 
 effective. In the subacute stage, nitrate of silver in dimin- 
 ishing strength, and at increasing intervals, until the palpe- 
 bral regions are of normal smoothness, mild antiseptic 
 washes, and vaseline applied to the lids at night to prevent 
 the gluing together of their free margins, are indicated. 
 
 PHLYCTENULAR, LYMPHATIC, SCROPHULOSIS OR HKKI-KTIC 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS is a frequent affection among children. It is 
 characterized by the formation in the conjunctiva of one or 
 more blebs containing serum or pus. The vessels supply- 
 
 FIG. 43. 
 
 PHLYCTENULAR OPHTHALMIA, CONJUNCTIVAL FORM. 
 
 ing the affected region, are injected and pursue a tortuous 
 course from the fornix to their endings at the phlyctenulc. 
 Other parts of the conjunctiva are but slightly, if at all, 
 injected. The symptoms are not severe, except in the pur- 
 ulent form, and cause the patient little inconvenience. At- 
 tention to the diet, pure air, out-door exercise, the removal 
 of the cause of reflex irritation, such as worms in the intes- 
 tinal canal, and difficult dentition, the daily application to the 
 margin of the lids of Pagenstecher's ointment, and thorough 
 cleansing of the parts with a saturated solution of boric acid 
 will, usually, cure the inflammation in a few days. Relapses
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. IO3 
 
 are likely to occur, involving the same or the other eye, 
 or the two eyes simultaneously. 
 
 CROUPOUS CONJUNCTIVITIS is an acute, highly contagious 
 inflammation of the conjunctiva, characterized by the for- 
 mation on a part or on the whole of the conjunctiva of a thin, 
 yellowish-white membrane, composed of albuminoid and 
 cellular substances, which is detached without difficulty, 
 leaving a bleeding point or surface. The disease has a ten- 
 dency to recur. It is an infrequent affection, confined prin- 
 cipally to children, and while the symptoms swelling of the 
 lids, chemosis, thin and abundant discharge, pain and heat 
 are severe, the cornea is rarely involved. During the for- 
 mation of the croupous membranes, caustics must be avoided, 
 and, instead of their use, ice compresses, antiseptic lotions, 
 and powdered quinine, dusted over the diseased surface, 
 employed. After the acute stage, a blenorrhoeal conjunc- 
 tivitis persists, and this is successfully combated by the 
 application of the nitrate of silver (gr. v j). 
 
 DIPHTHERITIC CONJUNCTIVITIS is an acute, intense, con- 
 tagious inflammation, characterized by the deposition in 
 the subconjunctival tissue of a yellowish-white membrane, 
 so closely interwoven with the conjunctiva that its detach- 
 ment is difficult. The local symptoms swollen lids, exten- 
 sive chemosis, acute pain, heat, and sanious discharge are 
 severe and very marked in character. There is superadded 
 to them, in some cases, the constitutional symptoms of 
 diphtheria. The cornea is often destroyed through ulcer- 
 ation. In the course of a week, the false membrane and 
 surrounding conjunctiva become necrosed and slough off, 
 leaving a deep ulcer, which heals slowly. A more or less 
 extensive cicatrix remains to permanently alter the con- 
 tour of the lid. When the characteristic diphtheritic pro-
 
 IO4 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 cess has subsided, a purulent or semi-purulent conjunc- 
 tivitis remains. The disease attacks one or both eyes, is 
 sporadic or epidemic, may precede or follow similar mem- 
 branes in the throat or nose, or run its course as a purely 
 local affection. 
 
 The prognosis is not favorable. The treatment, during 
 the formation and continuance of the membrane, is antiphlo- 
 gistic and antiseptic. Atropine locally, and constitutional 
 remedies, suited to the age and necessities of the patient, 
 should be employed. Salivation is recommended in adult 
 patients. 
 
 XEROSIS is a dryness of the conjunctiva due to destruc- 
 tion of the papillae and follicles through atrophy of the 
 mucous membrane from severe and long-continued inflam- 
 mation (diphtheritic or granular conjunctivitis), or to the 
 improper and continued use of caustics. The functions of 
 the eye are interfered with, and may be destroyed, through 
 resulting opacities of the cornea. Treatment is of little 
 avail. Constant instillations of glycerine is said to be 
 palliative. 
 
 PTERYGIUM is a vascular membrane, triangular in shape, 
 closely resembling in appearance and structure the con- 
 junctiva, on which it is superimposed. Its base corresponds 
 with the curve of the sulcus at the inner canthus, and the 
 growth extends horizontally until the apex has invaded 
 the subepithelial layer of the cornea. Its apex may thus 
 cover in part, or completely, the pupil. It may appear in 
 both eyes simultaneously or be confined to one. In rare 
 instances it is developed from the outer canthus. It is an 
 affection of slow growth, and is most frequently found in 
 elderly persons who have been exposed to wind and rain 
 through many years of active, outdoor life. Sailors are
 
 CONJUNCTIVITIS. 
 
 105 
 
 peculiarly liable to the affection. It should be regarded as 
 an hypertrophy of the conjunctiva, the result of constant 
 exposure to the elements, rather than as an inflammation. 
 
 FIG. 44. 
 
 PTERYGIUM. 
 
 TUMORS. Pinguecula is a small, yellowish-white, fatty- 
 like growth, usually noticed between the cornea and inner 
 canthus. It is harmless. Granuloma, or Polypi are not 
 infrequently found attached to the conjunctival surface 
 after an injury or operation; they should be excised. 
 Dermoid cysts, lipoma, sarcoma, and melano-sarcoma are 
 also found in the conjunctiva. They should be removed 
 and the wound cauterized.
 
 PART VI. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE LIDS AND LACRYMAL 
 APPARATUS. 
 
 CONGENITAL MALFORMATIONS. 
 
 COLOBOMA is a fissure of one or both lids, and is often 
 associated with similar deformities of the iris, choroid, and 
 palate. 
 
 EPICANTHUS (Fig. 45) is a widening at the base of the 
 
 FIG. 45. 
 
 ElMCANTHUS. 
 
 nose, caused by a redundancy of the skin in this situation. 
 The internal angle of each palpebral fissure is partly 
 covered, and the fissures apparently shortened. When a 
 fold of skin at the centre of the interpupillary space is 
 elevated by forceps, the deformity temporarily disappears. 
 
 PTOSIS (Fig. 46), is a drooping, partial or complete, of the 
 upper lid, from paralysis of the levator palpebrae branch of 
 
 106
 
 TRAUMATISM. lO/ 
 
 the third nerve. This condition is most apparent when the 
 patient's gaze is directed upward. The deformity may be 
 relieved by operation. 
 
 TRAUMATISM. 
 
 Incised and punctured WOUNDS, involving only the lids, 
 and not penetrating to the eye-ball, should be sutured and 
 treated antiseptically with the double purpose of preventing 
 deformity and promoting resolution. 
 
 FIG. 46. 
 
 PTOSIS. 
 
 BURNS from acids, alkalies, molten lead, scalding water, 
 etc., may lead to disastrous results from the formation of 
 cicatricial contractions, which terminate in distortion of the 
 lids, adhesions between their free margins, and consequent 
 narrowing of the palpebral fissure, and lead, not infrequently, 
 to destruction of the conjunctival sac. The aim of the treat- 
 ment is to prevent marginal and surface adhesions, and the 
 formation of cicatricial and distorting bands, by traction and 
 the constant application of oil dressings to the wounded
 
 IO8 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 surfaces. When the wound is superficial, involving a lar^e 
 portion of the lid, skin grafting should be employed, and 
 when the lid is destroyed, a plastic operation becomes 
 necessary, the deficient or lost tissue being supplied from 
 the adjoining parts. 
 
 CONTUSION, "black eye," is usually the result of violence, 
 such as a blow. The loose connective tissue of the lids 
 becomes swollen, ecchymosed, and presents a bluish dis- 
 coloration, which is a source of annoyance rather than of 
 danger. The condition may be speedily relieved by the 
 alternate application of hot and cold water, to which is 
 added, in the proportion of one to eight, the tincture of 
 arnica, or a wash of the chloride of ammonium, gr. v-5J, 
 may be substituted. 
 
 INFLAMMATIONS. 
 
 PHLEGMON, ABSCESS, is an acute, purulent, circumscribed 
 inflammation of the cellular tissue, attended with redness, 
 swelling, pain, and localized elevation of the temperature. 
 The abscess is at first hard, gradually increases in size, 
 softens, and has a tendency to point through the skin. It 
 may be the result of injury, of cold, or develop without 
 assignable cause. When situated near the inner angle, the 
 abscess should not be confounded with acute inflammation 
 of the lacrymal sac. 
 
 A threatened abscess, may be aborted by the local appli- 
 cation of cold, and by the internal administration of calcium 
 chloride, of which a two-grain pill should be given every 
 two hours until four pills are taken. When the inflamed 
 area presents a central induration, poultices, followed by an 
 early incision, parallel with the margins of the lid, are 
 indicated. After incision, the parts should be frequently 
 cleansed with antiseptic lotions, and supported by a com- 
 press.
 
 INFLAMMATIONS. IOO, 
 
 HORDEOLUM, STYE, is a localized inflammation in or 
 near the bulb of an eyelash. It rapidly advances to pustu- 
 lation, and is accompanied by redness, pain and swelling, 
 particularly when situated at the outer angle, and by local, 
 and sometimes general, increase of temperature. There is 
 usually a succession of styes, one following another at 
 irregular intervals for several weeks or months. The cause 
 is to be found in some refraction error, or in an impover- 
 ished condition of the system. Treatment : cold com- 
 presses in the early stage to abort, and hot poultices, 
 later, to hasten suppuration. A small incision may be 
 made through its apex, or the tumor left to open spon- 
 taneously. 
 
 BLEPHARITIS is an inflammation of the lids, acute or 
 chronic, dependent upon disease of contiguous parts, such 
 as the various forms of conjunctivitis, orbital disease, ery- 
 sipelas, etc. 
 
 MARGINAL BLEPHARITIS is a chronic inflammation of the 
 free margin of the lids. In its early stage, it is character- 
 ized by an induration around, and hypersecretion of, the 
 sebaceous glands with the formation of minute pustules, 
 which rupture, leaving small ulcers. The secretion, drying, 
 forms crusts which become matted with the ciliae. When 
 the crusts are removed, the edge of the lid presents a series 
 of excoriated and bleeding points. The entire margin is 
 finally involved in the inflammatory process, the ciliae fall 
 out, and are replaced by a few fine and misdirected hairs, 
 or they may be altogether absent. The symptoms are red- 
 ness, swelling, itching, and a sensation of heat, aggravated 
 by the use of eyes in near work, by smoke and other 
 atmospheric impurities. It occurs in children and young 
 adults, as a result of reflex irritation, ametropia, and scrofula. 
 
 Treatment. The cause should be ascertained and re-
 
 I IO A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 moved ; the ametropia corrected by the proper lens ; the 
 reflex irritation from painful dentition, or from intestinal 
 worms, relieved by suitable remedies, and in scrofula, tonics 
 and alteratives administered with good food, fresh air, and 
 healthy surroundings. The crusts should be dissolved by 
 mild alkaline washes, sodii bicarb., or biborate, gr. v-.^j, the 
 ulcers stimulated by touching them with a pledget of 
 cotton soaked in silver nitrate, gr. v-5j, and, once or twice 
 daily, an ointment of the yellow or red oxide of mercury 
 (gr. j, vaseline 5j) applied, or, in stubborn cases, aristol in 
 the same strength can be substituted for the mercury. 
 
 AFFECTIONS OF THE SKIN. 
 
 ERYTHEMA, ECZEMA, and ERYSIPELAS appear occasionally 
 on the lids, as elsewhere on the body, as a local manifestation 
 of the general affection. They are to be treated on the prin- 
 ciples laid down for these diseases. 
 
 CEDEMA is a symptom of orbital disease, of purulent 
 conjunctivitis, and of nephritis. In all cases of oedema 
 without local cause, the urine should be examined for 
 albumin. It requires no special treatment. 
 
 EMPHYSEMA is an escape of air into the cellular tissue 
 adjoining the lids, induced by violent sneezing, blowing the 
 nose, and by asthma. Compression by a roller bandage 
 is the only treatment necessary. 
 
 RODENT ULCER begins at the margin of a lid, usually 
 the lower, as a small excrescence which, in time, falls off, 
 leaving an excoriated surface. This slowly increases in 
 size until it has destroyed, after the lapse of many months 
 or years, the lid and neighboring tissues. The pain is 
 inconsiderable. The treatment consists in the early and 
 complete excision of the diseased part.
 
 AFFECTIONS OF THE SKIN. 
 
 Ill 
 
 EPITHELIOMA presents in its initial stage similar appear- 
 ances to the rodent ulcer, but is distinguished by the 
 rapidity of its growth, lancinating pain, thin, offensive, 
 ichorous discharge, and by its tendency to recur after exci- 
 sion. It occurs, as does the rodent ulcer, in elderly per- 
 sons. Early excision is the treatment. The application 
 of glacial acetic acid, repeated tri-weekly until the ulcer is 
 
 FIG. 47. 
 
 B. 
 
 MEIBOMIAN CYST. 
 
 LID FORCEPS. 
 
 A, Screw. B, Shank. 
 
 cicatrized, has been advocated. It, together with other 
 remedies of the same class that have been proposed from 
 time to time, is not to be employed, however, when the 
 patient is willing to submit to an operation. 
 
 LUPUS is a tuberculous infiltration of the lid, and occurs 
 usually as an extension of the disease from neighboring 
 structures. All treatment heretofore devised has been 
 simply palliative. No cure has yet been found for tubercle.
 
 112 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 XANTHELASMA is a fatty degeneration of the skin, of 
 a bright yellow color, occurring in symmetrical patches on 
 the lids of both eyes near their inner angle. They should 
 be excised and the healthy skin drawn together by sutures. 
 
 CHANCRE is a specific, indurated sore of the lid, due to 
 direct contagion, having the same features and followed by 
 the same constitutional infection, that characterize chancre 
 in other situations of the body. The treatment is anti- 
 syphilitic and constitutional. 
 
 CHALAZION (Fig. 47, A) is a small cyst developed in the 
 tarsal cartilage from obstruction of a meibomian duct, 
 damming its secretion. It is a common but insignificant 
 tumor, easily removed by excision. 
 
 ECCHYMOSIS is an effusion of blood beneath the skin or 
 conjunctiva from traumatism, or from idiopathic rupture 
 of a small vein. No treatment is necessary. 
 
 MILIUM is the name given to a minute, hard, pearly-like 
 growth, situated on the margin of the lids, or in the skin. 
 It requires no treatment, but may be readily removed iTthe 
 patient so desires. 
 
 AFFECTIONS OF THE EYELASHES 
 
 TRICHIASIS (Fig. 48) is that condition in which the cili;u 
 assume, as a result of chronic disease of the conjunctiva, 
 independent directions, some normal and others distorted. 
 Those turned against the cornea should be pulled out, or 
 their bulbs excised. 
 
 DiSTiCHiASis(Fig. 49) is the condition in which there is a 
 second irregularly placed row of lashes, congenital or ac- 
 quired, partially or wholly in contact with the cornea. This 
 is a painful complication of chronic conjunctivitis. Friction 
 of the distorted hairs against the cornea produces a super-
 
 AFFECTIONS OF THE EYELASHES. 113 
 
 ficial keratitis with permanent impairment of vision in 
 some cases. The treatment is depilation. The hairs should 
 be removed as often as they appear. 
 
 FIG. 48. 
 
 TRICHIASIS. 
 
 ALOPECIA is a falling out of the lashes due to granular 
 conjunctivitis, blepharitis marginalis, or to constitutional 
 disease (syphilis). The predisposing cause should be ascer- 
 tained and treated. 
 
 FIG. 49. 
 
 PEDICULUS PUBIS, crab-lice in the cilia% are sometimes 
 found in those who are filthy in their persons and surround- 
 ings. They cause intolerable itching, which is relieved,
 
 114 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 and the crabs destroyed, by the daily application to the 
 free margin of the lids of the yellow oxide of mercury 
 ointment. 
 
 ACQUIRED DEFORMITIES. 
 
 KNTROPION (Fig. 50) is a partial or complete inversion of 
 the ciliary margin of the lid. It is sometimes noticed as 
 the temporary result of spasm of the orbicularis muscle, 
 induced by the long-continued application of a pressure- 
 bandage after operations, but is more often found as a per- 
 
 FIG. 50. 
 
 ENTROPION OK LOWER LIDS. 
 
 manent deformity, caused by atrophy of the conjunctiva 
 and consequent abnormal convexity of the tarsal cartilage, 
 from granular conjunctivitis, or traumatism. The affection 
 is, in a large majority of cases, complicated by vascular 
 inflammation of the cornea, and of the conjunctiva of the 
 inverted lid. Temporary entropion is relieved by drawing, 
 and holding, the edge of the lid outward by adhesive 
 strips fastened to the neighboring skin. Many operations 
 have been devised for the permanent cure of entropion, 
 which is not easily remedied. Advancement of the tendon
 
 ACQUIRED DEFORMITIES. 115 
 
 of the palpebral muscle has, in our hands, given the best 
 results. 
 
 ECTROPION (Fig. 51) is a partial or complete eversion of 
 the margin of the lid, and, like entropion, is sometimes 
 found as a transient symptom of inflammatory swelling of 
 the lid, or as a permanent deformity from paralysis .of 
 the orbicularis muscle. It is, however, most frequently 
 caused by cicatricial contraction of the palpebral or neigh- 
 boring integument, the result of destructive injuries, such as 
 burns, wounds, etc., involving these parts. When of long 
 
 FIG. 51. 
 
 ECTROPION OF LOWER LID. 
 
 standing, the exposed conjunctiva becomes hypertrophied. 
 From eversion of the puncta lacrymalia, tears collect in the 
 conjunctival sac, and flow over the cheek, causing still more 
 irritation. If the upper lid is affected, the cornea may suffer 
 from adhesion of particles of dust. In the- transient form, 
 recovery of the normal position of the lid ensues when the 
 cause is removed. In the permanent form, a plastic opera- 
 tion is the only measure by which relief can be obtained. 
 
 BLEPHAROSPASM is an involuntary closure of the lids 
 from tonic or clonic spasm of the orbicularis muscle. The
 
 Il6 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 abnormal contraction of this muscle is reflex, excited by 
 photophobia, foreign body in the cornea, neuralgia, and 
 by accommodative or muscular strain. The condition may 
 manifest itself by an occasional twitching of the lids, so slight 
 as to be hardly noticeable, local chorea, or, by the forcible 
 closure of the lids, lasting a considerable length of time. 
 The cause should be. ascertained and relieved. In young 
 persons, the defect will be found, in many cases, to be due 
 to an error of refraction, or muscular anomaly, correction 
 of which will result in a cure of the spasm. Division of 
 the supraorbital nerve has been advised in otherwise in- 
 tractable cases. If the affection is found to be clue to some 
 constitutional dyscrasia, remedies addressed to the general 
 system, rather than to the local manifestation, will, of course, 
 be indicated. 
 
 BLEPHAROPHIMOSIS is a narrowing of the palpebral fissure, 
 consequent upon long continued inflammation of the con- 
 junctiva. The proper length of the commissure should be 
 restored by the operation of canthotomy or canthoplasty. 
 
 PTOSIS is a drooping of the upper lid from paralysis of 
 the levator palpebrai muscle, or from an increase in weight 
 of the lid in chronic thickening and induration. The 
 former, is a symptom of central or spinal disease, when not 
 due to an affection of the orbit. Iodide of potassium, mer- 
 cury, strychnia and electricity, are proper remedies to em- 
 ploy when the initial lesion is in the cerebro-spinal system. 
 Surgical interference is warranted under the same condi- 
 tions that govern operations for paralytic strabismus. 
 
 SYMBLEPHARON (Fig. 52) is a cicatricial adhesion, partial 
 or total, of the lid to the eyeball, the sequel of destructive 
 inflammation of the conjunctiva from burns or extensive 
 ulceration. It is relieved by operation. 
 
 ANYKLOBLEPHARON (Fig. 53) is a union of the free mar-
 
 DISEASES OF THE LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 1 1/ 
 
 gins of the lids from traumatism or ulceration. Trauma- 
 tism severe enough to cause complete adhesion between 
 
 FIG. 52. FIG. 53. 
 
 SYMBLPEHARON. ANKYLOBLKPHARON. 
 
 the ciliary margin of the lids, will also destroy the cornea, 
 and treatment, under these conditions, is unavailing. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 
 
 HYPERTROPHY of the lacrymal gland, the position of 
 which is shown by dotted line, Fig. 54, is occasionally 
 met with in young persons as a small, movable tumor 
 situated in the upper and outer angle of the conjunctival 
 sac. It is not attended by pain, or other signs of inflam- 
 mation, but the eyeball, against which it rests, is pressed 
 downward and inward, causing double vision, the chief 
 symptom of which the patient complains. The treatment 
 consists in the free administration of tonics, such as the 
 syrup of the iodide of iron, cod-liver oil, etc., and in a 
 nourishing dietary. 
 
 ABSCESS of the lacrymal gland is a rare affection, usually 
 chronic, and is the result of injuries, and of chronic inflam- 
 mations of the conjunctiva. Its presence is determined by
 
 Il8 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 a fluctuating swelling at the site of the gland. It has a 
 tendency to rupture through the skin, causing fistule, and 
 should be incised as soon as fluctuation is determined. 
 
 FISTULE of the lacrymal gland is the sequel of an abscess 
 that has opened spontaneously. It remains patulous be- 
 cause of the constant discharge through it of tears 
 mingled with pus. The opening thus formed should be 
 closed by cauterization, and a new one made into the con- 
 
 junctival sac. 
 
 Fie;. 54. 
 
 LACRYMAL GLAND. 
 
 MALPOSITION, or diversion of the puncta lacrymalia, which 
 normally lie in contact with the conjunctiva of the ball, 
 prevents the escape of tears which collect in the conjunc- 
 tival sac, giving rise to epiphora, or watery eye. The con- 
 dition is brought about by paralysis of the orbicularis 
 muscle, chronic thickening and eversion of the lid from 
 conjunctivitis, and by the other causes of ectropion. If the 
 normal position of the lid cannot be re-established by 
 massage, slitting up of one or both canaliculi, with their 
 permanent transformation into gutters, will afford partial 
 relief.
 
 DISEASES OF THE LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 119 
 
 STRICTURE of the nasal duct may form in any part of its 
 course, but the junction of the bony and cartilaginous por- 
 tions is usually the site. It is caused by chronic inflam- 
 mation of the conjunctiva, or of the Schneiderian mucous 
 membrane of the nostrils, lessening the lumen of the canal. 
 Its constant and annoying symptom is epiphora. A small 
 swelling is common on the site of the lacrymal sac, which 
 by pressure exudes tears and mucus backward through 
 the canaliculi. 
 
 Blennorrhcea, Dacryocystitis, abscess, and fistule of the 
 lacrymal sac, are common sequelae of stricture. 
 
 (a) BlennorrlicEa. The mucous lining of the sac becomes 
 inflamed from the presence and pressure of retained tears, 
 forming a small tumor which exudes, when compressed, a 
 glairy fluid (tears and mucus mingled) into the conjunctival 
 sac, or downward through the stricture into the nostrils. 
 This stage of the affection is termed mucocele. 
 
 (ft) Dacryocystitis is a purulent inflammation of the 
 lacrymal sac, following blennorrhcea as a later consequence 
 of stricture, characterized by greater tumefaction, and by a 
 discharge largely composed of pus, which the patient is 
 compelled to express many times in the course of the day. 
 Complaint is made of constant overflow of tears, pain and 
 swelling at or near the inner angle of the lid, and of dis- 
 turbed function. 
 
 (c) Abscess is the culmination of an acute dacryocystitis, 
 and is manifested as a rapidly developing inflammation of 
 the lacrymal sac with extensive invasion of the surrounding 
 parts, such as oedema, redness, and excessive swelling of 
 the lids, so great in some instances as to produce closure 
 of the commissure. The sac is exceedingly sensitive to 
 pressure, and the abscess, if allowed to pursue its course
 
 I2O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 uninterruptedly, will eventuate in necrosis of the bone, and 
 in a fistulous opening through the skin. 
 
 ((f) Fistnlc(Y\g. 55) is the establishment of a pathological 
 channel from the lacrymal sac to the cutaneous surface, 
 through which the products of inflammation are discharged. 
 
 Treatment. In the earlier stages of stricture, massage 
 and the local application to the conjunctiva of astringents, 
 injected by lacrymal syringe into the canaliculi, or simply 
 
 FIG. 55. 
 
 FISTULE OK LACRYMAL SAC. 
 
 dropped into the conjunctival sac, may be sufficient to abort 
 the disease. The following is a useful lotion for the purpose : 
 
 R . Boric acid, gr. v 
 
 Zinc sulphate, gr. j 
 
 Water *j. 
 
 When it is clearly established that medication alone will 
 not bring about a cure, the stricture must be either dilated 
 or divided. This method of treatment is not in all cases 
 satisfactory, and should be employed only when other and
 
 DISEASES OF THE LACRYMAL APPARATUS. 121 
 
 less radical measures have proved to be unavailing. When, 
 however, the swelling at the site of the gland contains pus, 
 as well as tears and mucus, the operation can no longer 'be 
 delayed with safety to the patient, or with credit to the 
 surgeon. The local application of lead water and laudanum, 
 leeches, attention to the bowels, kidneys and skin, may 
 abort an abscess during its formative stage. When the 
 tumor shows a tendency to point it must be freely incised. 
 No attempt to pass a probe is advisable until the swelling 
 and tenderness have subsided ; it may then be treated as a 
 stricture. The fistulous opening will usually close without 
 direct medication when the normal passage for the escape 
 of tears has been re-established ; if, however, the natural 
 process of healing is too slow, union may be promoted by 
 cauterization of the walls of the fistule. When it is not 
 convenient for the patient to see the surgeon every day or 
 two, a substitute for frequent probing is the leaden or silver 
 style, which may be introduced and allowed to remain in 
 the duct for several weeks or months, for the purpose of 
 keeping the stricture dilated.
 
 PART VII. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CORNEA AND OF THE 
 SCLERA. 
 
 In corneal inflammations, the surrounding minute vessels, 
 straight and parallel (terminals of larger conjunct! val and 
 subconjunctival vessels, which in health are empty of 
 blood and invisible), are, with few exceptions, injected. 
 This zone of vascularity is known as the pcricorneal ring. 
 Inflammations of the cornea (corneitis, keratitis) are divided 
 into two classes, superficial and deep. 
 
 SUPERFICIAL AND VASCULAR. 
 
 In vascular inflammations of the cornea, newly formed 
 arteries and veins, given off from the conjunctival vessels, 
 ramify over the corneal epithelium. These vessels vary 
 in size, length and number, involve a part or the entire 
 surface of the cornea, appear early or late in the course 
 of the disease, and may become entirely absorbed without 
 leaving a trace. ' 
 
 PHLYCTENULE (Fig. 56). Phlyctenular keratitis is charac- 
 terized by the presence of one or more small cysts, which 
 form on the limbus cornea, or in any other part of its 
 surface, containing serum and lymph cells. The outer 
 wall of the cyst is formed by the corneal epithelium. 
 After the lapse of a few days, the bleb breaks through its 
 epithelial wall and its contents escape, leaving an ulcer. 
 In a few hours after the appearance of the phlyctenules, 
 
 122
 
 PHLYCTENULAR KERATITIS. 
 
 123 
 
 vascular offshoots from the conjunctiva pursue a tortuous 
 course to the diseased spot or spots. There is usually a 
 leash of these vessels, four or five in number, with its base 
 on the limbus and its apex in the phlyctenule. The disease 
 manifests itself oftenest in children, especially those who 
 have inherited a scrofulous diathesis, and is developed by 
 improper nourishment, poor sanitation, and reflex disturb- 
 ances (teething, worms, etc.). 
 
 The main symptoms are photophobia, lacrymation, and 
 acute pain. The blister, characteristic vascularity, and re- 
 sulting ulcer sufficiently mark the disease. If the phlyc- 
 
 FIG. 56. 
 
 PHLYCTENULAR ULCER. 
 
 tenule is single, it is usually found on the cornea in front of 
 the pupil, or, if multiple, is manifested as a series of pin- 
 point cysts or ulcers on limbus. The disease disappears 
 without trace or sequelae in ten or fifteen days, under proper 
 treatment, which consists in restricting the diet, regulating 
 the bowels, and in the use, locally, of yellow ointment and 
 atropine. 
 
 HERPES is an accompaniment of catarrhal disease of the 
 respiratory and intestinal tracts. One or more vesicles 
 form on the cornea, in any situation, rupture and leave an 
 ulcer with transparent floor, and clear cornea surrounding 
 it, or, if infected by micro-organisms, the base of the ulcer
 
 124 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 is yellow, and a considerable portion of the surrounding 
 cornea infiltrated and destroyed. It should be treated as 
 an ulcer. 
 
 PANNUS is a superficial vascular infiltration of the cornea 
 with partial destruction of its epithelium, caused by granu- 
 lar conjunctivitis. The epithelial layer of the cornea, usu- 
 ally the superior half, in some instances the entire surface, 
 is traversed by a leash of blood-vessels given off from the 
 conjunctival arteries and veins. These newly-formed and 
 tortuous vessels, largest at the periphery, are directed 
 toward the centre of the cornea. There may be only a 
 single vessel, or the entire corneal surface may be trans- 
 formed into a velvety, beefy-looking mass with temporary 
 destruction of vision. The cause is due either to friction 
 of the roughened lids over the sensitive corneal epithelium, 
 or to an extension into the cornea of the true granular pro- 
 cess. The cornea between the vessels is infiltrated with 
 lymph-cells, and on its surface are minute facets of ulcera- 
 tion. These pathological changes are usually limited to 
 the anterior layers of the cornea, do not often involve the 
 structures underlying Bowman's membrane, and affect 
 primarily the cornea underneath the upper lid. 
 
 Pain, intolerance of light, lacrymation, swelling, and injec- 
 tion of the conjunctival and ciliary vessels, are the usual 
 symptoms. Prognosis is, as a rule, favorable, notwith- 
 standing the long duration of the cause, but the recurrent 
 and extensive destruction of the epithelium, and infiltration, 
 lead to some permanent impairment of vision, and, in some- 
 cases, to conical cornea, and to corneal staphyloma. Treat- 
 ment is directed to the granular conjunctivitis, which is 
 always the causes of pannus. Atropine and hot-water appli- 
 cations, in conjunction with the treatment of the granular 
 lids, are useful.
 
 SUPERFICIAL KERATIT1S. 125 
 
 NON- VASCULAR SUPERFICIAL KERATITIS. 
 
 HERPES is the name given to the appearance, in groups 
 on the cornea, of minute round vesicles in an eye already 
 affected by catarrhal conjunctivitis. Calomel dusted into 
 the conjunctival sac is the only treatment required. 
 
 OPHTHALMIC HERPES ZOSTER is the formation, during an 
 attack of frontal herpes, of a number of small vesicles on 
 the cornea. These vesicles rupture, form ulcers, and leave 
 opacities. There is incomplete anaesthesia- of the cornea. 
 The treatment is by atropine, pressure bandage, and by the 
 internal administration of quinine, arsenic, and bismuth. 
 
 RESORPTION ULCER is a superficial, non-vascular loss ot 
 corneal substance without severe symptoms. The pericor- 
 neal injection is not marked. The ulcer forms in an eye 
 previously healthy, or in one which is already the seat of 
 corneal or conjunctival disease. The bottom of the ulcer 
 nearly always remains clear, and the surrounding tissue is 
 not infiltrated. The disease shows little tendency to in- 
 volve the iris. Atropine and local irritants, are the reme- 
 dies indicated. 
 
 PROFOUND KERATITIS. 
 
 DEEP ULCER (Fig. 57) is inflammatory, differing from 
 the resorption ulcer in its involvement of the deeper 
 layers of the cornea, and in its tendency to perforate. It is 
 a localized loss of corneal substance attended by signs of 
 active inflammation. The floor and margins of the ulcer 
 exhibit a yellowish discoloration, the adjoining parts are 
 infiltrated, and pus forms in the anterior chamber (Fig. 58), 
 hypopyon, or there is a collection of pus in the most 
 dependent portion of the cornea, onyx. The inflammation 
 is acute, the pericorneal and conjunctival injection marked, 
 and iritis may complicate the affection and aggravate the 
 attending symptoms pain, photophobia, lacrymation, and
 
 126 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 loss of function. The prognosis will depend on the si/ 
 the ulcer, its site, and on the severity of the inflammatory 
 process. The more central the ulcer, the more damaging 
 it will be to vision. All deep ulcers of the cornea leave a 
 permanent cicatrix, dense and white when complicated 
 by iritic adhesion (anterior synechia). 
 
 Treatment. Atropine, hot water, leeches to the temple, 
 saturated solution of boric acid, applied every two hours, 
 repeated and persistent cauterization of the floor and sides of 
 the ulcer with the thermo-cautery, or silver nitrate (gr. 
 xx-rij), the instillation of eserine (gr. ss-5j) every two hours 
 
 FIG. 57. FIG. 58. 
 
 PERFORATING ULCER OK THE CORNEA, 
 
 ADHESION OF IRIS (ANTERIOR SYNE- ONYX (6) AND HYI>OPYON (4, 5). 
 CHIA). 
 
 during the day, and atropine (gr. iv-5j) once or twice during 
 the night, are indicated. Eserine is employed in threatened 
 perforation to contract the pupil, thus diminishing intra- 
 ocular pressure and supporting the tissues behind the 
 diseased cornea, as well as for its beneficial local action on 
 the cornea itself, while the atropine is given to prevent 
 maximum contraction of the iris under myotic in- 
 fluence, and closure of the pupil by exudation. The pressure 
 bandage may be employed. When spontaneous perfora- 
 tion is imminent, its worst features may be avoided by in- 
 strumental perforation. The treatment after perforation is
 
 PROFOUND KERATITIS. I2/ 
 
 by antiseptic washings of the wound with a saturated 
 solution of boric acid, eserine, and by a pressure bandage 
 which is allowed to remain undisturbed for 4.8 hours. The 
 general system should be supported by tonics. 
 
 SERPIGINOUS ULCER (Fig. 59) is a destructive purulent in- 
 filtration of the cornea with a decided tendency to advance 
 in extent and in depth. It may attack any portion of the 
 cornea, is usually longer than it is broad, arc-shaped, and sur- 
 rounded by streaks of opacity running into the clear cornea. 
 The ulcer is yellowish in color, attended by moderate signs 
 of inflammation, and not infrequently manifests itself in 
 persons whose general health is at a low ebb. It is often 
 
 FIG. 59. 
 
 ACUTE SERPIGINOUS ULCER OF CORNEA WITH CRESCENTIC BORDER OF 
 INFILTRATION. 
 
 associated with disease of the conjunctiva and lacrymal ap- 
 paratus. Onyx, hypopyon, and iritis, are frequently present. 
 The treatment is the same as that given for other forms of 
 deep ulcer. 
 
 INTERSTITIAL or PARENCHYMATOUS KERATITIS (Fig. 60) is 
 a disease involving, as its name suggests, the deeper tissues 
 of the cornea, which become infiltrated by lymph cells. The 
 appearance of the cornea is that of a piece of ground glass. 
 The epithelium is partly destroyed, and the iris lies hidden 
 behind the gray opacity thus formed. The pericorneal 
 injection is very marked, while that of the conjunctiva
 
 128 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 is either slight or altogether absent. Vision is markedly 
 reduced. Photophobia is intense, lacrymation profuse, 
 but the pain slight; indeed, it is often altogether absent. 
 The disease is slow and insidious, lasting from three weeks 
 to many months. The opacity may entirely disappear, 
 leaving, in the more favorable cases, irregularities in the 
 corneal curve, or becomes dense and remains permanently. 
 The iris may become adherent to the lens capsule, and 
 occlusion of the pupil by inflammatory exudation occur. 
 In the severer cases, blood-vessels are formed in the inter- 
 stices of the cornea. The disease occurs among scrofulous, 
 syphilitic, and anaemic young subjects, and is noted by 
 some writers as a symptom of inherited syphilis. 
 
 FIG. 60. 
 
 INTERSTITIAL KERATITIS. 
 
 Treatment is by atropine, heat, dry or moist, locally, and 
 by mercury, iodide of potassium, syrup of the iodide of iron, 
 and other tonic remedies, systemically. The patient's eye 
 should be protected from light, but not from the atmosphere. 
 
 ABSCESS begins as a single or multiple collection of 
 grayish, inflammatory deposits in the corneal stroma, circum- 
 scribed by healthy tissue which eventually breaks down, 
 forming a single large cavity containing pus. The color 
 now changes to a straw-yellow, the surrounding cornea 
 is striated, opaque, and bereft of its epithelium. Ilypo- 
 pyon and onyx are common. The abscess has a tendency
 
 PROFOUND KERATITIS. I 29 
 
 to increase in size until the enveloped pus and corneal debris 
 are discharged through an anterior or posterior perforation. 
 Iritis of severe type, is a usual complication of corneal 
 abscess, which, in some cases, is even followed by capsular 
 or lenticular cataract. Iritic adhesion to the corneal 
 cicatrix, or the formation of anterior synechiae, is a common 
 sequel to perforating abscess, just as it is to perforating 
 ulcer not preceded by collections of pus. 
 
 Abscess may occur as a result of traumatism, purulent 
 conjunctivitis, the exanthematous fevers, paralysis of the 
 fifth pair of cranial nerves, or from exposure, alcoholic ex- 
 cesses, and from the debility of old age. The symptoms 
 are lacrymation, pain, photophobia, and loss of function. 
 
 Treatment. Alternate instillations of atropine (gr. viij-5j) 
 and eserine (gr. j-5j), as directed under the treatment for 
 ulcer, should be employed, and the eye bathed frequently 
 with a solution of the bichloride of mercury (i to 3000). 
 When the abscess threatens to perforate spontaneously, a 
 free instrumental opening should be made by Saemisch's 
 incision. After the escape of the aqueous and collapse of 
 the anterior chamber following perforation, the cornea must 
 be supported by a pressure bandage, which should be left 
 undisturbed for seventy-two hours, except in blennorrhceal 
 abscess, when the treatment is mainly directed to the dis- 
 eased conjunctiva. 
 
 NEURO-PARALYTIC KERATITIS is caused by pressure upon, 
 or disease of, the ophthalmic division of the fifth nerve, which 
 has become paralyzed, the tissues supplied by it losing their 
 sensibility. The cornea is destroyed through loss of 
 nourishment, disintegration of the trophic fibres, or from 
 exposure to foreign bodies, air, etc. The surgeon should 
 endeavor to remove the cause, and to keep the lids forcibly 
 closed throughout the continuance of the disease.
 
 I3O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 NECROTIC KERATITIS is a rapid destruction of the cornea 
 without marked signs of inflammation, caused by maras- 
 mus, and other exhaustive diseases of infancy and early 
 childhood. 
 
 ARCUS SENILIS, Annulus Senilis, is a partial or complete 
 ring of fatty degeneration of the cornea about 1 mm. from 
 the limbus. 
 
 SEQUELS OF CORNEAL INFLAMMATIONS. 
 OPACITIES OF CORNEA. A nebula is a faint, macula an 
 easily seen but translucent, and lencoma a dense, white opa- 
 city of the cornea. In young persons, or when the opacity is 
 
 FIGS. 6 1 AND 62. 
 
 PARTIAL STAPHYLOMA OF THE CORNEA AND IRIS. 
 
 recent, absorption may be induced by mild irritants, e.g., 
 finely powdered calomel dusted against the cornea, or 
 yellow ointment applied to the margin of the lids once or 
 twice daily. Eserine (gr. ss-5j) dropped into the conjunctival 
 sac daily, may also prove beneficial. To improve vision, an 
 iridectomy, opposite clear cornea, may be made, providing 
 a new pupil for the transmission of light. 
 
 CONICAL CORNEA (Fig. 61) is a thinning and cone-like 
 projection forward of the cornea, without alteration in its 
 transparency, or other sign of inflammation. It is a chronic
 
 PROFOUND KERATITIS. 13! 
 
 and slowly progressive affection, the result of inherent weak- 
 ness of the corneal stroma. It commonly occurs in persons 
 between fifteen and thirty years of age, and is first sub- 
 jectively noticed by a deterioration in vision, about which 
 the patient will consult the surgeon. The condition is 
 detected by the use of Placido's disc, or by the distorted 
 image of a window frame on the patient's cornea, as well 
 as by retinoscopy, in which the shadow is broken into a 
 series of circular rings, and by the ophthalmoscope, which 
 shows a varying degree of myopia as the gaze is directed 
 through different parts of the cornea. The general refrac- 
 
 FIG. 63. 
 
 TOTAL STAPHYLOMA OF THE CORNEA AND IRIS. 
 
 tion is myopic, but a minus spherical, or a combination of a 
 minus spherical and a minus cylindrical glass, will be found 
 to be of very little service, since the cornea has many radii 
 of curvature. Treatment is of very little value, either by 
 correcting the refraction, or by operation. 
 
 STAPHYLOMA (Figs. 62 and 63) is a bulging forward of 
 the opaque cornea, which has been so weakened by disease 
 that it gives way to the normal pressure of the intraocular 
 fluids. It involves a part, or all of the cornea, according to 
 the intensity of the inflammation of which it is a sequel.
 
 132 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 Frequently the iris and lens are dislocated forward into the 
 deepened anterior chamber, the former adhering to the 
 posterior surface of the staphyloma, and the latter becom- 
 ing opaque. Secondary glaucoma, with ciliary staphyloma, 
 are not uncommon complications, and blindness more or 
 less complete is the rule. Treatment is unavailing. Am- 
 putation of the cornea or enucleation of the ball is indicated 
 when the disfigurement is great, or the suffering severe. In 
 children Critchett's operation is advisable, since the remain- 
 ing stump includes two-thirds of the ball, and does not 
 prevent development of the lines of the orbit, as does an 
 enucleation performed in early life. 
 
 TUMORS of the cornea usually occur as extensions of in- 
 flammatory new formations from the conjunctiva, or from 
 the deeper orbital tissues. Dermoid cysts, melanoma, pig- 
 mented sarcoma, and melanotic cancer may grow directly 
 from the cornea. The treatment is by excision or enuclea- 
 tion of the ball. Recurrence of these growths is probable. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE SCLERA. 
 
 SCLERITIS is a localized inflammation of the scleral tissue, 
 rheumatic in origin as a rule, characterized by slight swell- 
 ing, pain on pressure, active injection of contiguous ciliary, 
 deep pericorneal and conjunctival vessels, which impart to 
 the diseased area a purplish hue. There are no signs of 
 corneal or iritic involvement. The localized swelling and 
 redness, and rheumatic history, render the diagnosis easy. 
 The course of the disease is protracted, relapses frequent, 
 and the pain severe. There may be temporary loss of 
 function. 
 
 Treatment. Dry heat locally, salicylates, phosphate of 
 sodium by the stomach, and confinement of the patient
 
 DISEASES OF THE SCLERA. 133 
 
 to warm apartments, in which the light is subdued, are 
 indicated. 
 
 STAPHYLOMA (Fig. 64). Anterior staphyloma, or ciliary 
 staphyloma, is a bulging outward of the sclera in the 
 ciliary region, the result of long-continued increased intra- 
 ocular pressure, as in secondary glaucoma, and involves in 
 its distention, the underlying portion of the ciliary body or 
 choroid. The sclera becomes gradually thinner, assumes 
 a bluish discoloration, and the portion of the uveal tract 
 
 FIG. 64. 
 
 STAI'HYLOMA OF SCLERA. 
 
 involved in the process atrophies, and its place is occupied by 
 inflammatory exudations. There may be one or more pea- 
 sized staphylomata, or the entire anterior half of the globe 
 may form a single large, staphylomatous mass, involving 
 ciliary body, lens, iris and cornea. The function of the 
 eye is entirely and permanently destroyed. Amputation 
 (Critchett's operation), or enucleation of the ball, is to be 
 performed, when the tumor is large enough to warrant 
 surgical interference. 
 
 POSTERIOR STAPHYLOMA (Fig. 65). The pathogenesis of
 
 134 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 bulging of the sclera (non-traumatic) at the posterior pole 
 of the globe, is dissimilar to the form just described. It is 
 always present in high degrees of myopia, and its growth is 
 dependent on the same causes that develop myopia. It is 
 a true distention of the sclera, adjacent to the optic nerve, 
 preceded by absorption of the choroid which so weakens 
 it, that it cannot maintain its normal curve against the intra- 
 ocular pressure. The true cause, and growth, of malig- 
 
 nant myopia, whether inherited or acquired, are associated 
 with weakness of the sclera, and its tendency to stretch, 
 in this situation. The process is chronic and not attended 
 by any evidences of inflammation in the sclera or adjoining 
 coats. The staphyloma is at once seen by the ophthalmo- 
 scope as a white placque, limited to one side (temporal), or 
 surrounding the nerve with irregular small blotches of 
 pigment distributed over its surface, traversed by retinal
 
 DISEASES OF THE SCLERA. 135 
 
 vessels. It is more or less distinctly bounded by choroidal 
 tissue. Occasionally in advancing, or very high myopia, 
 a second distention, joined to the first by a small ridge 
 of normal sclera, and known as secondary staphyloma, 
 is found. Patches of atrophied choroid in the foveal region, 
 detached from the staphyloma, are not unusual.
 
 PART VIII. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CRYSTALLINE LENS AND 
 LENS CAPSULE. 
 
 LENTICULAR OPACITIES. 
 
 CATARACT is an opacity of the lens, either congenital or 
 acquired, and under these two heads the various forms of 
 cataract are divided. 
 
 CONGENITAL CATARACT is a development during intra- 
 uterine life, as a consequence of anomalous structure or of 
 embryonic disease, of certain distinctive opacities, which 
 
 POSTERIOR POLAR CATARACT. 
 
 have been classified and described under the following ap- 
 propriate headings : 
 
 (a] CENTRAL CATARACT is a small, round, dense white 
 spot in the nucleus. 
 
 (b) ANTERIOR POLAR CATARACT is an aggregation of 
 numerous minute points of opacity grouped around the 
 anterior extremity of the axis of the lens, sometimes 
 associated with, and dependent on, pyramidal capsular 
 cataract (exudation from the iris). 
 
 136
 
 DISEASES OF THE LENS. 137 
 
 (c] POSTERIOR POLAR CATARACT is a similar opacity at 
 the posterior pole of the lens, produced, probably, by the 
 premature abolition of the hyaloid artery. Anterior and 
 posterior polar cataract frequently co-exist in the same lens, 
 and may be united by a line of opacity (fusiform cataract). 
 
 (d) ZONULAR or LAMELLAR CATARACT, the form most fre- 
 quently found, is an opacity involving one or more layers or 
 strata of the lens about half-way between the periphery and 
 nucleus, the portions within and without this ring re- 
 maining transparent. The opaque lamella is seen by the 
 ophthalmoscope to be of a dull gray color, sharply defined 
 from the surrounding clear cortex, through which an indis- 
 tinct view of the fundus can sometimes be had. The 
 diagnosis is easily made when the pupil is dilated. 
 
 TOTAL CONGENITAL CATARACT. The lens is either en- 
 tirely opaque at birth, or opaque in its centre, the opacity 
 rapidly advancing during the first few months of extra- 
 uterine life, in the latter case, until the whole lens is opaque. 
 The lens is at first soft and of normal size, but eventually 
 shrinks and hardens from calcareous transformation. It is 
 usually hereditary. 
 
 It is of interest to know that while the varieties 
 of cataract described above are in the majority of cases 
 congenital, others, that resemble them in every way, are 
 acquired through traumatism, local inflammations, and 
 general disease, such as rachitis, convulsions, etc. Con- 
 genital cataract may be monocular or binocular. The 
 acuity of vision in any given case, will depend on the degree 
 and extent of opacity in the pupillary area. Some subjects 
 are enabled to pass through the school period, learning to 
 read, write, etc., while others will be enabled to distinguish 
 large objects only. Late in life, congenital cataracts are
 
 138 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 inclined to become wholly opaque. The "treatment is by 
 discission, or iridectomy. 
 
 ACQUIRED CATARACT. Traumatism, local inflammations, 
 and debilitating constitutional affections, may produce catar- 
 act at any age. The pathological process is primarily a dis- 
 turbance of nutrition, and secondarily a disturbance of the 
 anatomical relations of the strata of the lens absorption 
 of the fluid, and sclerosis of its fibrous elements. In young 
 individuals, twenty-five to thirty-five years old, the lens is 
 soft, and lenticular opacities occurring in persons under the 
 age of thirty years, are designated " soft " cataracts, while 
 the term " hard " cataract is applied to opacities occurring 
 in older persons. 
 
 Traumatism, perforating corneal ulcer, chronic iritis and 
 cyclitis, choroiditis, detachment of the retina, retinitis pig- 
 mentosa, and diabetes, are among the ascertained causes 
 of cataract in the young. Treatment : discission. 
 
 SENILE CATARACT. The word senile is employed to de- 
 scribe opacities occurring in persons of greater age than 
 thirty years, and which can be ascribed only to senile 
 change. Of course, the causes that are operative in the 
 production of cataract in the young, are also operative in 
 its production in older persons, and cataracts thus pro- 
 duced are not, properly speaking, senile, but secondary 
 secondary to traumatism, or to disease. 
 
 Senile cataract is either " incipient" or " mature." The 
 former is said to be nuclear when its starting point is in the 
 centre, and cortical when the opacity begins in the pe- 
 riphery of the lens. 
 
 It may be observed, in connection with the natural his- 
 tory of cataract, that a myopia of 3" or 4", due to swelling 
 of the lens, usually precedes the loss of transparency. The
 
 CONGENITAL LAMELLAR CATARACT. 
 (DILATED PUPIL). 
 
 CONGENITAL LAMELLAR CATARACT ADVANC- 
 ING TO TOTAL (DILATED Pui-n . 
 
 INCIPIENT NUCLEAR CATARACT 
 (DILATED PUPIL). 
 
 INCIPIENT NUCLEAR AND CORTICAL 
 CATARACT (DILATED PUPIL).
 
 CORTICAL CATARACT (DILATED PUPIL). CORTICAL CATARACT (UNDILATED PUPIL). 
 
 CONGENITAL CAPSULAR CATARACT 
 (DILATED PUPIL). 
 
 IRREGULAR LENTICULAR AND CAPSULAR 
 CATARACT (DILATED PUPIL).
 
 DISEASES OF THE LENS. 143 
 
 opacity commences as a few short streaks, seen as dark lines 
 by the ophthalmoscope, in the cortex at the line of union 
 of the different lens segments, or as a circular dark body 
 limited to the nucleus, the process advancing by involvement 
 of neighboring clear tissue until the entire lens is included. 
 The period of growth from incipiency to maturity varies in 
 different cases. It may be completed in a few months 
 or in the longer lapse of years. Mature cataract becomes 
 hypermature by a further tissue metamorphosis, the cortex 
 becoming fluid, the fibres broken and irregular, and the 
 lens shrunken, and infiltrated with myelin, cholesterin, and 
 calcareous formations. 
 
 Among the clinical features of cataract, it may be noted 
 that one eye is, as a rule, first affected, its fellow following 
 in the morbid process after a varying lapse of time. The 
 patient suffers no pain, and consults the surgeon for the 
 relief of gradually failing sight, which is very likely attributed 
 to the lack of proper glasses. All objects are seen through a 
 veil or mist which increases to blindness, or perception of 
 light only, with increasing and .finally complete opacity of 
 the lens. Such patients will very often not seek advice until 
 the second eye is affected. By oblique illumination, the lens 
 will show dark streaks, or areas, behind the pupil. By the 
 ophthalmoscope, the opacity is clearly outlined against the 
 red reflex of the fundus until the cataract is very nearly 
 matured. The opacity is fixed, moving only with the 
 movement of the ball (diagnosis between lenticular and 
 vitreous opacity), and is seen immediately behind the pupil. 
 
 A cataract is " ripe," and ready for operation, when, by 
 oblique illumination, the opacity is seen on a plane, or 
 nearly on a plane, with the pupillary margin, when vision 
 is reduced to the perception of large moving objects, such
 
 144 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 as the hand, twelve inches away from the eye, and when 
 light projection is possible in all parts of the visual field. 
 (Patient is directed to look straight forward, and correctly 
 give the position of the light as it is moved by the surgeon 
 in the different situations. This the patient will only do 
 when there is no serious defect of the eye ground.) K\- 
 ceptionally, cataracts should be extracted before maturity. 
 e.g., when both lenses are involved to the extent of pro- 
 hibiting the necessary occupation of life. It is conservative 
 surgery to operate on the eye first affected, when both are 
 ripe. 
 
 Treatment: extraction. Ninety per cent, regain useful 
 vision. 
 
 TRAUMATIC CATARACT. A contusion of the ball, ruptur- 
 ing the lens capsule, disturbance of the anatomical arrange- 
 ment of the layers or sectors of the lens, or laceration of 
 its capsule by a foreign body, whether or not the lens is 
 pierced, will lead to a partial or complete opacity of the 
 crystalline body. As a rule, the entire lens participates in 
 the morbid process. Immediately following the injury one 
 or more stripes of opacity radiate through the lens, which 
 swells and partly protrudes into the anterior chamber, where 
 partial absorption takes place. Iritis is a frequent accom- 
 paniment of traumatic cataract. 
 
 Treatment : in young subjects the lens will probably 
 undergo absorption without operation ; in elderly persons, 
 it must be extracted. 
 
 DISLOCATION OF THE LENS may exist congenitally, but 
 it is more often acquired. A congenital anomaly of the 
 vitreous or choroid is the underlying cause in the former, 
 and the latter, may be ascribed to contusions, or to the direct 
 and forcible contact of a foreign body. The lens substance
 
 DISEASES OF THE CAPSULE OF THE LENS. 145 
 
 usually becomes opaque, although it sometimes retains, 
 in the congenital form, its transparency for many years. 
 No treatment is advisable. In acquired dislocation of the 
 lens, extraction should be performed when possible. 
 
 APHAKIA, absence of the lens, is most frequently met 
 with in persons upon whom discission or extraction has 
 been performed. The diagnosis is made by the history, the 
 appearance of the eye, deep anterior chamber, trembling 
 of iris, absence of the small inverted image of a candle held 
 a short distance from the eye (Purkinje's sign), high degree 
 of hypermetropia, and by the loss of accommodation. 
 
 Treatment : glasses for far and for near. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CAPSULE OF THE LENS. 
 
 DEPOSITIONS ON THE ANTERIOR SURFACE are found, such 
 as the remains of the embryonic pupillary membrane, the 
 exudation from iritis, and cicatrices from temporary adhe- 
 sions to the cornea, following perforating ulcer. On the 
 posterior surface, the terminal remains of the hyaloid artery, 
 and the deposition of irregularly shaped flocculi, precipi- 
 tated from the vitreous, are occasionally found. 
 
 WOUNDS. The capsule of the lens may be lacerated, 
 and this injury is followed, in young persons, by retraction 
 or gaping of the divided margins, produced by extrusion of 
 lens matter, and by partial opacity of the anterior portion 
 of the capsule. Slight wounds of the capsule in elderly 
 persons are inclined to heal. Opacity of the capsule 
 anteriorly, together with opacity of the adjoining lens, 
 may entirely clear up. 
 
 SECONDARY CATARACT is a loss of transparency of the 
 capsule following, in a few weeks, extraction of the lens. 
 13
 
 146 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 Treatment. When the opaque capsule occupies the 
 pupillary space, an opening should be made in its centre by 
 means of two needles, or by division with a small sickle- 
 shaped knife ; or, when possible, the opaque capsule should 
 be extracted through an opening made in the cornea near its 
 scleral margin.
 
 PART IX. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE UVEAL TRACT. 
 
 CONGENITAL ANOMALIES OF THE IRIS. 
 
 ANIRIDIA is an absence of a part, usually the pupil- 
 lary margin, or of the entire iris. It is an uncommon 
 affection, and is found associated with other congenital 
 defects, such as posterior polar cataract, or microphthalmus. 
 
 COLOBOMA is a fissure of the iris, with its base at the 
 pupillary margin, and its apex at or near the periphery. A 
 similar defect in the ciliary body and choroid coat often 
 co-exists. It is an indication of arrested development. 
 
 PERSISTENT PUPILLARY MEMBRANE. The pupillary space 
 is occupied in the fcetus by a thin, web-like membrane 
 which occasionally remains after birth, as a few fine 
 threads, running obliquely across the pupil, attached to 
 the anterior surface of the iris. They might easily be 
 mistaken for posterior synechiae, but their origin from the 
 anterior surface, and not from the inner pupillary border, 
 their fineness and uniformity of outline as contrasted with 
 the irregularly shaped and dentated inflammatory adhe- 
 sions, as well as their very slight influence on the mobility 
 of the iris, will determine the diagnosis. 
 
 POLYCORIA is a multiple pupil, formed by an imperfect 
 coloboma, or by the remains of a persistent pupillary mem- 
 brane, which divides the otherwise normal pupil into two 
 or more spaces capable of contraction and expansion. 
 
 ALBINISM is that congenital condition in which the uveal 
 
 147
 
 148 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 tract, the hair, eye-brows and lashes, contain no pigment 
 cells. When the subject faces a bright light, the red 
 reflex of the fundus shows through the pupil and inter- 
 stices of the iris. Indistinct vision, from the imperfect 
 absorption by the choroid of the rays of light and from 
 myopia, congenital or acquired from the necessity of hold- 
 ing objects close to the eye, and photophobia, are invari- 
 ably present 
 
 DISEASES OF THE IRIS. 
 
 HYPER^EMIA OF THE IRIS is an abnormal fullness of 
 its vessels preliminary to iritis, or accompanying inflamma- 
 
 FIG. 67. 
 
 POSTERIOR SYNECHIA. 
 
 tion of the cornea, or of other and deeper-seated portions 
 of the eye. It is recognized by the presence of enlarged 
 vessels on the surface of the iris, its indolent response to 
 variations of light, and by its lessened expansibility under 
 the influence of mydriatics. The symptoms of hyperaemia 
 are those of the disease it inaugurates or accompanies. 
 PLASTIC IRITIS (Fig. 67). The conjunctiva in plastic iritis,
 
 DISEASES OF THE IRIS. 149 
 
 the most common inflammation involving the iris, is usually 
 inflamed and chemosed, with a deep-seated partial or 
 complete pericorneal zone of purplish vascularity. The 
 iris, which also shows increased vascularity, is discolored 
 and tumefied, and discharges on its surface, and in its par- 
 enchyma, a tenacious lymphoid exudation, which quickly 
 and permanently binds, if the disease is left uncontrolled, 
 its pupillary border to the anterior surface of the lens cap- 
 sule, thus forming posterior synechia. The synechiae, dis- 
 colored by an intermixture of pigment from the uveal tract, 
 visibly project in ragged edges from the pupillary margin. 
 These adhesions may unite a part of the pupillary border 
 to the anterior capsule of the lens, partial synechia, or the 
 entire posterior surface of the lens may be adherent to the 
 lens capsule (total or complete synechia), annihilating the 
 posterior chamber. The pupillary space may be in part 
 or altogether occluded by the membranous exudation, and, 
 in such instances (they are not infrequent), the capsule imme- 
 diately behind this space, is likely to become opaque, and 
 the mobility of the iris lost. In this condition its response 
 to mydriatics, is nearly or completely abolished, and the 
 functions of the eye temporarily destroyed ; for vision is 
 diminished in proportion to the extent and density of the 
 exudation. Pain in the ball, radiating to parts supplied 
 by the supra-orbital and infra-orbital branches of the fifth 
 nerve, is felt. Increased lacrymation and intolerance of 
 light, are also marked symptoms. Tension remains nor- 
 mal. 'Sensitiveness over the ciliary region is excessive. 
 The disease runs a course of from two to six weeks, or even 
 longer. Chronic iritis as an independent affection rarely, if 
 ever, exists. 
 
 The word " chronic " as applied to plastic iritis, has refer- 
 ence to the recurrent acute attacks, which are prone to occur
 
 I5O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 from a disturbance of function caused by attachments be- 
 tween iris and capsule, or from chronic inflammation of the 
 neighboring parts. 
 
 Iritis may under treatment recover without sequelae ; 
 usually, however, synechia and minute patches on the lens 
 capsule, mark the sites of adhesive exudation, and vision 
 may be destroyed through pupillary occlusion. It is not 
 infrequently found that a complete annular synechia re- 
 mains, cutting off communication between the anterior and 
 posterior chambers through the ordinary pupillary channel, 
 and secondary glaucoma is the natural and inevitable con- 
 sequence, unless the inter-pupillary communication is re- 
 established by iridectomy. It is the duty of the surgeon, 
 when the existence of this condition is definitely determined, 
 to urge this operation, and to refuse to treat the case if the 
 patient declines its immediate performance. 
 
 It is not always easy to determine the cause of plastic 
 iritis. It is consecutive to inflammation primarily in- 
 volving any portion of the uveal tract, and to trauma- 
 tism. The presence of a foreign body may set up a plastic 
 iritis, or it may arise idiopathically. The common cause 
 of the disease, are syphilis, gonorrhoea, rheumatism, and 
 scrofula, or tuberculosis. 
 
 Treatment is local and constitutional. The patient should 
 be confined to a properly ventilated but darkened room- 
 Atropine (gr. viij-5j), hot-water bathing, and leeches to the 
 temple, are to be employed, and actively employed, locally. 
 If the disease is due to traumatism, the appropriate local 
 treatment should be instituted; if the outbreak is of rheu- 
 matic origin, the salicylates are indicated ; if syphilis is the 
 cause, the patient should be mercurialized to the point of 
 mild sali vation,and mercury in lessening doses with the iodide 
 of potassium, administered during the continuance of the
 
 DISEASES OF THE IRIS. 151 
 
 inflammation. The mercurials may be omitted if the affec- 
 tion is due to gonorrhoea. In a word, the cause, whatever 
 it may be, should be treated on general principles, inde- 
 pendently of the local affection, the patient's strength nour- 
 ished, and the general system built up by a generous dietary, 
 tonics, and fresh air. 
 
 SEROUS IRITIS, DESCEMITIS (Fig. 68), is recognized by 
 the presence on the posterior surface of the cornea of a 
 collection of minute points of exudation, and by a similar 
 exudation, combined with larger and denser flakes, floating 
 in the anterior portion of the vitreous chamber. The iris 
 reacts sluggishly to the stimulus of light and accommo- 
 
 FIG. 68. 
 
 SEROUS IRITIS. 
 
 dation, and may present one or more minute posterior 
 synechiae. Light does not pass readily through the floccu- 
 lated cornea and vitreous, and there is a resulting deterio- 
 ration of vision. The details of the fundus are indistinctly 
 seen by the ophthalmoscope. The nerve is ill-defined, and 
 the retinal vessels veiled, as in neuro-retinitis. These 
 appearances are due, as a rule, to the clouded media, but 
 in some instances are the results of a co-existing optic 
 neuritis. The pain and injection are inconsiderable ; they 
 may, indeed, be altogether absent, and indistinct vision the 
 symptom of which the patient most complains. The course 
 of the disease is chronic, its etiology obscure, and the treat-
 
 152 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 ment unsatisfactory. Mydriatics, mercurials and the iodides 
 are, however, employed. The nutrition of the lens is dis- 
 turbed, streaks of opacity appearing in the cortex, followed 
 by total opacity of the lens, in a small proportion of cases. 
 
 PARENCHYMATOUS, OR SUPPURATIVE IRITIS. In simple 
 plastic iritis, exudation from the inflamed membrane is 
 largely deposited in the anterior chamber and pupillary space, 
 but in parenchymatous iritis, the inflammatory exudates are 
 mostly confined to the tissues of the iris, which become 
 swollen and spongy in consequence, and its color changes 
 to a yellow or greenish-yellow, as the lymphoid cells un- 
 dergo transformation into pus. The pupillary border of 
 the iris is hypertrophied and thickened by fibrinous exu- 
 dations, which project into, and sometimes obliterate, the 
 pupillary space. The characteristic sign of purulent iritis, 
 is the deposition in the anterior chamber of pus, which, less 
 consistent and more fluid than the hypopyon of keratitis, is 
 absorbed and re-formed rapidly. Commonly there is a for- 
 mation in one or more sections of the iris of small collec- 
 tions of cells, tuberculous or gummatous according to the 
 origin of the disease. Vision is generally permanently im- 
 paired. The treatment is practically the same as that already 
 given for the plastic form of iritis, and should be pushed 
 energetically and persistently. 
 
 MYDRIASIS, DILATATION OF PUPIL, is (i) Idiopathic when 
 it persists for many years in one or both eyes, or alternates 
 from one eye to the other, and is associated, in most cases, 
 with paralysis of accommodation. It is likely to obtain in 
 several members of a family, and exists without apparent 
 cause other than heredity. (2) It is artificial, and transient, 
 when the result of the instillation of a mydriatic; (3) symp- 
 tomatic when it is the reflex of a lesion in the brain or spinal 
 cord, or from intra-ocular, or extra-ocular pressure; (4) cmo-
 
 DISEASES OF THE IRIS. 153 
 
 tional when due to anger, fright, or nervous excitement. If 
 the mydriasis is long continued, the local instillation of eser- 
 ine may be beneficial. If, however, the mydriasis is due to 
 a lesion of the cerebro-spinal system, treatment is unavailing. 
 
 MYOSIS, CONTRACTION OF THE PUPIL, is (i) artificial and 
 transient, when the result of the instillation of a myotic 
 (eserine) ; (2) irritative when the 3d nerve, or its pupillary 
 branch is excited to excessive action by central irritation, 
 induced by the presence of a tumor, or by the continued, 
 or strong contraction of other branches of the 3d nerve ; 
 (3) reflex when due to neuralgia of the 5th nerve, or to in- 
 testinal irritation ; (4) paralytic when the pupillary fibres in 
 the cervical and dorsal plexus of the sympathetic are com- 
 pressed or diseased from traumatism, aneurism, or other 
 causes. Local treatment is useless when the myosis is the 
 symptom of a central lesion. 
 
 "ARGYLL-ROBERTSON PUPIL" is that condition in which 
 the pupil contracts under the impulse supplied by the 
 stimulus of the 3d nerve in the acts of convergence and 
 accommodation, but not to the stimulus of light. 
 
 HYPH.EMIA, or hemorrhage into the anterior chamber from 
 the vessels of the iris, is spontaneous in sudden alteration in 
 the tension of the ball, in glaucoma, and in menstrual irregu- 
 larities ; and traumatic, in wounds, contusions and lacer- 
 ations of the iris. In atrophied eye-balls, which are the seats 
 of old hemorrhages, cholesterin crystals are sometimes 
 found in the anterior chamber. Treatment is unnecessary. 
 
 DETACHMENT OF THE IRIS from the ligamentum pec- 
 tinatum, may occur as the result of a severe blow, and 
 is always attended by hyphaemia, and by partial and tem- 
 porary loss of vision. After the blood has been absorbed, 
 the eye may regain normal vision. No treatment will 
 restore the iris to its former position. 
 14
 
 154 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 TUMORS OF THE IRIS. 
 
 CYSTS. One or more cysts, ranging in size from a pin- 
 head to a pea, with solid or fluid contents, the result usu- 
 ally of traumatism, may form on any part of the surface of 
 the iris, and are attended with moderate inflammatory 
 symptoms. They, together with the underlying iris, should 
 be excised at the earliest possible moment. 
 
 TUBERCLE is a collection of small, whitish elevations con- 
 taining tuberculous matter, scattered over the surface, and 
 coexist with similar growths in the choroid. They precede, 
 or are developed, in a small proportion of cases, during 
 general tuberculosis. 
 
 GRANULOMA is a small benign tumor, resembling in 
 appearance a granulation of the conjunctiva. The treat- 
 ment is by excision with iridectomy. 
 
 GUMMA is a syphilitic tumor, springing from the stroma 
 at the pupillary border, or near the periphery of the iris, and 
 consists of a mass of spindle-shaped cells, gummous exuda- 
 tion, and newly-formed connective tissue, brownish-yellow 
 in color, round in outline, vascular at its base, and projecting 
 as far forward, in some instances, as the posterior surface of 
 the cornea. It makes its appearance at the end of the 
 second or the commencement of the third stage of constitu- 
 tional syphilis, and, like gumma in other parts of the body, is 
 amenable to mercury and potassium iodide administered in 
 large doses. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CILIARY BODY. 
 CYCLITIS, or inflammation of the ciliary body, is rarely an 
 independent affection, but usually associated with disease 
 of the iris or choroid, and should be considered as a com- 
 plication, or concurrent symptom, in connection with inflam-
 
 DISEASES OF THE CILIARY BODY. 155 
 
 matory disease of these tissues. It is, therefore, an extension 
 of inflammation of the iris, or choroid to the ciliary body, 
 characterized by an increased sensibility to touch in the cil- 
 iary region, and by the presence of opacities in the anterior 
 portion of the vitreous humor. 
 
 Treatment. Locally, atropine, hot water applications, and 
 leeches to the temple. Internally, mercury and the iodides, 
 or jaborandi. 
 
 SYMPATHETIC OPHTHALMIA. The course of sympa- 
 thetic inflammation is marked by two distinct and separate 
 degrees of advancement, the stage of irritation and the stage 
 of inflammation, which must be unmistakably recognized. 
 The first stage, always the precursor of the second 
 unless promptly discovered and checked by operation, 
 is declared by a decrease in the range of accommodation 
 in the eye not primarily affected, by photophobia, lacry- 
 mation, slight pericorneal injection, sluggishness of the iris 
 under the stimulus of light and of accommodation, and 
 perhaps, by tenderness upon pressure over the ciliary 
 region. Following, these symptoms, is the inauguration of 
 the second stage with exudation into the anterior chamber 
 and pupillary space, vitreous opacities, pain, moderate swell- 
 ing of the optic nerve, and oedema of the retina. The flame 
 is now well lighted up in the eye, and, with the super- 
 vention of hypopyon, iritis, occlusion of the pupil, opacity 
 of the lens, shrinking of the vitreous, and retino-choroiditis, 
 goes on to panophthalmitis, atrophy, and destruction of 
 the ball. 
 
 The disease is transmitted along the ciliary nerves, or 
 the lymphatic sheath of the optic nerve, or both. 
 
 It may be caused by a foreign body, hernia of the iris, 
 anterior synechia, dislocated lens, a cysticercus, trauma-
 
 156 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 tism, bony formation in the vitreous chamber, or by the 
 irritation of an artificial eye. 
 
 Treatment. Enucleation of the eye inducing irritation, in 
 first stage ; local remedies, and mercurialization for the 
 irido-choroiditis, in second stage, with enucleation of infect- 
 ing eye, if it is hopelessly blind. 
 
 CHRONIC CVCLITIS is the term given to a chronic inflam- 
 mation involving nearly all the tissues of the eye, eventu- 
 ating in the abolition of function, and in atrophy of the ball, 
 f>/ithisis bnlbi. As a result of traumatism, an unsuccessful 
 cataract extraction, for example, the uveal tract becomes 
 inflamed, the iris totally adherent to the lens capsule, pupil 
 occluded, lens capsule and lens opaque (if not previously 
 extracted), ciliary body destroyed (atrophied), vitreous 
 opaque and shrunken, retina detached, and the choroid dis- 
 organized. The cornea, which may or may not be opaque, 
 is lessened in its diameters. If inflammation should sub- 
 sequently attack the eye thus destroyed, as not infrequently 
 happens, the occurrence of a sympathetic inflammation in 
 the sound eye is to be apprehended, and guarded against. 
 After the lapse of years, the vitreous body of an eye de- 
 stroyed through chronic cyclitis, is replaced by a button of 
 bone, deposited very gradually from the choroid, which, 
 acting as a foreign body, irritates the ciliary nerves by con- 
 stant friction, and leads to sympathetic involvement of the 
 sound eye. An atrophied eyeball is, therefore, a constant 
 menace to the integrity of its fellow, and the only conser- 
 vative treatment is enucleation.
 
 DISEASES OF THE CHOROID. 157 
 
 DISEASES OF THE CHOROID. 
 
 CHOKOIDITIS. In inflammation of the choroid, its stroma 
 is infiltrated with amorphous masses of exudation and col- 
 lections of densely packed cellular elements at the periphery, 
 pole, or in the neighborhood of the optic nerve, varying in 
 size from a minute point to the patches of the diameter of 
 the disc, or even larger. The pigment layer of the retina is 
 always disturbed. The pigment cells are either absorbed 
 or undergo proliferation, collecting in masses at the circum- 
 ference of the patch. The exudate becomes absorbed in 
 the later stages of the disease, its site being marked by an 
 absence of pigment as well as of vessels, and the overlying 
 retina is partly destroyed through cicatricial contraction. 
 The patches vary in shape, but are either round or oval 
 as a rule. The vitreous contains opacities, and is generally 
 fluid. In purulent choroiditis, pus cells are dispersed every- 
 where through the meshes of the choroid and retina, and 
 may completely fill the vitreous chamber. 
 
 The retina and choroid are so intimately associated in 
 structure and function, that chronic disease of the one 
 must involve the other. The names given to the various 
 clinical manifestations of choroidal and retinal disease de- 
 pend on the membrane in which it originates, but in every 
 case it is a retino-cJwroiditis. The effect on vision of retino- 
 choroiditis will depend on the site of the exudation, whether 
 central (at or near the fovea) or peripheral, and on the 
 amount of retinal tissue destroyed. It is much less, as 
 a rule, than the ophthalmoscopic appearance would 
 indicate. 
 
 DISSEMINATED CHOROIDITIS (Fig. 69) is a collection of 
 small, roundish aggregations of yellowish, subsequently 
 white, exudation, surrounded by deposits of pigment,
 
 158 A MANUAJL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 scattered at first irregularly throughout the periphery, and, 
 finally, in the neighborhood of the disc and macula. They 
 rarely increase in size. 
 
 AREOLAR CHOROIDITIS (Fig. 70). In this form of cho- 
 roiditis the patches, fewer in number and larger in size 
 than in disseminated choroiditis, are deposited here and 
 there throughout the fundus. 
 
 CENTRAL CHOROIDITIS is a limitation of the inflamma- 
 tory and atrophic changes to the macular region. 
 
 CENTRAL SENILE ATROPHY is characterized by absorp- 
 tion of the choroidal tissue and destruction of the retina 
 at and around the fovea, preceded, possibly, by apoplexy 
 of the choroid. 
 
 CENTRAL GUTTATE CHOROIDITIS (Fig. 71) is the term 
 employed to designate the deposition, immediately behind 
 the retina, of from six to twelve minute chalk-like aggrega- 
 tions involving the fovea, or adjacent to it, and associated 
 with partial destruction of the retina. It is commonly 
 found in old persons. 
 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPIC APPEARANCES. By the aid of the oph- 
 thalmoscope, the observer is enabled to determine variations 
 from the normal in color, together with the size, site, shape, 
 approximate number arid character, of the discolorations de- 
 scribed above. In the earlier stages of choroidal disease, 
 the patches present a yellowish hue, which gradually 
 assume, as the ghoroid is absorbed, the bluish-white color 
 ofithe sclera, and are distinctly outlined by a black border 
 of pigment. They vary in size and number, and are irregu- 
 lar in shape. Occasionally a choroidal vessel is found run- 
 ning across the patch. Among the patches, too, are often 
 seen sm?ll black pigment spots, irregular in outline, which 
 appear to be situated in the retina, as determined by their 
 relation to the retinal vessels. The difference of level be-
 
 DISEASES OF THE CHOROID. 
 FIG. 69. 
 
 ATROPHY AFTER SYPHILITIC CHOROIDITIS, SHOWING VARIOUS DEGREES 
 
 OF WASTING. 
 
 a. Atrophy of pigment epithelium, b. Atrophy of epithelium and chorio-capillaris ; the 
 large vessels exposed, c. Spots of complete atrophy, many with pigment accumula- 
 tion. 
 
 FIG. 70. 
 
 CENTRAL CHOROIDITIS ( Wecker and Jaeger].
 
 l6o A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 tween the centre of the patch and the adjoining fundus is 
 always difficult, and sometimes impossible, to estimate ; if, 
 however, the choroidal vessels have disappeared, and the 
 retinal vessels pass over the affected spot, it is safe to 
 assume that the choroid is the main and original seat of 
 the disease. 
 
 In disseminated choroiditis the spots are nqmerous, and 
 average about half the size of the disc. They are found, 
 
 FIG. 71. 
 
 CENTRAL GUTTATE SENILE CHOROIDITIS. 
 
 in the earlier stages of the disease, scattered over the equa- 
 torial zone. In areolar choroiditis the patches are larger, 
 several times the diameter of the disc, but fewer in num- 
 ber, and usually involve the posterior pole. Round masses 
 of pigment are spread, in its earliest stages, through the 
 fundus, but these undergo gradual absorption, beginning in 
 the centre and advancing to the circumference, leaving a 
 white spot traversed by retinal vessels and outlined by
 
 DISEASES OF THE CHOROID. l6l 
 
 pigment. The pigment line, in turn, is often girdled by a 
 zone of opaque retina. The earliest change discernible by 
 the ophthalmoscope in central choroiditis, is a collection of 
 pigment spots in a mass of exudation, elevating the retina 
 at and in the immediate neighborhood of the fovea. As the 
 disease advances the spots become confluent, the exudation 
 shallower, and the branches of the small retinal vessels 
 turning toward the fovea are seen to bend at the margin 
 of the plaque. Eventually the chorqid atrophies, and 
 the overlying retina is destroyed, presenting the general 
 appearances noticed in other forms of choroiditis. The 
 whitish patch involving the foveal region in central senile 
 atrophy, is preceded by no ophthalmoscopic evidence of 
 inflammation. In choroiditis guttata, the ophthalmoscope 
 reveals a collection, surrounding the fovea or between the 
 fovea and disc, of pale yellow and glistening white dots, 
 which have no clinical significance. 
 
 In all forms of acute choroiditis, vitreous opacities are 
 discernible by the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 SYMPTOMS IN GENERAL. The main symptom is an im- 
 pairment of vision, the character and degree of which will 
 depend on the site of lesion, the extent of retinal implica- 
 tion, and vitreous opacities. The visual declination is, it 
 may be remarked here, not so great as the ophthalmo- 
 scopic appearances would lead one to suppose. The patient 
 will complain of a grayish or blackish defect in the centre 
 of the object in view (positive scotoma), or, later on, of an 
 utter effacement of the object in its centre (negative scotoma), 
 or of a distortion of the object (metamorphopsia), and of 
 sparks or flashes of light or color when the lids are opened 
 or closed, owing to an irritation of the retinal elements 
 (photopsia). The patient will complain, too, of spots or
 
 1 62 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 clouds which float before the sight, especially marked in a 
 bright light 
 
 In purulent choroiditis, the pseudo-glionia of some writers, 
 vision is lost in a few hours because of the quick destruc- 
 tion of the choroid and retina. Pus can easily be seen, by 
 oblique illumination, collected in the vitreous chamber. The 
 anterior chamber is shallow, iris and lens adherent, and 
 both pushed forward by the purulent mass. 
 
 The causes of choroidal disease are numerous. Con- 
 genital and acquired syphilis, traumatism, metastatic 
 infarction due to epidemic and sporadic cerebro-spinal 
 meningitis, and other contagious fevers, pyaemia, endocar- 
 ditis, and high myopia, may be mentioned. 
 
 Treatment. In its early stages or manifestations, the dis- 
 ease may be cured, or at least checked, by the energetic 
 employment of the mercurials and iodides. The cause 
 must be ascertained and treated on general principles.
 
 PART X. 
 
 DISEASES OF THE VITREOUS. 
 
 HYALITIS. : Inflammation of the vitreous is not an inde- 
 pendent affection, but a development of cyclitis or choroid- 
 itis. It is characterized by a change of consistency, 
 opacities, and by partial disorganization of its own tissue. 
 The opacities are of three varieties, namely, clouds of fine 
 dust, significant of syphilitic disease of the choroid ; 
 membranes, following hemorrhage, retinal detachment, 
 and syphilitic chorio-retinitis ; and threads, or irregularly- 
 shaped, dense, separate flocculi, seen in high grades of 
 myopia, and in the various forms of chronic choroiditis. 
 Purulent infiltration and degeneration of the vitreous fre- 
 quently follow the entrance into the chamber of foreign 
 bodies, choroiditis metastica, entozoon, etc., and eventuate 
 in phthisis bulbi. 
 
 MUSCLE VOLITANTES are minute physiological vitreous 
 elements, causing a subjective sensation of shadows floating 
 before the eye, not revealed by the ophthalmoscope, and 
 while their existence is annoying, they are of little patho- 
 logical importance. The causative agency is supposed to 
 be ametropia, since they are dissipated by its correction. 
 
 SYNCHISIS is the name given to a fluid condition of the 
 vitreous. 
 
 SYNCHISIS SCINTILLANS is the designation given to an 
 accumulation of cholesterine and other crystals in the 
 
 163
 
 164 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 vitreous, revealed by the ophthalmoscope as glittering or 
 silver-like reflections which move in all directions. 
 
 The prognosis of vitreous opacities should always be in- 
 fluenced by the reflection that they are, in fact, the floating 
 wrecks of a preceding destructive inflammation of the 
 choroid and retina, the visible marks of an inflammatory 
 storm in these parts. 
 
 Treatment is not encouraging. In opacities due to 
 syphilitic disease, some improvement may be expected from 
 mercury and the iodides. In a word, the underlying cause 
 must be discovered and combated. The syphilis may yield 
 to treatment, the hemorrhage be absorbed, and the foreign 
 body removed by the proper treatment. 
 
 PERSISTENT HYALOID ARTERY. In intra-uterine life the 
 lens is supplied with blood from the hyaloid artery, a 
 straight vessel given off to the posterior surface of the lens 
 from one of the branches of the central retinal artery. It 
 persists, as a fibrous cord, with its anterior end either 
 attached to the posterior surface of the lens or floating 
 unattached in the vitreous, in a small proportion of cases, 
 and can easily be seen with the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 FOREIGN BODIES, such as metallic chips, splinters of 
 wood, shot, etc., are sometimes driven with great force 
 through the external coats of the eye, and find lodgment 
 in the vitreous chamber. It is a serious accident, termi- 
 nating in the partial or complete destruction of the ball from 
 supervening purulent inflammation, and is, moreover, a pro- 
 lific source of sympathetic ophthalmia. The diagnosis is 
 determined by the presence of a" superficial wound, sudden 
 loss of vision, reduced tension, blood in the anterior and 
 vitreous chambers, and, in some instances, by the ophthal- 
 moscope and magnetic needle. 
 
 A foreign body in the vitreous sometimes becomes en-
 
 DISEASES OF THE VITREOUS. 165 
 
 cysted, and remains for years without giving rise to serious 
 symptoms. Its removal, by means of a magnet, is advis- 
 able when practicable. If vision is completely and perma- 
 nently lost, leaving a painful ball, enucleation should be 
 promptly performed.
 
 PART XI. 
 
 GLAUCOMA. 
 
 Glaucoma is a disease characterized by abnormally in- 
 creased intra-ocular pressure, usually and arbitrarily 
 described under two main divisions, primary and secondary. 
 The primary is subdivided into non-inflammatory or simple, 
 and inflammatory. 
 
 SIMPLE GLAUCOMA is a gradually advancing blindness 
 with attendant, probably consequential, excavation of the 
 optic nerve " amaurosis with excavation." Its pathology 
 is not understood. The symptoms are not readily suggest- 
 ive of the disease. The patient complains of gradually 
 diminishing vision, and nothing more, as a rule. Even the 
 pressure symptoms are negatively conspicuous. In truth, 
 the symptoms of simple glaucoma are so little characteristic, 
 that a diagnosis between cataract, atrophy of the nerve 
 from other causes, and simple glaucoma can be determined 
 only by the ophthalmoscope ; and even with this instru- 
 ment as an aid to diagnosis, it is not always possible to 
 definitely determine whether the cupping of the nerve is a 
 precedent and independent, or a subsequent and dependent, 
 condition. The cup, usually involving the entire disc, is 
 shallow, surrounded by a narrow zone of atrophied choroid, 
 and the arteries on the disc pulsate spontaneously, or can 
 be made to pulsate by pressure of the fingers on the globe. 
 The field of vision is limited concentrically, or the nasal 
 field contracted, while the extreme temporal field, with 
 
 166
 
 GLAUCOMA. 167 
 
 possibly one or more scotomata, is preserved to the last. 
 Both eyes are, in the majority of cases, affected, although 
 the disease is further advanced in one than in the other, 
 when the patient comes under observation. If the patient 
 seeks advice at a certain stage of the affection, it may be 
 found that one disc is totally and the other only partially 
 cupped. The disease runs a very chronic course, several 
 years intervening before blindness is complete. Com- 
 plete restoration of vision is rarely attained. The progress 
 of the disease may be controlled, under favorable condi- 
 tions, by operation. 
 
 Treatment. Eserine ; iridectomy ; sclerotomy. 
 
 CHRONIC INFLAMMATORY GLAUCOMA. In reference to 
 the pathology of chronic inflammatory glaucoma (Figs. 
 72 and 73), it may be stated that changes in the periphery 
 of the iris, which lead to partial closure or obliteration of 
 the spaces of Fontana, thus preventing the outflow of intra- 
 ocular fluids, are common. But whether these changes in 
 the iris are primary and causative, or secondary and inci- 
 dental to the glaucomatous process, is a question that has 
 never been definitely determined. The immediate effect of 
 such occlusion or obliteration of the spaces of Fontana is to 
 add to the amount of intra-ocular fluid, and hence to 
 increase intra-ocular tension. Other pathological pro- 
 cesses, namely, peripheral adhesion of the iris to the cornea 
 through inflammatory exudation, vascular engorgement of 
 the iris and ciliary body, atrophy of the ciliary muscle, oblit- 
 eration of the choroidal vessels and atrophy of its tissue, 
 closure of the lymph spaces, sclerosis and degeneration of 
 the retina and optic nerve, are directly due and traceable to 
 increased tension. This form of glaucoma is characterized 
 by the occurrence, following a premonitory stage of vary-
 
 1 68 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 ing duration, of attacks of true glaucoma, lasting from 
 twelve to twenty-four hours. 
 
 The symptoms of the premonitory stage are: (l) early 
 presbyopia, or a recedence of the near point, due to pres- 
 sure on the ciliary muscle, the patient requiring a stronger 
 
 FIG. 73. 
 
 GLAUCOMATOUS EXCAVATION. 
 {Ophtkalmoscopic view.} 
 
 GLAUCOMATOUS EXCAVATION 
 
 OF THE OPTIC NERVE. 
 
 (Vertical section.} 
 
 plus glass for reading than the age would indicate, and there 
 may be also a real diminution of refraction (acquired Hy- 
 permetropia) ; (2) a colored ring is seen around a gas flame, 
 caused by slight opacities in the media and by the dilated 
 pupil ; (3) periodic obscuration of vision and ciliary neural-
 
 GLAUCOMA. 169 
 
 gia due to temporarily increased pressure. The objec- . 
 tive signs present are increased tension, as determined 
 by palpation over the closed lid, or directly on the 
 sclera (normal tension is expressed by the letters Tn.; 
 slightly increased tension by Tn. -{- I ; undoubtedly hard by 
 Tn. -f- 2 ; stony hard by Tn. -f- 3 ; when slightly less than 
 normal, by Tn. I ; undoubtedly soft by Tn. 2, very soft 
 by Tn. 3) ; pulsation of the arteries on the disc, either 
 spontaneous or easily induced by pressure on the globe. 
 The intra-ocular pressure is so high that the blood enters the 
 ball only with the systole of the heart, interrupting the con- 
 tinuous flow through the artery, thus producing a systolic 
 pulsation. This sign is not infrequently found in aortic dis- 
 ease, and in exophthalmic goitre, and is occasionally found 
 in persons apparently free from cardiac disease. Venous pul- 
 sation has no pathological significance. The retinal veins are 
 hyperaemic, tortuous, and expanded in calibre. The pupil is 
 dilated and sluggish, a direct consequence of pressure on 
 the ciliary nerves. There is, lastly, some opacity of the 
 aqueous humor from the exudations of venous stasis. 
 
 The prodromic stage may be said to be at an end, and 
 true glaucoma begun, when, following one of these periodic 
 attacks, the symptoms just described are unusually pro- 
 nounced, with marked deterioration of vision. Each succes- 
 sive attack is progressively severe, and occurs at lessening 
 intervals, until the eye presents the distressingly character- 
 istic appearances of glaucoma with vision entirely destroyed. 
 The ciliary vessels are injected, the anterior chamber shal- 
 low, the pupil widely dilated and immobile, the iris atro- 
 phied, the lens partly opaque and slightly dislocated 
 forward, the disc surrounded by a ring of atrophied choroid, 
 and the eye, now blind, is the seat of periodic attacks of 
 pain of the most excruciating character. 
 15
 
 I/O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 Treatment. During the premonitory stage, an attack 
 may be warded off by the instillation of a solution of eser- 
 ine sulphate (gr. ij-5j), repeated every two hours until the 
 symptoms are relieved. When the disease is unmistakably 
 developed, iridectomy should be at once performed. 
 
 ACUTE INFLAMMATORY GLAUCOMA. A sudden outbreak 
 of this disease, preceded in some cases by prodromic symp- 
 toms, is announced by unmistakable signs. The conjunc- 
 tiva is chemotic, the anterior ciliary and pericorneal vessels 
 intensly injected, the cornea presents a steamy appearance 
 and is denuded of its epithelium, the anterior chamber is 
 shallow and the aqueous humor turbid, the iris widely 
 dilated, oval and unresponsive to light, and but feebly, if at 
 all, contracted by eserine, and the color of the pupillary space 
 is grayish-green from opacity of the cornea and aqueous 
 humor, and from reflection of light from the lens. The fundus 
 is invisible. The patient complains of intense ciliary neural- 
 gia, the pain radiating over the forehead and down the side 
 of the nose, and of rapid and complete loss of vision, which 
 is due to paralysis of the retina and optic nerve from exces- 
 sive pressure. The attack lasts several days. The signs of 
 pressure slowly subside, pain is diminished and finally disap- 
 pears and vision is, in part, restored, although the eye never 
 entirely regains its lost functions. Or, the acute may gradu- 
 ally pass into the chronic form of the disease. An eye once 
 attacked by acute glaucoma is predisposed to subsequent 
 attacks. The optic nerve becomes excavated several days or 
 weeks after the acute onset has subsided. The perform- 
 ance of iridectomy should immediately follow the diagnosis. 
 
 FULMINATING GLAUCOMA is the term applied to those 
 cases in which the above conditions are most pronounced, 
 and vision is lost in a few hours. 
 
 Treatment. Iridectomy.
 
 GLAUCOMA. I/I 
 
 SECONDARY GLAUCOMA is a result of certain local, chronic 
 inflammatory diseases in which the intra-ocular pressure 
 becomes permanently increased with excavation of the optic 
 papilla. Among the causes thus operative, may be men- 
 tioned anterior and annular synechiae, traumatic cataract, 
 dislocation of the lens, and intra-ocular tumors. The 
 prodromal stage is wanting. The symptoms are identical 
 with those of chronic inflammatory glaucoma. Prognosis 
 is unfavorable. 
 
 Treatment. Iridectomy or sclerotomy. 
 
 Glaucoma may be complicated with other diseases, such 
 as cataract, detachment of the retina, atrophy of the optic 
 nerve, etc. Its etiology is obscure. It affects persons who 
 have passed the middle of adult life,* and preeminently 
 those of a gouty diathesis. 
 
 GLAUCOMATOUS DEGENERATION. After an eye has been 
 in the condition of absolute glaucoma for a varying period 
 of time, which cannot be accurately stated, it under- 
 goes secondary changes of a degenerative character. Its 
 volume may be decreased from ulcerative processes in the 
 cornea, through which the cataractous lens and part of the 
 fluid vitreous are expelled by hemorrhages from the dis- 
 eased vessels of the retina and choroid, phthisis bulbi, or 
 the weakened sclera, unable to resist the abnormal intra- 
 ocular pressure, becomes staphylomatous, and the diame- 
 ters of the ball enlarged. During the period of glau- 
 comatous degeneration, the globe is, ordinarily, the seat 
 of intense pain. The ball should be enucleated. 
 
 * Mr. Priestly Smith has advanced the theory, based on numerous carefully 
 conducted examinations, that idiopathic glaucoma is, in the main, dependent 
 on an increase in size of the crystalline lens which, he claims, is common in 
 advancing life.
 
 PART XII. 
 
 NON-INFLAMMATORY DISEASES OF THE 
 RETINA. 
 
 HYPER/EMIA is an increase in length and width of the 
 large retinal vessels, recognized by their lateral and vertical 
 tortuosity, dark color, pronounced light reflex, which ex- 
 tends far out toward the periphery of the fundus, by an 
 increase in the apparent number and size of the smaller twigs, 
 and by the color of the optic disc, which presents a deep red 
 appearance so nearly the color of the surrounding fundus 
 that the normal contrast in color between the two parts 
 is almost lost. Pulsating veins on the disc are not infre- 
 quently found in the absence of disease, and are not patho- 
 logically significant, when moderate and confined to the 
 superior and inferior veins, but pulsation of the smaller 
 veins, and especially when it is noticeable some distance 
 from the trunk, must be accepted as an evidence of disease. 
 
 Hyperaemia of the retina and nerve, when it is not the 
 initial stage of an acute inflammatory process, is an indica- 
 tion of local irritation from ametropic strain, an associated 
 symptom of disease of the uveal tract, or an evidence of 
 central congestion or inflammation. The normal retinal 
 variations are so great, that the diagnosis is difficult. 
 
 The cause should be determined and treated on general 
 principles. 
 
 ANAEMIA of the retina is a symptom of constitutional 
 dyscrasia. The calibre of the arteries is decreased, and 
 
 172
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 
 
 173 
 
 they are less numerous, relatively, on the disc than in 
 health. The veins are unaltered, or slightly tortuous, and 
 the disc pale. 
 
 EMBOLISM OF THE CENTRAL RETINAL ARTERY (Fig. 74) 
 is a clot or embolus, which cuts off the retinal circulation, 
 and is immediately followed by complete and incurable 
 blindness. The distal branches assume a thread-like 
 
 FIG. 74. 
 
 EMHOLISM OF THE CENTRAL ARTERY OK THE RETINA. 
 
 appearance, and have no light reflex. The veins are thin, 
 the disc white, and pulsation in the arteries or veins can- 
 not be induced by pressure on the ball. Degeneration of the 
 retina rapidly follows. It becomes opaque; the opacity be- 
 ing more pronounced in the region of the fovea, in which 
 situation a well-marked, round, red spot (the choroid thus 
 showing its normal color through the thinnest portion of 
 the retina by contrast with the surrounding opacity) is dis-
 
 174 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 tinctly seen. Atrophy of the retina and nerve follow. 
 Embolus of a branch of the central artery of the retina is 
 occasionally found, and the part of the retina nourished 
 by the affected vessel, becomes opaque, the veins dilated, 
 and localized hemorrhages, which appear as dark red 
 blotches, with flame-like marginal serrations, occur. Vision 
 is lost in the section of the field governed by the diseased 
 retina. 
 
 Embolus is caused by hypertrophy and valvular disease 
 of the heart, atheroma, pregnancy, and Bright's disease. 
 
 Treatment is of no avail. 
 
 The pathological changes of retinitis are modified by the 
 cause, nature and tissue limitations of the process. The 
 inflammation may be limited to the retina, or involve the 
 optic nerve, papilla and choroid. 
 
 In oedema, the fibre and nerve layer of the retina is infil- 
 trated by serum, which separates its elements into spaces 
 of varying size. The fibres are compressed, opaque, gran- 
 ular, and swollen. The entire retina may be affected. 
 
 In hemorrhagic retinitis, the blood primarily escapes into 
 the nerve-fibre layer or immediately below it, and thence into 
 the other layers, destroying the elements by compression. 
 The interstitial coagula may extend forward into the vit- 
 reous. The blood-cells break up finally, and the portion 
 not absorbed is changed into lymph corpuscles, which form 
 whitish or yellowish plaques. In extensive hemorrhage, 
 the retinal pigment is disturbed and a pigmented cicatrix 
 formed. Small hemorrhages may be, and frequently are, 
 entirely absorbed. 
 
 HEMORRHAGE OF THE RETINA is a single, or multiple 
 effusion of blood. It occurs, without preceding inflamma- 
 tion, as the result of a blow, high myopia, choroidal disc 
 or as a symptom of some functional or organic disturbance
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 175 
 
 in other situations of the body. The exuded blood collects 
 in one or more spaces, which are separated, one from 
 the other, by compressed retinal tissue, and undergoes 
 partial or complete absorption. The unabsorbed portion 
 of the blood is formed into collections of lymph-cells, with 
 alterations in the underlying pigment. Retinal hemorrhage 
 is easily recognized by the ophthalmoscope as flame-shaped, 
 or round, dark-red spots in the neighborhood of the disc or 
 fovea. The presence of non-traumatic hemorrhage into the 
 retina, is indicative of some grave disorder in other parts 
 of the system diabetes, or atheroma of the vessels, for 
 instance. 
 
 OPAQUE NERVE FIBRES is a shiny, white and irregu- 
 larly band-shaped opacity, a continuation forward into the 
 fibre layer of the retina, of the white substance of Schwann, 
 which normally stops at the scleral opening. It is phy- 
 siological, and its only effect on vision is to increase the 
 size of the blind spot. 
 
 INFLAMMATORY DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 
 HEMORRHAGIC RETINITIS. In this affection, the most 
 prominent ophthalmoscopic symptom is extravasations of 
 blood in the retina. The hemorrhagic areas are minute 
 and numerous, scattered here and there throughout the 
 fundus, and are, as a rule, in close proximity to the larger 
 arteries. Spots of hemorrhage also appear on and in the 
 immediate neighborhood of the swollen disc. The retina is 
 opaque from oedema, the veins large, dark and tortuous, the 
 arteries are conversely small, some of them appearing as 
 white lines devoid of blood. The disc is hyperaemic, its 
 outlines obscured by exudation, and small parallel fine 
 stripes, hypertrophied nerve fibres, radiate from it into the 
 retina. Yellow, or whitish round patches (old hemorrhages,
 
 1/6 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 fatty degeneration, or choroidal exudation) are seen in 
 the retina. The vitreous is partly opaque from hemorrhages 
 into its substance from the choroid or retina. 
 
 The retinitis may be considered either as the cause of the 
 extravasation, as in neuro-retinitis from cerebral tumor, or 
 as a result of it. In the latter case, the hemorrhagic spots arc- 
 not so numerous, and are limited, moreover, to the retinal 
 section in which an infarction or embolus has occurred, or 
 exclusively to the region of the macula. 
 
 The effect on vision, depends largely on the extent and 
 site of the hemorrhage, and on the proportion of nerve and 
 retinal tissue destroyed. Examination will reveal one or 
 more scotomata, central or peripheral, with diminution of 
 central vision from oedema of the retina and vitreous opa- 
 cities. The disease may involve one or both eyes. 
 
 Treatment must be determined by the cause. Rest, 
 leeching, and counter-irritation are indicated locally. 
 
 ALBUMINURIC RETINITIS (Fig. 75). The retina in this 
 disease, is the seat of pathological changes. The papilla 
 is oedematous and swollen, the surrounding retina oedema- 
 tous, and slightly detached. The rods and cones arc 
 partly destroyed. The nerve- fib re layer is infiltrated with 
 exudation. The fibres are hypertrophied, sclerosed, or 
 transformed at intervals along their course into granules 
 and fat cells, especially marked in the region of the macula. 
 The vascular walls are thickened, and the lumen of the ves- 
 sels contracted. Hemorrhages occur in the fibre and 
 granular layers. 
 
 Ophthalmoscopic examination reveals a hyperaemic and 
 swollen disc, the outlines of which are lost, parallel white 
 lines or stripes running into the retina, swollen veins, normal 
 arteries, small hemorrhages in the neighborhood of the disc, 
 round, white, small isolated patches of granular and fat cells,
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 
 
 177 
 
 and a stellate series of bright, glistening stripes of hypertro- 
 phied and infiltrated fibres, which radiate from the macula. 
 From these appearances, the diagnosis of kidney disease is 
 easily made. 
 
 The disturbance of vision is not so great as the appear- 
 ances thus revealed might lead one to suppose. The acuity 
 
 FIG. 75. 
 
 RETINITIS ALBUMINURICA. 
 
 of central vision is moderately reduced, but there is no limi- 
 tation of the field, no scotoma, nor loss of color perception. 
 The retinal changes occur, as a rule, late in the course of 
 the disease, are chronic in character, and involve both eyes. 
 They vary with the intensity of the kidney affection. If 
 the nephritic inflammation is relieved, the eye lesions may 
 16
 
 1/8 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 entirely disappear. Ordinarily, however, the diagnosis is 
 grave. 
 
 Treatment is general and symptomatic. 
 
 Retinal hemorrhages, hemorrhagic retinitis with plaques 
 of white degeneration, paleness of the disc, distended and tor- 
 tuous veins, and vitreous opacities, are frequently observed 
 as localized expressions, in many of the severer blood 
 affections, such as leucocythemia, pernicious anaemia, and 
 in diabetes insipidus and mellitus. Treatment should be 
 directed, as in albuminuric retinitis, to the primary dis- 
 ease. To promote absorption of the hemorrhage, iodide of 
 potassium in small doses is recommended. 
 
 DIFFUSE CHRONIC RETINITIS is pathologically character- 
 ized by an infiltration of the retina, the inner layers more 
 especially, with lymph cells, numerous along the vascular 
 areas, followed by the growth of interstitial connective tis- 
 sue. The nerve fibre and molecular layers, thickened and 
 permeated in spots by retinal pigment, finally atrophy, 
 destroying in part the rods and cones. The choroid, in the 
 majority of cases, participates in the morbid process as ;i 
 disseminated choroiditis, and the optic nerve is swollen 
 from infiltration of solid and fluid exudation. 
 
 By the ophthalmoscope the papilla is seen to be hyper- 
 aemic, the edge of the disc indistinct, the choroidal rin^ 
 veiled by oedema, the retina around the disc opaque, the 
 opacity fading peripherally to the normal reflex, the arteries 
 reduced in calibre, the veins distended, and all vessels more 
 or less veiled in the neighborhood of the disc by the retinal 
 opacity, which is more marked in this situation. The 
 fluid vitreous is filled with fine, dust-like opacities, which 
 float in clouds, or appear as dense and large membranes. 
 Circular patches of atrophied choroid, surrounded by 
 pigment, are frequently found near the periphery. Corneal
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 179 
 
 opacities and the marks of an old iritis, are sometimes 
 observed. 
 
 Symptoms. Diminished central vision, particularly in 
 dull light, floating clouds or spots, photopsia, metamorphop- 
 sia, slight limitation of the field peripherally, deficient color 
 sense in the late stages, and, frequently, scotomata. Diffuse 
 chronic retinitis may be either monocular or binocular, is 
 chronic in its course, liable to relapses, and ends, unless 
 treated energetically, in atrophy of the optic nerve and 
 retina. 
 
 Tertiary and congenital syphilis, chronic choroiditis, 
 and sympathetic inflammation, are among the common 
 causes of the disease, which may, however, arise idio- 
 pathically. 
 
 Treatment consists in local blood-letting, counter-irrita- 
 tion and mercurial inunctions, carried to the point of sali- 
 vation, and in the liberal exhibition of the iodides. 
 
 RETINITIS PIGMENTOSA (Fig. 76) is chronic in its mani- 
 festations. Gradually the nervous elements of the optic 
 nerve and retina atrophy. The layers of the retina, which 
 is involved in its entire thickness, are infiltrated with pig- 
 ment, which collects in great abundance in the fibre layer, 
 and especially along the blood-vessels at their bifurca- 
 tions. Cystic degeneration occurs in places with complete 
 destruction of the rods and cones. The vascular walls, 
 arterial and venous, are thickened and their lumen so dimin- 
 ished that they appear peripherally as white lines or fibrous 
 cords. The optic nerve is finally completely atrophied. 
 
 Symptoms. Central and peripheric vision'slowly declines 
 until the perception of light is lost, the field contracting 
 concentrically, central vision being retained to the last. 
 Night blindness (hemeralopia) is one of the earliest symp- 
 toms of which the patient complains. Pigment spots of
 
 I SO A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 curious shape, not unlike bone corpuscles, more numerous 
 peripherally than around the disc, are revealed by the oph- 
 thalmoscope. These spots are greatest in number at the 
 bifurcation of the larger vessels. The disc is white, the 
 arteries and veins reduced in number, size and calibre. 
 
 FIG. 76. 
 
 RETINITIS PIGMENTOSA. 
 
 and are accompanied by white lines. The light column is 
 very fine, or altogether lost. 
 
 The disease, usually developed in young persons, is 
 hereditary, a frequent taint in the offsprings of consanguin- 
 eous marriage, continues through a long course of years, 
 and affects both eyes.
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA.. l8l 
 
 Treatment is of very little value ; electricity and "strych- 
 nine may, however, retard its course, and should be em- 
 ployed. 
 
 DETACHMENT OF THE RETINA (Fig. 77) is a separation 
 from the choroid of all except its pigment layer. The 
 detachment may be confined to a small area, or include 
 the entire retina from the optic nerve to the ora serrata. It is 
 caused by the sudden or gradual discharge of fluid from 
 the choroidal vessels, the exudation of solid inflammatory 
 new formations, the development of choroidal tumors, or 
 
 FIG. 77. 
 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPIC APPEARANCE OF DETACHED RETINA (ERECT IMAGE). 
 <* After Wecker and Jaeger. 
 
 by contraction of the connective tissue elements of the 
 retina. The detached retina floating forward in the vitreous 
 is not at first appreciably changed from the normal, but it 
 eventually becomes degenerated, thickened and opaque, 
 from a diffuse hyperplasia and consequent atrophy of its 
 nervous elements. The subretinal fluid is thin, yellowish in 
 color, and contains fat, lymph, blood-cells, and cholesterin. 
 The fluid may be altogether sanguineous. The vitreous is 
 opaque, partly fluid, and partly transformed into connective 
 tissue. Tension is diminished. 
 
 Symptoms. There is a sudden loss of a part of the visual
 
 1 82 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 field, the position and extent of which corresponds to the 
 position and extent of the retinal detachment. CentraJ 
 vision is deteriorated, objects distorted or only seen in 
 part, and black opacities float in the visual field. As the 
 fluid changes its position, gradually subsiding to the most 
 dependent portion of the fundus, the blindness correspond- 
 ingly alters. A portion of the field is usually retained for 
 a long period of time, but is eventually, and gradually, 
 lost through cataractous formation, or other degenerative 
 changes. 
 
 The ophthalmoscope shows a blue-white or gray reflex, 
 much nearer the observer's eye than the bright red reflex of 
 the healthy fundus surrounding it. The detached retina, 
 which is seen most clearly with a strong convex glass (20 u ), 
 floats in wavy undulations, and, adhering to its uneven sur- 
 face dark lines, vessels from which the central bright line of 
 reflex has disappeared, are seen. Floating vitreous opacities 
 are invariably present. 
 
 Detachment of the retina is caused by traumatism, high 
 myopia with posterior staphyloma, tumors, hemorrhage, 
 cysticercus, and, perhaps, by uncorrected presbyopia. The 
 prognosis is unfavorable, although in a small proportion 
 of cases, the retina returns to its normal position under 
 treatment. 
 
 Treatment. The patient should be kept in recumbent 
 position, a pressure bandage applied over the eyes, and 
 hypodermic injections of pilocarpine, gr. ^, repeated often 
 enough to insure profuse perspiration, are administered. 
 \Yhcn the detachment is not caused by tumor, high 
 myopia, or other evident organic change, an operation by 
 which the subretinal fluid is allowed to drain off", is advis- 
 able. 
 
 ACUTE CENTRAL RETINITIS, the result of exposure to
 
 DISEASES OF THE RETINA. 183 
 
 direct sunlight, or to the reflection of the sun on snow or 
 water, is an active inflammation of the foveal region, char- 
 acterized by metamorphopsia, and central scotoma for white 
 and colors. The ophthalmoscope shows one or more white 
 spots at the fovea, circumscribed by a zone of redness, 
 which gradually shades off into the normal color of the 
 fundus. The severity of the lesion will depend upon the 
 length of time the eye has been exposed to the light. 
 Complete recovery is unusual, but amelioration of the 
 disease follows active treatment by strychnia, electricity, 
 local bleeding during the congestive stage, and protection 
 from light. 
 
 HYPER/ESTHESIA of the retina is a condition sometimes 
 found in anaemic, hysterical women, and in hypochondriacal 
 men, and gives rise to concentric, or irregular limitation 
 of the visual field, and to deterioration of central vision. 
 Lacrymation, photophobia, and blepharospasm are accom- 
 panying symptoms. The ophthalmoscope shows no evi- 
 dence of disease. Remedies should be addressed to the 
 cause, the eyes put at rest, protected from light, and the 
 system built up by tonics. 
 
 ANAESTHESIA of the retina is a rare, functional conse- 
 quence of latent muscular insufficiency with co-existing 
 ametropia. The acuity of vision, and the visual field, may 
 be at first normal, but invariably deteriorate during exam- 
 ination. The patient suffers from accommodative and muscu- 
 lar asthenopia. The treatment is to correct the error of 
 refraction by lenses, and the muscular anomaly by tenoto- 
 mies. 
 
 GLIOMA OF THE RETINA is a cancerous growth, composed 
 of softened nerve tissue infiltrated with small round cells, 
 which spring from the retina. It is of rapid development,
 
 184 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 invading the optic nerve, surrounding parts in the orbit 
 and skull, and terminates fatally in a few months. 
 
 Treatment. Extirpation of the eye-ball. The disease 
 shows a singular tendency to reappear in the second eye, or 
 in the brain. 
 
 CONTINUED EXPOSURE to bright light, or to its reflection 
 from water or snow, or to dazzling flashes of lightning, may 
 lead to structural changes in the retina near the fovea. 
 They are revealed by the ophthalmoscope as a closely 
 united collection of pale-yellow and small round spots. 
 Patients suffering from this affection, complain of metamor- 
 phopsia, and of diminished central vision or of negative 
 scotoma. It is in some cases modified by treatment, but 
 usually leaves the vision permanently crippled, the result 
 of destructive changes of the retina at the fovea. 
 
 Treatment consists in rest, and in protection of the eyes 
 from light, in small doses of potassium iodide and mercury, 
 and, locally, in blood-letting and counter-irritation.
 
 PART XIII. 
 DISEASES OF THE OPTIC NERVE. 
 
 The physiological variations of the optic nerve as seen 
 by the ophthalmoscope are numerous, and by this means 
 alone one is often unable to differentiate between them and 
 pathological conditions. The disc in health varies in 
 color ; it may be white with few vessels, or so red, from the 
 presence of fine vessels, that it differs very little from the 
 normal choroidal reflex ; it may show black points of pig- 
 ment, or be partly or wholly surrounded by a well-marked 
 pigmented ring of considerable breadth ; its surface may 
 be plane, or it may present a small excavation in its centre, 
 or nearly the entire disc may be physiologically cupped, and 
 clearly show, at its bottom, the mottled connective tissue 
 web of the lamina cribrosa. Venous pulsation may be 
 present or absent. The size and divisions of the arteries 
 and veins in health are not invariable. In many cases, all 
 areas of the visual field for white and colors, and for sco- 
 tomata, must be determined by the perimeter, and the 
 acuity of vision ascertained, to confirm the previous diag- 
 nosis by the ophthalmoscope. 
 
 OPTIC NEURITIS (Fig. 78). This affection is character- 
 ized by hyperaemia of the disc, which is heightened in color 
 from the presence of numerous small vessels, exception- 
 ally seen in the normal eye, and by an obliterative exuda- 
 tion of inflammatory products into its excavation. The clear 
 outline of the disc, thus swollen by serous and solid exuda- 
 
 185
 
 1 86 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 tion is lost, and imperceptibly fades into the retina. The 
 veins are distended and pulsate, the arteries either normal or 
 reduced in size, while both arteries and veins are, in part, 
 hidden by inflammatory exudates. The retina, in immediate 
 proximity to the nerve, is streaked, thickened, and slightly 
 opaque. In mild cases of optic neuritis, those usually classi- 
 fied as hyperaemia, the changes just cited are so slight that 
 
 Fin. 78. 
 
 it is extremely difficult to arrive at a correct diagnosis ; on 
 the other hand, they may be so considerable, as in choked 
 disc, that even the site of the nerve can be only negatively 
 determined by the blood-vessels. In the latter case, .small 
 hemorrhages on or near the disc are common. 
 
 PAPILLITIS is an inflammation limited to the intraocular 
 end of the optic nerve. The signs manifest by the ophthal-
 
 DISEASES OF THE OPTIC NERVE. l8/ 
 
 moscope, correspond to those described in optic neuritis, 
 and affect the disc and retina immediately around it. 
 
 NEURO-RETINITIS involves the retina, as well as the optic 
 nerve, as in albuminuric retinitis, and is characterized by 
 hemorrhages, patches of fatty degeneration, hypertrophy of 
 its nervous elements, and deposition of pigment. 
 
 Symptoms. Gradual failure of central vision. The vis- 
 ual field is contracted peripherally, or in sectors for white 
 and colors, and these may involve one- half the field (hemi- 
 anopsia). Central color scotoma is an occasional symptom. 
 There is an absence of pain. 
 
 In optic neuritis there is an exudation of serous and 
 plastic material in and about the papilla, perivasculitis, 
 formation of new blood-vessels, swelling of the nerve 
 fibres, and cedema of the optic sheath just behind the 
 sclera. At a later stage of the morbid process, the inter- 
 cellular infiltration is transformed into connective tissue 
 which, by pressure, cuts off the supply of blood to the nerve 
 fibres, causing them to atrophy, or to undergo fatty degen- 
 eration. 
 
 Among the numerous causes of optic neuritis may be 
 mentioned brain and orbital tumors, injuries to the skull, 
 simple and tubercular meningitis, erysipelas, periostitis, 
 anaemia, diabetes, Bright's disease, diphtheria, scarlet and 
 typhoid fever, measles, etc. 
 
 Optic neuritis due to incurable constitutional or orbital 
 disease, ends in total atrophy of the nerve fibres, in the 
 course of a few months or years. When due to syphilitic 
 tumors, or other curable affections, local or systemic, the 
 optic neuritis slowly subsides under treatment, and vision 
 may be completely restored. More frequently, however, 
 the disease is only checked, the vision being permanently 
 impaired.
 
 1 88 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 Treatment should be actively and persistently carried on. 
 The underlying cause, whatever it may be, should be ascer- 
 tained and the remedies best suited to its relief or cure, 
 administered. Potassium iodide and mercury, local and 
 general bloodletting, and, in acute cases, profuse diaphoresis 
 should, as a rule, be employed independently of the cause. 
 
 RETRO-BULBAR OPTIC NEURITIS is manifested in two 
 forms, acute and chronic. Acute retro-bulbar optic neuritis 
 is caused by exposure to cold, sudden cessation of the men- 
 strual flux, and other causes which lead to a sudden serous 
 exudation into the vaginal sheath of the optic nerve. Total 
 blindness follows in a few days, the result of pressure on the 
 blood-vessels and consequent functional inactivity of the 
 nerve fibres. The ophthalmoscope reveals a papillitis of 
 moderate severity. The disease, if seen in time, yields to 
 energetic and well-directed medication, that is to say, to 
 general blood-letting, salivation, and active diaphoresis. 
 
 Chronic retro-bulbar optic neuritis, is an interstitial 
 inflammation affecting, primarily, the axial fibres, and, 
 secondarily, all fibres of the optic nerve. There is an hyper- 
 trophy of the connective tissue fibres, followed by atrophy 
 of the nerve. The ophthalmoscope shows a dull, slightly 
 hyperaemic and foggy papilla, the outline of which is in 
 places obscured. The veins are enlarged and the arteries 
 diminished in size. 
 
 The symptoms are slowly diminishing central vision ; cen- 
 tral color perception and, later, perception for white, is lost. 
 The patient's single complaint is loss of vision ; no pain or 
 headache is experienced. Its most common cause, is the 
 excessive use of tobacco and alcohol, one or both. Other 
 toxic agents, such as quinine, lead, and syphilis, cause 
 this form of the disease. 
 
 Treatment. In tobacco and alcohol amblyopia the causa-
 
 DISEASES OF THE OPTIC NERVE. 
 
 189 
 
 tive agents must be abandoned in toto, and strychnine 
 hypodermatically administered in increasing doses. This 
 treatment will in most cases greatly relieve, or altogether 
 cure, if the disease has not advanced to atrophy. Elec- 
 tricity is also indicated in these cases. If syphilis is the 
 cause, iodide of potassium and mercury are the most effect- 
 ive remedies. 
 
 ATROPHY OF THE OPTIC NERVE (Fig 79). Atrophy of 
 
 FIG. 79. 
 
 ATROPHIC EXCAVATION. 
 
 the optic nerve fibres is the result of an increase in the in- 
 terstitial connective tissue in the intra-ocular extremity 
 alone, or in the nerve stem from the chiasm to the ball. It 
 is primary when the result of a neuritis, and secondary when 
 the deep origin of the nerve is destroyed, or when the retina 
 is the site of the original lesion. Atrophy of the intra-ocular 
 extremity of the nerve is the result of disease of the nerve, 
 papilla, or of the retina.
 
 I9O A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 Causes. I. Mechanical pressure from tumors, orbital 
 cellulitis, meningitis, inflammatory exudates, traumatism, 
 and in hydrocephalus. 2. Embolus in the central retinal 
 artery, which cuts off the blood supply, and in this way 
 starves the nerve. 3. Traumatic or surgical section of the 
 nerve. 4. Disease of nerve at its periphery, the retina, or 
 at its origin in the optic thalami and neighboring basal 
 ganglia. 5. Gray degeneration of the optic nerve, the final 
 stage of neuritis medullaris, in which the fibres undergo 
 softening and destruction in one or more bundles. 6. Sim- 
 ple atrophy of the nerve trunk, and its intra-ocular end 
 as a part of a similar process in the brain and spinal cord. 
 This form is frequently associated with tabes dorsalis and 
 cerebral sclerosis. 
 
 OPHTHALMOSCOPIC APPEARANCES vary with the cause of 
 the atrophy. The disc, in atrophy following papillitis, is in- 
 creased in size, and the lamina cribrosa and its outline are 
 more orl*ss obliterated by exudation in its tissue as well as 
 in the surrounding retina. The arterial walls are thickened 
 and their lumen lessened ; the veins may be distended and 
 tortuous, normal, or reduced in size, and marks of old hem- 
 orrhages, and of pigment changes, are discernible around 
 the disc. The disc, following interstitial and medullary 
 neuritis, is discolored, its edges and centre appear veiled, 
 and the arteries and veins, particularly the former, are 
 small. There are no evidences of gross lesions. The 
 disc in simple or progressive atrophy of the optic nerve, 
 is of a dead or bluish-white, sharply outlined against the 
 red reflex from the choroid. The lamina cribrosa is 
 distinctly visible, the nerve cupped, arteries reduced to 
 white threads without any appearance of capillary dis- 
 tribution, the veins more numerous and distinct than 
 the arteries, but not so large or numerous as in health.
 
 DISEASES OF THE OPTIC NERVE. 19! 
 
 The symptoms are gradual diminution in the acuity of 
 vision, concentric limitation of the visual field for white and 
 colors, loss of sectors of the field, central white and color 
 scotoma, and hemianopsia. Both eyes are usually involved, 
 the disease advancing equally in the two eyes, or more rap- 
 idly in one than in the other. 
 
 Treatment. Iodide of potassium, oxide of silver, bichlo- 
 ride of mercury and electricity. 
 
 TOBACCO AND ALCOHOL AMBLYOPIA. In this disease, 
 which occurs so frequently and is so amenable to treatment 
 that it would seem to demand separate mention, the con- 
 nective tissue binding together the bundles of nerve fibres 
 becomes hypertrophied, and the nerve fibres themselves un- 
 dergo fatty degeneration late in the course of the disease, 
 either from pressure, or from the direct action of the toxic 
 agents. The structural changes in the optic nerve trunk in 
 case of simple tobacco amblyopia are not easily determined, 
 because persons addicted to the excessive use of tobacco 
 are, in a very great majority of cases, also intemperate in the 
 use of alcohol. The symptoms and ophthalmoscopic appear- 
 ances are, however, identical, whether the cause be single or 
 dual. These changes manifest themselves in a slow deteriora- 
 tion of vision with central color scotoma, the peripheric field 
 of vision for white and colors remaining unchanged until 
 late in the progress of the disease, or until atrophic changes 
 are well marked in the optic nerve. The disc is either 
 normal or slightly hyperaemic, and its outline indistinct, 
 at least in part. Later in the course of the disease, the disc 
 presents the aspect of atrophy which follows a retro-bulbar 
 neuritis, so that it is discolored and comparatively free from 
 vascularity. 
 
 Unless the disease has progressed to atrophy of the optic 
 nerve when seen, the prognosis is good, provided the
 
 IQ2 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 patient can abstain altogether from the use of tobacco and 
 alcohol. Total abstinence from the use of alcohol and 
 tobacco is a prerequisite to treatment, which consists, 
 medicinally, in the use of strychnine. This agent should 
 be gradually increased until maximum doses, the fifth of a 
 grain three times daily, are reached. Local extraction of 
 blood is valuable in patients who are not anaemic. Men 
 are more frequently affected than women, and both eyes 
 are usually, and equally, affected. 
 
 HEMIANOPSIA is the condition in which one-half of the 
 field of vision is lost. It is bilateral when the temporal 
 half of one and the nasal half of the other eye is lost; bi- 
 tcinporal when the temporal, binasal when the nasal halves 
 of the field are lost, and vertical when the dividing line is 
 horizontal and the upper or lower field is wanting. The 
 dividing line, vertical or horizontal, rarely passes through 
 the point of fixation, but makes a small curve around it, 
 thus showing that the fovea is functionating. Other sec- 
 tions, corresponding in each eye, may be obliterated. The 
 ophthalmoscope reveals nothing abnormal, excepting 
 atrophy of the optic nerve in the late stages of the disease. 
 
 Hemian )psia is caused by pressure (tumor) upon half the 
 chiasm, optic tract, or deep origin of the nerve, or destruc- 
 tion of these parts from other organic changes.
 
 PART XIV. 
 DISEASES OF THE ORBITAL CAVITY. 
 
 PERIOSTITIS. The periosteal lining of the bony walls of 
 the orbital cavity is sometimes the seat of inflammation of a 
 chronic character, usually limited to a small area. The 
 inflammatory process may, however, be so extensive as to 
 involve the periosteum lining the frontal sinuses and the 
 antrum of Highmore, and so protracted as to lead to ex- 
 tensive necrosis of the underlying bones. It is usually 
 found as a local indication of syphilitic, or tuberculous 
 disease. The local, as well as the constitutional, treatment 
 is the same as for periostitis in other situations. The affec- 
 tion rarely involves the eyeball. 
 
 PHLEGMON OR ABSCESS. From injury, thrombosis, ery- 
 sipelas, etc., the supporting fat and loose connective tissue 
 of the orbital cavity may become acutely inflamed. It is a 
 purulent inflammation, characterized by marked oedema 
 and increased tension of the conjunctiva and lids, which are 
 distended forward, and by fixation of the eyeball in a 
 straight or deviating position, and consequent double 
 vision. It is an acutely painful affection, and should be 
 relieved by free incisions, repeated if necessary, drainage, 
 and by antiseptic dressings. 
 
 TUMORS OF THE ORBIT. Cystic tumors, degeneration 
 of the lacrymal gland, and various other forms of benign 
 and malignant growths, are not uncommonly met with 
 in this situation. They are easy of diagnosis. The treat- 
 ment is by removal. 
 
 i7 193
 
 194 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 EXOPHTHALMUS is a bulging forward of one or both eye- 
 balls. The protrusion of one eye is likely to be the result 
 of local cause (abscess, injury, aneurism, etc.), and should 
 be treated accordingly. Protrusion of both eyeballs is, on 
 the other hand, likely to be the result of a remote or sys- 
 temic cause, such as hypertrophy of the thyroid gland, or 
 of the heart, and, under these conditions, local treatment is 
 of no avail. 
 
 ENOPHTHALMUS is a sinking backward, or retraction in 
 the orbital cavity, of one or both eyeballs. In senile 
 enophthalmus, which is due to the gradual absorption of 
 the orbital fat in old persons, both eyes are affected to the 
 same degree. When one eye is retracted from trauma- 
 tism, involving a fracture of the walls of the orbit, the result- 
 ing inflammation is severe, an abscess forms, the eyeball 
 becomes immovable, and atrophy! of the optic nerve is 
 the ultimate consequence.
 
 PART XV. 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 Such portions of the surgeon's person as are likely to 
 come in contact with the patient, as well as the instruments 
 and parts to be operated on, should be free from infection. 
 To this end, the operator's hands should be thoroughly 
 scrubbed with soap and hot water, and then bathed in a 
 1-5000 solution of the bichloride of mercury. Great care 
 must be exercised, too, to render aseptic the conjunctival 
 sac, the under surface of the lids, eyelashes and neigh- 
 boring parts of the patient's face. The instruments should 
 be disinfected by a 15000 solution of the bichloride of 
 mercury, or, better still, by a saturated solution of boric 
 acid. In the minor operations, as for squint, pterygium, 
 etc., these prophylactic measures against micro-organisms, 
 may be considered as complete when the operator's hands 
 and instruments, and the patient's eye, have been suitably 
 cleansed. Any coincident disease of the eye of an inflam- 
 matory character should receive the necessary attention, 
 and the general system put in the best possible condition, 
 before the eye is invaded by the surgeon's knife in the 
 graver operations. 
 
 The eye is sufficiently anaesthetized by four or five 
 instillations, at intervals of five minutes, of a four per 
 cent, solution of the hydrochlorate of cocaine, to render 
 all operations, except enucleation, painless. For plastic 
 
 195
 
 196 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 operations on the lids, and for enucleation, ether should 
 be employed. 
 
 CATARACT EXTRACTION WITH IRIDECTOMY. The patient 
 
 FIG. 80. 
 
 LID SPECULUM. 
 
 is placed in a recumbent position, face up, and the eye to be 
 operated on suitably illuminated. The speculum (Fig. 80) 
 is then inserted or the upper lid elevated by an assistant, the 
 
 FIG. 81. 
 
 FIXATION FORCEPS. 
 
 conjunctiva of the ball grasped a few mm. below the ex- 
 tremity of the vertical meridian of the cornea, and gently 
 but firmly held by fixation forceps (Fig. 81). I. A cut is 
 
 FIG. 82. 
 
 rafWAli Co. PH/LA. 
 
 GRAEFE CATARACT KNIFE. 
 
 made through the cornea with a Graefe knife (Fig. 82), which 
 is entered at the corneal margin just above its horizontal 
 diameter, and a counter-puncture made exactly opposite by 
 passing the knife through the anterior chamber in front of the
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 197 
 
 pupil. By a sawing movement of the knife with its cutting 
 edge upward, the corneo-scleral border is divided in its up- 
 per two-fifths. When the cut is finished, the fixation forceps 
 should be removed, at least temporarily. 2. A portion of 
 the iris, is removed (iridectomy). When the patient is 
 tractable, the iridectomy should be made without fixation. 
 
 FIG. 8- 
 
 A YARNALL CO. PHILA 
 
 IRIS FORCEPS. 
 
 The patient is directed to look downward and to keep the 
 eye perfectly stiH. The iris forceps (Fig. 83) are intro- 
 duced, closed, through the centre of the incision previously 
 made, and then opened in order to grasp a portion of the 
 iris, near its pupillary border, which is slowly withdrawn 
 and cut off at its periphery. To excise a large piece, as in 
 
 FIG. 84. 
 
 IRIDECTOMY SCISSORS. 
 
 the operation for glaucoma, the blades of the iris scissors 
 should be held at right angles to the vertical meridian of 
 the cornea and more than one clip made, but in the operation 
 for cataract, they should be held in the plane of the vertical 
 meridian, as only a small section of the iris is to be re- 
 moved. 3. The anterior capsule of the lens is lacerated
 
 198 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 (capsulotomy). A cystotome (Fig. 85) is introduced 
 through the incision as far as the lower pupillary margin 
 with its cutting point directed upward ; one quarter revo- 
 
 FIG. 85. 
 
 FA. YARNALL CO. PHILA. 
 
 CYSTOTOME. 
 
 lution of the handle is then made, turning the point back- 
 ward, and the capsule lacerated vertically and horizontally. 
 Another quarter revolution of the handle is made, and the 
 
 FIG. 86. 
 
 EXPULSION OF THE CATARACT. 
 
 instrument withdrawn with its point downward. The quar- 
 ter revolutions prevent entanglement of the instrument in 
 the iris and cornea on entering and withdrawing it. 4. The 
 
 FIG. 87. 
 
 GRAEFE CATARACT SPOON AND CYSTOTOME. 
 
 lens (Fig. 86) is extruded through the lacerated capsule, 
 artificial pupil and corneal cut, by gentle and sustained 
 pressure with the Graefe spoon (Fig. 87), or with the
 
 OPERATIONS. 199 
 
 finger, on the inferior portion of the cornea and adjoining 
 sclera, assisted by counter-pressure on the sclera above 
 the cut. 5. The anterior chamber is freed from blood, and 
 remaining cortical matter, by massage with the spoon, or by 
 gentle injection of warm distilled water, or, better, by a 
 solution of boric acid, gr. v-Sj. This may be done by 
 means of an ordinary glass dropper, or by a syringe 
 specially devised for the purpose. 
 
 A small pad of absorbent cotton anointed with vaseline, 
 is applied over the closed lids of both eyes, taking care 
 that the lashes of the lower lids are not inverted, and held 
 in position by a roll of flannel bandage, or, preferably, by 
 a piece of loose worsted knitted for the purpose. This 
 dressing should remain undisturbed for twenty-four hours. 
 At the expiration of that time, it should be removed, the 
 eye bathed with a 1-5000 solution of the bichloride of 
 mercury, or with a saturated solution of boric acid, and 
 the lower lid everted to permit the escape of tears which 
 may have collected. The eyes are again dressed, as on 
 the preceding day, and the dressing allowed to remain for 
 another period of twenty-four hours, when the treatment is 
 repeated. On the third day after the operation, the eye 
 not operated on may be left unbandaged. On the fifth day, 
 the cut may be inspected. Up to the fifth day, the patient 
 should remain in bed, resting on the back as much as pos- 
 sible. This plan of treatment should be closely followed 
 in cases that run a normal course. If, however, severe 
 pain in the eye, or in the adjoining parts, develops, indicat- 
 ing iritis, or if a discharge of mucus or pus is noticed on the 
 cotton when the dressing is changed, the eye must be ex- 
 amined, and appropriate remedies applied, such as atropine 
 instillations, the constant application of a saturated solution 
 of boric acid by means of absorbent cotton, and leeches
 
 2OO A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 applied to the temple, together with the internal adminis- 
 tration of potassium iodide and mercury. 
 
 In this operation, certain complications are likely to arise. 
 First, the corneal cut may not be sufficiently large to admit 
 of the easy escape of the lens ; second, if there is prolapse 
 of the iris in the corners of the wound, it must be replaced 
 by gentle manipulation ; third, if the view of the pupil is 
 
 FIG. 88. 
 
 WIRE LOOP. 
 
 obstructed by a collection of blood in the anterior chamber, 
 it should be expelled through the open wound by gentle 
 and repeated upward pressure on the cornea with the 
 spoon ; fourth, if the capsulotomy is too small to admit of 
 the passage of the lens, the cystotome should be reintro- 
 duced and a more complete division of the capsule made ; 
 fifth, if a bead of vitreous presents at the corneal incision 
 
 FIG. 89. 
 
 LENS EXTRACTOR. 
 
 before the extraction of the lens, the speculum must be 
 withdrawn, and the lens removed by means of the loop or 
 extractor (Figs. 88 and 89). 
 
 CATARACT EXTRACTION WITHOUT IRIDECTOMY. A Graefe 
 knife is used, and the incision includes five-twelfths of the 
 corneo-scleral margin. The cut is made through the cornea 
 at its junction with the sclera, and a conjunctival flap avoided.
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 2O I 
 
 An extensive division of the lens capsule is next made with 
 a Knapp knife, especially designed for that purpose, which 
 is passed under the iris vertically and horizontally, and after 
 division of the capsule slow, steady, and continuous pressure 
 with the spoon on the lowest part of the cornea expels the 
 lens. If the iris prolapses, it must be replaced. Eserine, 
 gr. j 5J, is dropped into the eye, which is otherwise treated 
 as in the preceding modified Graefe operation, before it is 
 
 bandaged. 
 
 FIG. 90. 
 
 DlSCISSION. 
 
 This operation is both difficult and dangerous. The 
 advantages claimed for it are the avordance of iritis, which 
 sometimes follows iridectomy, the round pupil, and better 
 vision. The dangers to be considered are a prolapse of the 
 iris, and a difficult technique, especially in the performance 
 of the capsulotomy. 
 
 SOFT CATARACT. Discission (Fig. 90) is the generally 
 accepted operation for soft cataract. A stop needle (Fig. 
 18
 
 202 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 91) is passed through the anaesthetized cornea into the 
 dilated pupil, the capsule freely divided and the lens broken 
 up by gentle movements of the needle point in its substance. 
 The moderate reaction which follows this operation is 
 controlled by frequent instillations of atropine, gr. viij-5J. 
 If the reaction is severe, the lens greatly swollen and the iris 
 
 FIG. 91. 
 
 SOFT CATARACT NEEDLE. 
 
 bellied forward with large sections of the lens floating in 
 the anterior chamber, an incision with the Graefe or iri- 
 dectomy knife should be made through the cornea, and the 
 offending masses gently pressed out (Fig. 92). 
 
 IRIDECTOMY is performed (Fig. 93) in glaucoma to lessen 
 tension and to establish drainage from the eye, in cataract 
 
 FIG. 92. 
 
 extraction, lamellar cataract, in the removal of foreign bodies 
 from the anterior chamber, in complete annular synechia::, 
 and for optical purposes. The eye to be operated on, is held 
 as in the operation for cataract extraction, and an incision 
 made with the lance knife (Fig. 93) in the corneo-scleral 
 border. The point of the knife is passed into the anterior
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 203 
 
 chamber, in front of and parallel with the plane of the iris, to 
 the necessary depth. In withdrawing the knife, its handle is 
 tilted backward to prevent too rapid escape of the aqueous 
 
 FIG. 93. 
 
 LINEAR INCISION AT THE SUPERIOR MARGIN OF THE CORNEA. 
 
 FIG. 94. 
 
 C.A. YARN ALL CO. PHILft. 
 
 IRIDECTOMY KNIFE. 
 
 humor and prolapse of the iris. The next step, without 
 fixation when possible, is to introduce the forceps and grasp 
 the iris, which is then withdrawn and excised in the manner
 
 2O4 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 already described in the operation for cataract. Finally, 
 the angles of the pupil should be replaced, and the margins 
 of the wound carefully approximated. The eye should be 
 dressed as described in the operation for cataract extrac- 
 tion. At the expiration of twenty-four hours the wound 
 
 FIG. 95. 
 
 ARTIFICIAL PUPIL AS SEEN IN ANTERIOR CHAMBER AFTER IRIDECTOMY. 
 
 will have healed with re-establishment of the anterior cham- 
 ber. The bandage may be discarded in three days and a 
 shade substituted. 
 
 IRIDOTOMY or IRITOMY is necessary when the pupil, as a 
 result of traumatism or cataract extraction, is occluded by 
 
 FIG. 96. 
 
 IRIDOTOMY KNIFE. 
 
 thickened and opaque capsule with inflammatory exuda- 
 tions from the iris. A needle-knife (Fig. 96) with double 
 cutting edge, so constructed that its shank completely fills 
 the corneal wound, thus preventing the escape of the aque- 
 ous, is thrust through the cornea midway between its centre
 
 OPERATIONS. 2O5 
 
 and periphery and into the occluding membrane, which 
 is divided at right angles to the line of greatest tension. 
 Scissors (Fig. 97) devised by De Wecker are sometimes suc- 
 cessfully used in this operation. With the lance knife, a small 
 wound is made between the centre and circumference of the 
 cornea, the blade is then slowly withdrawn half way, allowing 
 the aqueous, which carries the iris forward with it, to partly 
 
 FIG. 97. 
 
 DE WECKER'S IRITOMY SCISSORS. 
 
 escape. The knife is then thrust through the iris and with- 
 drawn. De Wecker's scissors are entered closed, opened in 
 the anterior chamber, and one blade passed through the cut 
 in the iris. Both blades are made to meet through the iris, 
 thus elongating the incision made by the knife. 
 
 PARACENTESIS CORNEA consists in perforating the cornea 
 with a small, double-edge knife (Fig. 98). The object of 
 
 FIG. 98. 
 
 A.YARNflU CO. PH. 
 
 PARACENTESIS KNIFE. 
 
 the operation is to reduce intra-ocular pressure by empty- 
 ing the anterior chamber. 
 
 S.EMISCH INCISION is sometimes resorted to for the pur- 
 pose of obviating the worst effects of corneal abscess. The 
 clear cornea immediately surrounding the abscess is pene- 
 trated by a Graefe knife, which is passed through the
 
 206 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 anterior chamber to a corresponding point in the clear 
 cornea on the distal side of the abscess, dividing it in its 
 long diameter. This procedure drains the abscess and 
 union is promoted by the expulsion of the pus. 
 
 CONICAL CORNEA. The operation for this condition, con- 
 sists in excision of the cone, wholly or in part, by a Graefe 
 knife, and bringing the divided edges together by sutures. 
 Exceedingly fine needles armed by a single strand of silk are 
 
 FIG. 99. 
 
 NEEDLES IN POSITION. 
 
 necessarily used in thus suturing the edges of the wound. 
 The resulting cicatrix is, perhaps, less detrimental to vision 
 than the previously existing cone. 
 
 STAPHYLOMA OF CORNEA AND SCLERA (Figs. 99, 100, 
 101). Critchett's operation is to be preferred toenucleation 
 in children, as the parts of the ball remaining in the orbit 
 will prevent unsymmetrical development of the bones of the
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 207 
 
 FIG. 100. 
 
 EXCISION OF THE STAPHYLOMA. 
 
 FIG. 10 1. 
 
 APPEARANCE OF THE STUMP AFTER EXCISION OF THE STAPHYLOMA.
 
 2O8 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 face, the invariable result of enucleation in children. The 
 operation is simple and effective. Four threaded needles 
 are inserted equi-distant and parallel with each other 
 through the base of the staphyloma, the diseased tissues 
 are then removed with a knife or scissors, the needles drawn 
 through, and each thread tied. 
 
 CORNEAL TATTOOING, which has for its object the substi- 
 tution of a black and invisible for a white and disfiguring 
 opacity of the cornea, is effected by several fine steel points 
 or -needles firmly fastened in a handle (Fig. 102). The 
 points are dipped in a solution of india ink, and the corneal 
 
 FIG. 1 02. 
 
 opacity gently punctured. If the opacity is large, several 
 sittings are necessary in order to avoid the dangerous reac- 
 tion of a prolonged, or too extensive operation. 
 
 FOREIGN BODIES. 
 
 A. In Conjunctiva. To inspect the lower cul-de-sac, the 
 patient is directed to look upward while the lower lid is 
 drawn down and away from the ball. The upper cul-de-sac 
 is revealed by inverting the upper lid, and having the 
 patient look downward. A foreign body when seen in 
 either of these situations, is easily removed by a small 
 spud, or by a pledget of cotton wound on the end of a 
 match stick. 
 
 B. /// Cornea. Before attempting to remove foreign 
 bodies in this situation, anaesthesia of the part should be 
 induced by a single instillation of a four per cent, solution
 
 OPERATIONS. 2O9 
 
 of cocaine. The body is then lifted or removed from its 
 position by a spud (Fig. 103), or other suitable instrument. 
 
 C. In Anterior Chamber. If the body is iron or steel, its 
 removal may be accomplished, through a proper opening 
 in the cornea, by means of a magnet. In the absence of a 
 magnet, or when it is ineffective, that part of the iris on 
 which the foreign body rests should be drawn out and 
 cut off. It is a dangerous and often impracticable proceed- 
 ing to attempt the extraction of a body thus placed, without 
 simultaneously performing an iridectomy. 
 
 D. In Lens. The presence of a foreign body in the 
 lens, such as a fragment of metal may be early recog- 
 nized with the ophthalmoscope or oblique illumination, by 
 its lustre. If it has passed through the lens, its path 
 
 FIG. 103. 
 
 will be marked by a streak of gray opacity. In either 
 case a cataract develops which must be, when sufficiently 
 advanced, extracted. That procedure should be selected 
 which, in case the lens contains the body, insures its extrac- 
 tion, since enucleation will, in most cases, be necessary 
 eventually, if the foreign body is dislodged into the vitreous 
 chamber. 
 
 E. In Vitreous Chamber. Extraction of the body by 
 the magnet should be attempted. Enucleation of the ball, in 
 order to prevent sympathetic involvement of the unaffected 
 eye is, however, usually necessary. 
 
 TENOTOMY (Figs. 104 and 105). The conjunctiva and 
 capsule of Tenon are grasped by forceps over the insertion 
 of the tendon, and divided at right angles to the line of its
 
 2IO A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 FIG. 104. 
 
 INCISION OF THE CONJUNCTIVA. 
 
 FIG. 105. 
 
 SECTION OF THE TENDINOUS INSERTION. 
 
 FIG. 1 06. 
 
 STRABISMUS HOOK.
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 211 
 
 attachment. A tenotomy hook (Fig. 106) is passed under the 
 tendon, which is elevated from the surrounding parts, and 
 drawn into view. The tendinous expansion of the muscle 
 at its attachment to the sclera, thus brought into view, 
 is divided by several clips with blunt-pointed scissors (Fig. 
 107). 
 
 GRADED or PARTIAL TENOTOMY consists in making an 
 incision, not exceeding 2 mm., through the conjunctiva 
 and capsule of Tenon, as described in the foregoing opera- 
 
 FIG. 107. 
 
 CONJUNCTIVAL SCISSORS. 
 
 tion for tenotomy, and passing a small hook (Stephen's) 
 under the tendon, which is carefully separated from the 
 sclera in its central attachment. The extent to which the 
 tendinous division of the muscle is carried is proportionate 
 to the effect desired. In practice, it will be found that no 
 lessening of the muscular power, as determined by prisms, 
 is obtained until the tendon is nearly, if not completely, 
 divided. In this operation, therefore, the cut through the 
 conjunctiva and capsule is smaller and the spreading, lateral 
 fibres of the tendon are not divided.
 
 212 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 ADVANCEMENT OF A TENDON. The enveloping tissues, 
 conjunctiva and capsule of Tenon, are dissected until the 
 muscle and tendon to be operated on are brought clearly 
 into view, and a needle armed with silk, not too fine, is 
 passed through the muscle at right angles to its course, and 
 carried first through the conjunctiva above and then below, 
 the cornea. The muscle is next divided in front of the 
 suture, and the thread drawn firmly and tied. The effect 
 of the operation will be increased by excising a small portion 
 of the conjunctiva and capsule, between the insertion of the 
 tendon and the cornea. The surgeon should be careful to 
 pass the needle through the capsule as well as conjunctiva, 
 otherwise the thread will in a few hours cut its way out, 
 and thus aggravate the symptoms the operation is designed 
 to relieve. The sutures should be removed on the fourth 
 or fifth day. 
 
 Tenotomies and partial tenotomies are, of course, to be 
 performed upon any of the recti muscles that may be at fault. 
 
 PTERYGIUM. The old and unsatisfactory operation of 
 abscission has been abandoned in favor of transplantation, 
 a simple and more effective method of treatment. The edges 
 of the pterygium are grasped, brought together and the 
 whole mass elevated by fixation forceps. A strabismus 
 hook is passed under the pterygium at the site of fixation 
 by rupturing the two lateral folds of adherent conjunctiva, 
 and its apex detached from the cornea by a sudden move- 
 ment or jerk of the hook in the direction of the cornea. 
 (No operation is advisable until the growth has invaded the 
 cornea.) The detached apex is transfixed by a thread 
 armed at both ends with a needle, and the two needles are 
 carried a considerable distance under the conjunctiva to a 
 point obliquely above or below the base of the growth, and 
 passed out a few mm. from each other. The threads
 
 OPERATIONS. 213 
 
 are made taut, drawing the apex of the pterygium up- 
 ward or downward under the conjunctiva, and tied. The 
 pterygium is in this way transplanted and allowed to 
 grow without subsequent disturbance to vision, or other 
 annoyance to the patient. The traumatic ulcer of the 
 cornea, made by tearing off the hypertrophied growth, 
 heals rapidly, leaving as a rule a nearly invisible opacity, 
 which may be disregarded. The thread is removed on the 
 fifth day. 
 
 ENUCLEATION. The patient is placed in recumbent posi- 
 tion, anaesthetized and the parts thoroughly disinfected. The 
 globe is exposed as much as possible by the introduction 
 of a speculum, the arms of which are held widely sepa- 
 rated. The surgeon grasps the conjunctiva adjacent to the 
 inner extremity of the horizontal diameter of the cornea, 
 and divides it circularly one or two mm. from the corneo- 
 scleral border. This incision of the conjunctiva, which 
 extends two-thirds around the circumference of the cornea, 
 is made in two equally divided cuts, the first below and 
 the second above, from the point of fixation. The separated 
 conjunctiva and capsule of Tenon are pushed back with 
 the fixation forceps or closed scissors, and the tendon of 
 the internal rectus grasped, divided posterior to the forceps, 
 and held until the operation is finished. One blade of the 
 straight conjunctival scissors is passed beneath the inferior 
 rectus and the two blades brought together, dividing the 
 muscle. The superior rectus is divided in a similar manner. 
 The enucleation scissors (Fig. 108) are now passed back- 
 ward, with the points closed and hugging the sclera until 
 the optic nerve is reached, which is then divided. The 
 ball is now easily rotated outward and as it turns every 
 tissue clinging to the sclera is divided and left in the orbit. 
 Hemorrhage is checked by pads of absorbent cotton, con-
 
 214 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 fined by a roller bandage, which is drawn tight enough to 
 exercise a moderate degree of pressure. This dressing is 
 not changed for twenty-four hours. At the expiration of 
 that time it is removed, the parts cleansed with a bichloride 
 wash, and a new dressing of a similar kind applied. The 
 bandage may be discarded on the third or fourth day, and 
 a saturated solution of boric acid given the patient with 
 instruction to bathe the orbit two or three times a day 
 until the wound is entirely healed. As a rule, an artificial 
 eye may be worn after the lapse of four weeks. 
 
 SYMBLEPHARON. If the band holding the ball and the lid 
 
 FIG. 108. 
 
 EKUCLEATION SCISSORS. 
 
 together is narrow, it may be separated by an enveloping 
 lead ligature, tightly twisted, which is allowed to cut its way 
 through. When this is accomplished the ocular extremity 
 of the adhesion is removed and the part sutured (Fig. 109). 
 When the adhesion is broad it is separated, under tension, 
 from its ocular attachment by the knife or scissors. A 
 thread armed with two needles is passed through the 
 divided end of the cicatricial tissue. The needles are 
 carried from the bottom of the cul-de-sac from within 
 outward through the lid, the thread drawn tight over a 
 small pad and tied, and the divided ocular conjunctiva 
 sutured (Fig. 1 10).
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 215 
 
 ANKYLOBLEPHARON. The adhesions must be separated 
 by knife or scissors, having first ascertained their extent 
 
 FIG. 109. 
 
 OPERATION FOR SYMBLEPHARON BY THE INTRODUCTION OF A 
 LEADEN THREAD. 
 
 FIG. no. 
 
 ARLT'S METHOD. 
 
 by passing a probe, and the lids kept apart by traction 
 during the healing process.
 
 2l6 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 CANTHOTOMY. The temporary widening of the palpebral 
 commissure, consists in introducing one blade of the enucle- 
 ation scissors into the conjunctival sac at the outer angle of 
 the commissure and carrying it toward the temporal side 
 until it has reached the margin of the orbit, and then 
 bringing the two blades of the scissors together, dividing 
 skin, fat, orbicularis muscle, subconjunctival connective 
 
 FIG. i ii. 
 
 CANTHOPLASTY. 
 
 tissue and the conjunctiva. This operation is of great 
 benefit in chronic catarrhal conjunctivitis with corneal ulcer. 
 CANTHOPLASTY (Fig. 1 1 1). The object of this operation 
 is to permanently widen the palpebral commissure. The 
 tissues are divided, as in the operation of canthotomy just 
 described, by a single cut with the scissors, and the raw 
 margins of the divided skin and conjunctiva brought together 
 by three sutures, the first uniting the parts in the angle of
 
 OPERATIONS. 
 
 2I 7 
 
 the cut, the second and third sutures uniting them on the 
 lower and upper lid in the order named. 
 
 TARSORRAPHY (Fig. 112) is the operation for shortening, 
 
 FIG. 112. 
 
 FIG. 113. 
 
 />. YARNALL CO.FHILA 
 
 HORN PLATE. 
 
 FIG. 114. 
 
 LID FORCEPS. 
 
 or altogether closing the palpebral aperture. It consists in 
 stretching the upper lid over a horn plate (Fig. 1.13) or lid 
 forceps (Fig. 1 14), and removing with a small iridectomy 
 19
 
 2l8 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 knife a flap, I mm. broad from its free margin, the desired 
 distance toward the outer canthus, ab Fig. 112, including 
 the hair bulbs. The excision is extended 2-3 mm. over 
 the inner border, in order to insure close union of the 
 parts in exact juxtaposition. The lower lid is similarly 
 treated and the raw surfaces of the two lids are brought 
 together by fine sutures. The eye is bandaged and kept 
 shut until the wound unites ; the sutures are then removed. 
 
 Fie. 115. 
 
 
 OPERATION FOR DISTICH IASIS. 
 
 EXCISION OF CILI;E (Fig. 115) is sometimes performed 
 for the relief of distichiasis. The operation is simple, and 
 usually effective. The lid is elevated by a horn or lid 
 forceps, and an incision 2 mm. deep made between the 
 tarsus and skin in the edge of the lid from one canthus to 
 the other. A second incision of the same length is made 
 through the skin 2 mm. from the border down to the 
 tarsus. The portion of skin and fascia thus separated and
 
 OPERATIONS. 219 
 
 removed, should include the bulbs of the ciliae, but not 
 the meibomian glands. Suturing is not necessary. 
 
 ENTROPION. The skin overlying the centre of the upper 
 border of the tarsus is nicked and lid forceps inserted. 
 Commencing at the indentation thus made and passing 
 horizontally right and left, the upper half of the cartilage is 
 cleared its entire width by division of the skin, connective 
 tissue and muscle which, after division, are pushed toward 
 the ciliary border. A suture is passed from below upward 
 through the pad of tissues thus formed, and carried 
 through the upper border of the exposed cartilage. Fixa- 
 tion forceps, held in the left hand, are now thrust backward 
 and upward to grasp the relaxed levator palpebrae tendon, 
 which is drawn forward. Finally, the needle is thrust 
 through the tendon thus advanced, and the two ends of the 
 thread tied. Two lateral sutures, one at either side of the 
 first, are carried through the mass, in a similar manner, and 
 tied. 
 
 ECTROPION (Figs. 116 and 117). In eversion of the lid, 
 some form of plastic operation is usually necessary. As a 
 rule, a V-shaped excision of a part of the lid is made, and 
 skin from below brought in its place and held by sutures. 
 Occasionally it will be found sufficient to cauterize with a 
 hot iron the everted conjunctiva, which will slough and 
 leave a cicatrix extensive enough to maintain the lid 
 in its proper position. Or, instead of the hot iron cautery, 
 caustics may be employed to destroy the indurated and 
 hypertophied conjunctiva, and to form the necessary cica- 
 trix. 
 
 CHALAZION. The removal of these bodies is the same 
 as for cysts in other situations of the body. A chalazion 
 can readily be dissected out from the conjunctival surface 
 as a rule, and when practicable this surface should, for
 
 220 
 
 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 obvious reasons, be selected. The lid is secured by forceps, 
 the cyst incised, emptied, and an obliterative inflammation 
 
 FIG. 1 1 6. 
 
 OPERATION FOR ECTROPION : THE INCISION. 
 
 FIG. 117. 
 
 OPERATION FOR ECTROPION: THE SUTURES IN POSITION. 
 
 of its walls induced by the application of the solid stick of 
 silver nitrate, or by crystals of copper sulphate. Under this
 
 OPERATIONS. 221 
 
 treatment, all signs of the tumor, and of the consequent 
 inflammation, disappear. 
 
 PTOSIS. The simplest and most effective operation, con- 
 sists in passing a stout silk ligature vertically under the skin 
 from the eyebrows to the margin of the lids, and firmly 
 tying the ends. The noose thus formed is daily tightened 
 until it has cut its way through the confined tissues. The 
 resulting cicatrix restores and holds the lid in its normal 
 position. 
 
 STRICTURE OF THE LACRYMAL DUCT. The lower lid is 
 made tense and the point of a Weber Knife (Fig. 118) 
 introduced vertically into the punctum, its handle lowered 
 until it is brought into a horizontal position, and the blade 
 
 FIG. ii 8. 
 
 CANALICULUS KNIFE. 
 
 of the instrument with its cutting edge upward, thrust 
 forward until it comes in contact with the lacrymal bone. 
 The handle is again elevated to a point immediately in 
 front of the supra-orbital notch, and a cut made along the 
 inner and free margin of the lid, converting the canaliculus 
 into a gutter. The point of the knife with its cutting edge 
 forward, is now engaged in the lacrymal sac, whence it is 
 carried downward, backward and slightly outward into 
 the nasal duct, dividing the stricture. 
 
 The canal thus re-established (Fig. 1 19) should be main- 
 tained for a time by the daily introduction of a probe, No. 
 10, Bowman (Fig. 120). After the lapse of a week or 
 ten days, No. 8 or 6 probe may be used, and the intervals
 
 222 A MANUAL OF CLINICAL OPHTHALMOLOGY. 
 
 FIG. 119. 
 
 PROBING THE NASAL DUCT. 
 
 E.A:fARNALL CO. PHI LA.
 
 OPERATIONS. 223 
 
 of its introduction gradually increased until all signs of ob- 
 struction have subsided. 
 
 Various operations for epithelioma, ulcer, naevi, warty 
 excrescences, etc., have been suggested. They belong, how- 
 ever, to the domain of general surgery. The ingenuity 
 of the operator and his knowledge of the principles of 
 general surgery, must be relied upon to devise proper 
 measures for their relief. 
 
 An operating case suitable for operations described in 
 this volume would contain 
 
 Graefe Knife, straight Keratome, bent Keratome, Graefe 
 Cystotome, Small Strabismus Hook, Bowman's Stop 
 Needle, Speculum, Double Scoop, Canaliculus Knife, 
 Curved Iris Forceps, Fixation Forceps, Ciliae Forceps, 
 McClure's Iris Scissors, Enucleation Scissors, Conjunctival 
 Scissors, Lid Retractor, Set of Bowman's Probes, Lid 
 Forceps, Horn Plate, Spud, Lens Extractor, Needle 
 Holder, Needles and Silk. Cost, about $35.00.
 
 INDEX. 
 
 A. 
 
 Abduction, 84 
 Abscess of orbit, 193 
 Accommodation, 31 
 
 negative, 31 
 
 positive, 31 
 
 range of, 32, 57 
 
 relative, 33 
 
 spasm of, 76 
 
 Achromatopsia, acquired, 41 
 Adduction, 84 
 
 Advancement of tendon, 212 
 Albinism, 147 
 Alopecia, 113 
 Amblyopia, 90 
 
 tobacco and alcohol, 191 
 Ametropia, 54 
 Angle a, 27 
 
 7, 27 
 
 metre, 33 
 
 . of 5', 34 
 Aniridia, 147 
 
 Ankyloblepharon, 116, 215 
 Annulus senilis, 130 
 Aphakia, 145 
 Arcus senilis, 130 
 Artery, central retinal, 17, 24 
 
 anterior ciliary, 24 
 
 external carotid, 23 
 
 hyaloid, 18, 25, 137, 145, 164 
 
 internal carotid, 22 
 
 lacrymal, 23 
 
 long ciliary, 24 
 
 muscular, 24 
 
 nasal, 24 
 
 ophthalmic, 21 
 
 palpebral, 24 
 
 short ciliary, 24 
 
 supra-orbital, 24 
 
 Atropine sulphate, 76, 77 
 Astigmatism, 59 
 
 comp. hyper., 60, 63 
 
 myopic, 60, 63 
 
 diagnosis and treatment of, 60 
 by ophthalmoscope, 67 
 by retinoscopy, 71 
 hypermetropic, 60, 63 
 irregular, 60, 63 
 mixed, 60 
 myopic, 60, 63 
 regular, 60 
 symptoms of, 60 
 Axis, optic, 27 
 principal, 47 
 secondary, 47 
 visual, 27, 33 
 
 B. 
 
 Blepharitis, 109 
 
 angularis, 94 
 
 marginalis, 94, 109 
 Blepharospasm, 115 
 Blepharophimosis, 116 
 Blind spot, 37 
 Burns, 107 
 
 C. 
 
 Canal of Cloquet, 18 
 
 of Petit, 1 8 
 
 of Schlemm, II, 24 
 Canaliculi, 30 
 Cancer, melanotic, 132 
 Canthoplasty, 216 
 Canthotomy, 216 
 Capsule, anterior, 19 
 
 deposits on, 145 
 
 Tenon's, 24, 25 
 
 wounds of, 145 
 
 225
 
 226 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Caruncula lacryraalis, 29 
 Caustics, contraindicated, 94 
 Cataract, 136 
 
 acquired, 138 
 
 anterior polar, 136 
 
 capsular, 129 
 
 secondary, 145 
 treatment of, 146 
 
 causes of, 138 
 
 central, 136 
 
 clinical features of, 142 
 
 congenital, 136 
 
 cortical, 136 
 
 extraction of, with iridectomy, 
 
 196 
 without iridectomy, 200 
 
 fusiform, 137 
 
 hard, 138 
 
 history of, 142 
 
 incipient, 138 
 
 lenticular, 129 
 
 mature, 138 
 
 nuclear, 138 
 
 posterior polar, 137, 147 
 
 pyramidal capsular, 136 
 
 senile, 138 
 
 secondary, 138 
 
 soft, 138, 201 
 
 spoon, 198 
 
 total congenital, 137 
 
 traumatic, 143 
 
 treatment of, 143 
 
 ripe, 142 
 
 zonular or lamellar, 137 
 Ciliae, excision of, 218 
 Ciliary body, 12 
 
 circle, 14 
 
 processes, 14 
 
 region, 14 
 Chalazion, 112, 219 
 Chamber, anterior, 18 
 
 posterior, 18 
 
 vitreous, 18 
 
 Chancre of conjunctiva, 1 12 
 Chi asm, optic, 21 
 Chorea, 1 1 6 
 Choroid, 1 1 
 
 central senile atrophy of, 158 
 
 ophthalmoscopic appearances in 
 
 disease of, 158 
 Choroiditis, 157 
 
 rhoroiditis, areolar, 158 
 
 central, 158 
 
 guttate, 158 
 
 disseminated, 157 
 
 retino-, 157 
 
 symptoms of. in general, Ibl 
 Cocaine hydrochlorate, 77 
 Coloboma of iris, 147 
 
 of lid, 1 06 
 Color-blindness, 40 
 
 sense, 39 
 Colors, 39 
 
 complementary, 39 
 
 confusion of, 39 
 
 primary, 39 
 
 secondary, 39 
 Commissure, optic, 21 
 Conjunctiva, 29 
 
 fornix of, 29 
 
 ocular, 29 
 
 palpebral, 29 
 
 hyperarmia of, 92 
 
 xerosis of, 104 
 Conjunctivitis, 92 
 
 blennorrhoeal, loo 
 
 catarrhal, acute, 93 
 chronic, 94 
 
 croupous, 103 
 
 diphtheritic, 103 
 
 follicular, 95 
 
 gonorrhoeal, 100 
 
 granular, 96 
 
 herpetic, 102 
 
 lymphatic, 102 
 
 phlyctenular, 102 
 
 purulent, 100 
 
 scrophulosis, 102 
 
 vernal, 95 
 Contusion, 108 
 Convergence, 27, 33 
 Cornea, 10, 29 
 
 abscess of, 1 28 
 
 conical, 124, 130, 206 
 
 tattooing of, 208 
 
 tumors of, 132 
 Corneitis, 122 
 Comeo-scleral margin, 10 
 Corpora geniculata, 19 
 
 quadragemini, 19 
 Correction, full, of ametropia, 56 
 Cortex of lens, 19
 
 INDEX. 
 
 227 
 
 Critchett's operation, 132, 133 
 Crus cerebri, 21 
 Cyclitis, 154 
 
 chronic, 155 
 Cylinders, 48, 49 
 Cystotome, 198 
 
 D. 
 
 Dacryocystitis, 119 
 
 Depilation, 113 
 
 Dermoid cyst of conjunctiva, 105 
 
 of cornea, 132 
 Descemitis, 151 
 Deviation, angle of, 44 
 Dilator iridis, 14 
 Diopter, meaning of, 36 
 Dioptric system, 49 
 Diplopia, 80 
 Distichiasis, 98, 112 
 Double vision, 117 
 Duboisine sulphate, 76 
 Duct, nasal, 31 
 
 E. 
 
 Ecchymosis, 112 
 Ectropion, 115, 219 
 Eczema of lids, 1 10 
 Embolism of retinal artery, 173 
 Emergence, angle of, 43 
 Emergent ray, 43 
 Emmetropia, 32, 53 
 
 diagnosis of, by retinoscopy, 70 
 Emphysema, no 
 Enophthalmus, 194 
 Entropion, 98, 114, 219 
 Enucleation, 213 
 Epicanthus, 106 
 Epiphora, 118, 119 
 Epithelioma, III 
 Erysipelas, no 
 Erythema, 1 10 
 Esophoria, 83, 85 
 Esotropia, 84, 90 
 Exophoria, 83 
 Exophthalmus, 194 
 Exotropia, 84, 91 
 Eyeball, 9 
 
 F. 
 
 Far point, 32, 57, 58 
 Focal distance, 47 
 
 length of eye, 49 
 Focus, principal, 47 
 
 virtual, 48 
 Foramen sclera, 10, 21 
 
 choroidea, 1 1 
 Forceps, fixation, 196 
 
 iris, 197 
 Foreign bodies in anterior chamber, 
 
 209 
 
 in conjunctiva, 208 
 in cornea, 208 
 in lens, 209 
 
 in vitreous chamber, 209 
 Fossa, hyaloid, 18 
 Fovea centralis, 17, 66 
 
 G. 
 
 Ganglion, ophthalmic, 14, 21, 22 
 Gland, lacrymal, 30, 117 
 abscess of, 117 
 fistule of, 118 
 hypertrophy of, 117 
 Glands, Meibomian, 29 
 Glaucoma, acute inflammatory, 170 
 chronic inflammatory, 167 
 fulminating, 170 
 secondary, 132, 133, 150, 171 
 simple, 1 66 
 
 Glaucomatous degeneration, 171 
 Glioma, pseudo, 162 
 Granuloma, 105 
 
 H. 
 
 Hemianopsia, 192 
 
 bilateral, 192 
 
 binasal, 192 
 
 bitemporal, 192 
 
 horizontal, 36 
 
 vertical, 37, 192 
 Herpes, 123, 125 
 
 zoster, ophthalmic, 125 
 Heteronymous images, 80 
 Heterophoria, 83, 85 
 
 diagnosis of, 87 
 Heterotropia, 84, 88 
 Homatropine hydrobromate, 76
 
 228 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Homonymous images, 80 
 Hordeolum, 109 
 Humor, aqueous, 1 8 
 
 vitreous, 18 
 Hyalitis, 163 
 
 Hyoscyamine sulphate, 76 
 Hyperesophoria, 83 
 Hyperesotropia, 84 
 Hyperexophoria, 83 
 Hyperexotropia, 83 
 Hypermetropia (hyperopia), 27, 54, 
 
 84 
 
 accommodation in, 57 
 
 diagnosis by ophthalmoscope, 68 
 by retinoscopy, 70 
 
 manifest, 55 
 
 latent, 55, 57 
 
 total, 55, 57 
 Hyperphoria, 83, 85 
 Hyphsemia, spontaneous, 153 
 
 traumatic, 153 
 Hypopyon,i24, 128, 152 
 
 I. 
 
 Image, false, 80, tt seq. 
 
 true, 79, 89 
 Incidence, angle of, 43 
 Incident ray, 43 
 Iris, 14 
 
 absence of, 147 
 
 colobomaof, 147 
 
 cysts of, 154 
 
 detachment of, 153 
 
 granuloma of, 154 
 
 gumma of, 154 
 
 hyperamia of, 147 
 
 tubercle of, 1 54 
 Iridectomy, 202 
 Iridotomy (iritomy), 204 
 Iritis, 129 
 
 cause of, 150 
 
 chronic, 149 
 
 parenchymatous, 152 
 
 plastic, 148 
 
 serous, 151 
 
 suppurative, 152 
 
 treatment of, 1 50 
 
 K. 
 
 Keratitis, interstitial, 127 
 necrotic, 130 
 
 Keratitis, neuro-paralytic, 129 
 
 parenchymalous, 127 
 
 phlyctenular, 122 
 Knife, Graefe cataract, 196 
 
 iridectomy, 203 
 
 iridotomy, 204 
 
 paracentesis, 205 
 
 L. 
 
 Lacrymal sac, abscess of, 119 
 blennorrhoea of, 119 
 fistule of, 1 20 
 syringe, 120 
 Lacrymation, 123 
 Lamina cribrosa, 10, 21 
 Lens, crystalline, 18, 31 
 absence of, 145 
 concave, 44, 47 
 convex, 44 
 dislocation of, 144 
 extractor, 200 
 Lenticular ganglion, 14 
 Leucoma, 130 
 Lids, 27 
 
 Lid speculum, 196 
 Ligament, suspensory, 1 8 
 Ligamentum pectinatum iridis, 14 
 Limbus corneie, 122 
 Lipoma, 105 
 Liquor Morgagni, 18 
 Lupus, III 
 
 Lymph space of anterior chamber, 24 
 ciliary body, 25 
 conjunctiva, 25 
 cornea, 25 
 intervaginal, 21, 24 
 perichoroid, 24, 25 
 of sclera, 25 
 subdural, 21 
 suprachoroidea;, n 
 of Tenon's capsule, 25 
 retina, 25 
 vitreous, 25 
 
 M. 
 
 Macula lutea, 17 
 
 of cornea, 130 
 Massage, 118, 120 
 Melanoma, 132 
 Melano-sarcoma, 105
 
 INDEX. 
 
 229 
 
 Membrane, arachnoid, 21 
 
 Bowman's, 10 
 
 Descemet's, 10 
 
 dura mater, 21 
 
 hyaloid, 1 8 
 Microphthalmus, 147 
 Milium, 112 
 Muscse volitantes, 163 
 Muscle, ciliary, action of, 31 
 
 external rectus, 25, 78 
 
 inferior " 25, 78 
 
 internal " 25, 78 
 
 superior " 25, 78 
 
 inferior oblique, 26, 78 
 
 superior " 25, 26, 78 
 
 levator palpebrse, 27, 29 
 
 orbicularis palpebrarum, 27, 29 
 
 tendo oculi, 31 
 
 tarsi, 31 
 Mydriasis, artificial, 152 
 
 emotional, 152 
 
 idiopathic, 152 
 
 symptomatic, 152 
 Mydriatics, 75 
 Myopia, 27, 57 
 
 accommodation in, 58 
 
 acquired, 58 
 
 congenital, 58 
 
 diagnosis by ophthalmoscope, 67 
 by retinoscopy, 7 1 
 
 high, 58 
 
 low, 58 
 
 moderate, 58 
 
 staphyloma in, 104 
 Myosis, artificial, 153 
 
 irritative, 153 
 
 paralytic, 153 
 
 reflex, 153 
 
 N. 
 
 Nasal duct, stricture of, 119 
 Near point, 32, 57, 58 
 Nebula, 130 
 Nerve, optic, atrophy of, 189 
 
 ophthalmoscopic appearances 
 
 of, 190 
 Nerves, 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th 
 
 lacrymal, 21, 22 
 frontal infra-trochlear long ciliary, 
 
 Nerves, nasal, short ciliary, sympa- 
 thetic, 21, 22 
 Neuritis, optic, 185 
 
 retrobulbar, 188 
 Neuro-retinitis, 187 
 Nucleus of lens, 19 
 Nystagmus, 81 
 
 O. 
 
 Ocular muscles, paralysis of, 78 
 physiology of, 78 
 scheme of action of, 79 
 strength of, 84 
 
 CEdema, no 
 
 Onyx, 124, 128 
 
 Opacities, corneal, 130 
 
 Opaque nerve- fibres, 175 
 
 Ophthalmia, neonatorum, 100 
 sympathetic, 155 
 
 Ophthalmoplegia externa, 81 
 interna, 81 
 
 Ophthalmoscope, examination by, 50 
 by direct method, 51, 64 
 by indirect method, 52, 66 
 
 Optical centre, 47 
 
 Ora serrata, II, 14, 17 
 
 Orbit, abscess of, 193 
 tumors of, 193 
 
 Orthophoria, 83 
 
 Orthotropia, 83 
 
 P. 
 
 Pagenstecher's ointment, 94 
 Pannus, 98, 124 
 Papilla, 66 
 Papillitis, 1 86 
 Paracentesis, cornese, 205 
 Paralysis of external rectus, 8 1 
 
 of inferior rectus, 81 
 
 of internal rectus, 8l 
 
 of superior rectus, 8 1 
 
 of superior and inferior oblique, 
 
 81 
 
 Pediculus pubis, 113 
 Pericofneal ring, 122 
 Perimeter, 37 
 Periostitis, 193 
 Phlegmon, 108 
 Phthisis bulbi, 156 
 Phlyctenule, 122, 123
 
 230 
 
 INI'l.X. 
 
 Photophobia, 123 
 Pinguecula, 105 
 Pink-eye, 93 
 Placido'sdisc, 131 
 Plica semilunaris, 29 
 Polycoria, 147 
 Polypi, 105 
 
 Porus opticus, 17, 21, 24 
 Presbyopia, 72 
 
 in E, 72 
 
 in H. and comp. H. As., 73 
 
 in M. and comp. M. As., 73 
 
 in mixed astigmatism, 75 
 Prisms, 33, 43 
 Pterygium, 104, 212 
 Ptosis, acquired, 116 
 
 congenital, 106 
 
 operation for, 221 
 Puncta lacrymalia, 30 
 
 malposition of, 118 
 Pupil, 14 
 
 Argyll - Robertson ,153 
 
 dilatation of, 152 
 Pupillary membrane, persistent, 145, 
 
 147 
 Purkinje's sign, 145 
 
 R. 
 
 Reflection, 42 
 Refracting media, 49 
 
 power, 47 
 Refraction, 42 
 
 determination of, by ophthalmo- 
 scope, 67 
 
 index of, 42, 49 
 
 in heterophoria, 86 
 
 normal, 53 
 
 ophthalmoscope, 64 
 Retina, 15 
 
 anaemia of, 172 
 
 anaesthesia of, 183 
 
 detachment of, 181 
 
 exposure of, to light, 184 
 
 glioma of, 183 
 
 hemorrhage of, 174 
 
 hypenemia of, 172 
 
 hypenesthesia of, 183 
 
 normal sensibility of, 37 
 Retinitis, albuminuric, 176 
 
 central acute, 182 
 
 Retinitis, diffused chronic, 178 
 
 hemorrhagic, 175 
 
 pigmentosa, 179 
 Retinoscopy, 56, 70 
 
 S. 
 
 Sac, lacrymal, 31 
 S;x'misch's incision, 1 29, 205 
 Sarcoma, 105, 132 
 Scissors, conjunct! val, 211 
 
 De Wecker's iritomy, 205 
 
 enucleation,2i4 
 
 iridectomy, 197 
 Sclera, 9 
 Scleritis, 132 
 Scotoma, 37 
 Skin grafting, 108 
 Spaces of Fontana, 1 1 , 24 
 Sphincter pupilbe, 14 
 Squint, alternating, 89 
 
 concomitant, 89 
 
 monolateral, 89 
 Staphyloma, 99, 1 24 
 
 ciliary, 133 
 
 of cornea, 131, 132, 206 
 
 of sclera, 133,206 
 
 posterior, 133 
 
 secondary, 135 
 Strabismus, 88 
 
 external, 91 
 
 internal, 90 
 
 hook, 210 
 
 Stricture of lacrymal duct, 221 
 Stye, 109 
 Style, 121 
 Sulcus sclera, 10 
 Sursumduction, 84 
 Symblepharon, 116, 214 
 Synchisis, 163 
 
 scintillans, 163 
 Synechioe, anterior, 126, 129 
 
 partial, 149 
 
 posterior, 148, 149 
 
 total, 149 
 
 T. 
 
 Tarsorrhaphia, 217 
 Tarsus, 27, 29 
 Tenotomy, 91, 209 
 graded, 2 1 1
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Tension, description of, 169 
 Test card, astigmatic, 61 
 
 cards, 34 
 
 lenses, 34 
 
 cylinders, 36 
 
 lens-holder, 36 
 
 lenses, spherical, 45 
 Trichiasis, 112 
 Trachoma, 96 
 Tracts, optic, 19 
 
 U. 
 
 Ulcer, deep, 124 
 resorption, 124 
 rodent, no 
 serpiginous, 127 
 
 Uvea, 14 
 
 V. 
 
 Veni, ophthalmic, 21 
 Venae vorticosse. 12 
 Vision, acuity of, 34 
 field of, 36, 37 
 Vitreous chamber, 18, 164 
 
 foreign bodies in, 164 
 
 W. 
 
 Warty excrescences, 223 
 Wire loop, 200 
 Worsteds, Holmgren's, 60 
 
 X. 
 
 Xanthelasma, 112 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zone of Zinn, 14
 
 CATALOGUE No. 7. 
 
 FEBRUARY, 1895. 
 
 BOOKS 
 
 FOR 
 
 STUDENTS, 
 
 INCLUDING THE 
 
 ? QUIZ-COMPENDS ? 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 PAG 
 
 New Series of Manuals, 2,3,4,5 
 
 Obstetrics. . 
 
 
 
 Pathology, Histology, 
 
 
 Biology, 
 Chemistry, . 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 6 
 
 Pharmacy, . 
 Physical Diagnosis, 
 
 
 Children's Diseas 
 
 s 
 
 
 7 
 
 Physiology, . 
 
 
 Dentistry, 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 Practice of Medicine, 
 
 ii 
 
 Dictionaries, 
 
 
 8 
 
 16 
 
 Prescription Books, 
 
 
 Eye Diseases, 
 Electricity, . 
 
 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 ? Quiz-Compends ? 
 Skin Diseases, 
 
 *4 
 
 Gynaecology, 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 Surgery and Bandaging, 
 
 Hygiene, 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Therapeutics, 
 
 Materia Medica, 
 
 
 
 9 
 
 Urine and Urinary Organs, 
 
 Medical Jurisprudence 
 
 
 10 
 
 Venereal Diseases, 
 
 Nervous Diseases, 
 
 
 10 
 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 P. BLAKISTON, SON & CO., 
 
 Medical Booksellers, Importers and Publishers. 
 
 LARGE STOCK OF ALL STUDENTS' BOOKS, AT 
 THE LOWEST PRICES. 
 
 1O12 Walnut Street, Philadelphia. 
 
 ** For sale by all Booksellers, or any book will be sent by mail, 
 postpaid, upon receipt of price. Catalogues of books on all branches 
 of Medicine, Dentistry, Pharmacy, etc., supplied upon application. 
 
 GOULD'S 
 DICTIONARIES 
 
 See Page 16.
 
 " An excellent Scries of Manual*." Arckivtt of Gymcology. 
 
 A NEW SERIES OF ' 
 
 STUDENTS' MANUALS 
 
 On the various Branches of Medicine and Surgery. 
 
 Can be used by Students of any College. 
 Price of each, Handsome Cloth, $3.00. Full Leather, 13.50 
 
 The object of this series is to furnish good manuals 
 for the medical student, that will strike the medium 
 between the compend on one hand and the prolix text- 
 book on the other to contain all that is necessary for 
 the student, without embarrassing him with a flood of 
 theory and involved statements. They have been pre- 
 pared by well-known men, who have had large experience 
 as teachers and writers, and who are, therefore, well 
 informed as to the needs of the student. 
 
 Their mechanical execution is of the best good type 
 and paper, handsomely illustrated whenever illustrations 
 are of use, and strongly bound in uniform style. 
 
 Each book is sold separately at a remarkably low 
 price, and the immediate success of several of the 
 volumes shows that the series has met with popular 
 favor. 
 
 No. 1. SURGERY. 318 Illustrations. 
 
 Third Edition. 
 A Manual of the Practice of Surgery. By WM. J. 
 
 WALSHAM, M.D., Asst. Surg. to, and Demonstrator of 
 
 Surg. in, St. Bartholomew's Hospital, London, etc. 
 
 318 Illustrations. 
 
 Presents the introductory facts in Surgery in clear, precise 
 language, and contains all the latest advances in Pathology, 
 Antiseptics, etc. 
 
 " It aims to occupy a position, midway between the pretentious 
 manual and the cumbersome System of Surgery, and its general 
 character may be summed up in one word practical." The Attdi- 
 eal Bulletin. 
 
 " Walsham, besides being an excellent surgeon, is a teacher in 
 its best sense, and having had very great experience in the 
 preparation of candidates for examination, and their subsequent 
 professional career, may be relied upon to have carried out his 
 work successfully. Without following out in detail his arrange- 
 ment, which is excellent, we can at once say that his book is an 
 embodiment of modern ideas neatly strung together, with an amount 
 ot careful organization well suited to the candidate, and, indeed, to 
 'he practitioner." British Medical Journal. 
 
 Price of each Book, Cloth, $3.00 : Leather, $3.50.
 
 THE NEW SERIES OF MANUALS. 
 
 No. 2. DISEASES OF WOMEN. 15O Illus. 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 The Diseases of Women. Including Diseases of the 
 Bladder and Urethra. By DR. F. WINCKEL, Professor 
 of Gynaecology and Director of the Royal University 
 Clinic for Women, in Munich. Second Edition. Re- 
 vised and Edited by Theophilus Parvin, M.D., 
 Professor of Obstetrics and Diseases of Women and 
 Children in Jefferson Medical College. 150 Engrav- 
 ings, most of which are original. 
 " The book will be a valuable one to physicians, and a safe and 
 
 satisfactory one to put into the hands of students. It is issued in a 
 
 neat and attractive form, and at a very reasonable price." -Soften 
 
 Medical and Surgical Journal. 
 
 No. 3. ANATOMY. Sixth Edition. 
 
 311 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 HOLDEN'S DISSECTOR. A Manual of the Dissections of 
 the Human Body. By JOHN LANGTON, F. R. c. s., Sur- 
 geon to, and Lecturer on Anatomy at, St. Bartholo- 
 mew's Hospital. Carefully Revised by A. HEWSON, 
 M.D., Demonstrator of Anatomy, Jefferson Medical 
 College; Chief of Surgical Clinic, Jefferson Hospital; 
 Mem. Assoc. Amer. Anatomists, etc. 311 Illustrations. 
 This book comes bound in oil-cloth price $3.00 as 
 well as in the regular cloth and leather styles. 
 " The work before us is a brilliant example of the new order of 
 
 text-books. * * * We would call special attention to the character 
 
 of the illustrations with which the volume is bountifully furnished." 
 
 American Journal o/" Medical Sciences. 
 
 No. 4. PHYSIOLOGY. Sixth Edition. 
 
 254 ILLUSTRATIONS AND A GLOSSARY. 
 A Manual of Physiology. By GERALD F. YEO, M.D., 
 F.R.C.S., Professor of Physiology in King's College, 
 London. 254 Illustrations and a Glossary of Terms. 
 Sixth American from last English Edition, revised and 
 improved. 
 
 This volume was specially prepared to furnish students with a 
 new text-book of Physiology, elementary so far as to avoid theories 
 which have not borne the test of time and such details of methods 
 as are unnecessary for students in our medical colleges. 
 
 "The brief examination I have given it was so favorable that I 
 placed it in the list of text-books recommended in the circular of the 
 University Medical College." Prof. Levitt A. Stimson, M.D., 
 37 East ssd Street, New York. 
 
 Price of each Book, Cloth, $3.00; Leather, $3.50.
 
 4 THE NEW SERIES OF MANUALS. 
 
 No. 5. DISEASES OF CHILDREN. 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 A Manual. By J. F. GOODHART, M.D., Phys. to the 
 Evelina Hospital for Children ; Ass't Phys. to 
 Guy's Hospital, London. Second American Edition. 
 Edited and Rearranged by Louis STARR, M.D., Clinical 
 Prof, of Dis. of Children in the Hospital of the Univ. 
 of Pennsylvania, and Physician to the Children's Hos- 
 pital, Phila. Containing many new Prescriptions, a list 
 of over 50 Formulae, conforming to the U. S. Pharma- 
 copoeia, and Directions for making Artificial Human 
 Milk, for the Artificial Digestion of Milk, etc. Illus. 
 
 " A safe and reliable guide, and in many ways admirably adapted 
 to the wants of the student and practitioner." American Journal 
 of Medical Science. 
 
 No. 6. MATERIA MEDICA, PHARMACY, 
 PHARMACOLOGY, AND THERA- 
 PEUTICS. SECOND EDITION. 
 
 A Handbook for Students. By WM. HALE WIUTK, 
 M.D., F.R.C.P., etc., Physician to, and Lecturer on Ma- 
 teria Medica, Guy's Hospital ; Examiner in Materia 
 Medica, Royal College of Physicians, London, etc. 
 
 - Second American Edition. Revised and Enlarged by 
 REYNOLD W. WILCOX, M.D., LL.D., Prof, of Clinical 
 Medicine and Therapeutics, New York Post-Graduate 
 Medical School; Visiting Physician St. Mark's Hospital. 
 66 1 pages. 
 
 "This is a well-arranged, concise, and handy work on materia 
 medica, excellent as a reference manual or as a text-book for 
 students attending lectures on the subject." New Yark Medical 
 Record. 
 
 No. 7- MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE AND 
 
 TOXICOLOGY. FOURTH EDITION. 
 By JOHN J. REESE, M.D., late Professor of Medical Juris- 
 prudence and Toxicology in the University of Penn- 
 sylvania. Revised by HENRY LEFFMANN, M.D., Prof, 
 of Chemistry, Pa.' College of Dentistry ; Hygienist and 
 Food Inspector, Pa. State Board of Agriculture. 
 " We lay this volume aside, after a careful perusal of its pages, 
 with the profound impression that it should be in the hands of every 
 
 doctor and lawyer. It fully meets the wants of all students 
 
 He has succeeded in admirably condensing into a handy volume all 
 the essential points." Cincinnati Lancet and Clinic. 
 
 Price of each Book, Cloth, $3.00 : Leather, $3.50.
 
 THE NEW SERIES OF MANUALS. 6 
 
 No. 8. DISEASES OP THE EYE. 164Illus. 
 
 FOURTH EDITION. 
 
 Diseases of the Eye and their Treatment. A Handbook 
 for Physicians and Students. By HENRY R. SWANZY, 
 A.M., M.B., F.R.C.S.I., Surgeon to the National Eye and 
 Ear Infirmary ; Ophthalmic Surgeon to the Adelaide 
 Hospital, Dublin; Examiner in Ophthalmic Surgery 
 in the Royal University of Ireland. Fourth Edition, 
 Thoroughly Revised. 164 Illustrations and a Zephyr 
 Plate for Testing Color Blindness. 518 pages. 
 
 " Mr. Swanzy has succeeded in producing the most intellectually 
 conceived and thoroughly executed resume of the science within 
 the limits he has assigned himself. As a 'students' handbook/ 
 small in size and moderate in price, it can hardly be equaled." 
 Medical News. 
 
 " A full, clear, and comprehensive statement of Eye Diseases 
 and their treatment, practical and thorough, and we feel fully jus- 
 tified in commending it to our readers. It is written in a clear and 
 forcible style, presenting in a condensed yet comprehensive form 
 current and modern information that will prove alike beneficial to 
 the student and general practitioner." Southern Practitioner. 
 
 No. 9. MENTAL DISEASES. 
 
 WITH ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 Lectures on Mental Diseases, designed for Medical Stu- 
 dents and General Practitioners. By HENRY PUTNAM 
 STEARNS, A.M., M.D., Physician Superintendent at the 
 Hartford Retreat, Lecturer on Mental Diseases in Yale 
 University, New Haven, Conn., Hon. Mem. British 
 Psycho. Asso'n, etc. With Illustrations and a Digest of 
 the Laws of the various States relating to the Commit- 
 ment and Care of the Insane. 636 pages. 
 
 No. 1O. MEDICAL CHEMISTRY. 
 
 THIRD EDITION. ILLUSTRATED. 
 A Text-Book of Medical and Pharmaceutical Chemistry. 
 By E. H. BARTLEY, M.D., Professor of Chemistry 
 and Toxicology at Long Island College Hospital, 
 Chief Chemist Board of Health, Brooklyn, N. Y., etc. 
 With Glossary and Illustrations. 684 pages. 
 
 " It is with pleasure that we notice what is probably the best 
 chemistry for medical students for its size now in the market. 
 Prof. Hartley has written the book because he had- something to 
 say; and he has said it well." The Journal of the American 
 Medical Association, Chicago, III. 
 
 Price of each Book, Cloth, $3.00; Leather, $3.50.
 
 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 
 
 ANATOMY. 
 
 Morris' New Text-Book on Anatomy. Now Rtady. By 
 ten leading Surgeons and Anatomists, and Edited by Henry 
 Morris, F.R.C.S. 791 Specially Engraved Illustrations, 214 of 
 which are printed in colors. Octavo. 1280 pages. 
 
 Price in Cloth, 7.50; Sheep, 8.50; Half Russia, 9.50 
 ' Send for Descriptive Circular and Sample Pages. 
 
 Macalister's Human Anatomy. 816 Illustrations. A new 
 Text-book for Students and Practitioners, Systematic and Topo- 
 graphical, including the Embryology, Histology, and Morphology 
 of Man. With special reference to the requirements of 
 Practical Surgery and Medicine. With 816 Illustrations, 
 400 of which are original. Octavo. Cloth, 7.50; Leather, 8.50 
 
 Ballou's Veterinary Anatomy and Physiology. Illustrated. 
 By Wm. R. Ballon, M.D., Professor of Equine Anatomy at New 
 York College of Veterinary Surgeons. 29 graphic Illustrations. 
 I2mo. Cloth, i. oo ; Interleaved (or notes, 1.25 
 
 Holden's Dissector. A manual of Dissection of the Human 
 Body. Sixth Edition. Edited by A. Hewson, M.D., Demonstra- 
 tor of Anatomy at Jefferson Medical College. 311 Illustrations, 
 many of which are new. Oil-cloth, 3.00; Sheep, 3.50 
 
 Holden's Human Osteology. Comprising a Description of the 
 Bones, with Colored Delineations of the Attachments of the 
 Muscles. The General and Microscopical Structure of Bone and 
 its Development. With Lithographic Plates and Numerous Illus- 
 trations. Seventh Edition. 8vo. Cloth, 6.00 
 
 Holden's Landmarks, Medical and Surgical. 4th Ed. Clo.,i.2S 
 
 Potter's Compend of Anatomy. Fifth Edition. Enlarged. 
 16 Lithographic Plates. 117 Illustrations. Stt pagt 14. 
 
 Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.25 
 
 CHEMISTRY. 
 
 Hartley's Medical and Pharmaceutical Chemistry. Third 
 Edition. Prepared specially for Medical, Pharmaceutical, and 
 Dental Students. 60 Illustrations, Plate of Absorption Spectra, 
 and Glossary. Revised and Enlarged. Cloth, 3.00 
 
 Trimble. Practical and Analytical Chemistry. A Course in 
 Chemical Analysis, by Henry Trimble, Prof, of Analytical Chem- 
 Utry in the Phila. College of Pharmacy. Illustrated. Fourth 
 Edition, Enlarged. 8vo. Cloth, 1.50 
 
 Bloxam's Chemistry, Inorganic and Organic, with Experiments. 
 Eighth Edition. a8i Illustrations. In Prets 
 
 Iff Sft paget 2 to 3 for list of StuJentt' Maintalt .
 
 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 7 
 
 Chemistry : Continued. 
 
 Richter's Inorganic Chemistry. Fourth American, from Sixth 
 German Edition. Translated by Prof. Edgar F. Smith, PH.D. 
 89 Wood Engravings and Colored Plate of Spectra. Cloth, 3.00 
 
 Richter's Organic Chemistry, or Chemistry of the Carbon 
 Compounds. Illustrated. Second Edition. Cloth, 4. 50 
 
 Sy monds. Manual of Chemistry, for the special use of Medi- 
 cal Students. By BRANDRBTH SYMONDS, A.M., M.D., Asst. 
 Physician Roosevelt Hospital, Out- Patient Department ; Attend- 
 ing Physician Northwestern Dispensary, New York. Cloth, 2.00 
 
 Leffmann's Compend of Medical Chemistry. Including 
 Urinary Analysis. Fourth Edition. Revised. 
 See page 15. Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.23 
 
 Muter. Practical and Analytical Chemistry. Fourth Edi- 
 tion. Revised, to meet the requirements of American Medical 
 Colleges, by Prof. C. C. Hamilton. Illustrated. Cloth, 1.25 
 
 Holland. The Urine, Gastric Contents, Common Poisons, 
 and Milk Analysis, Chemical and Microscopical. For La- 
 boratory Use. Fifth Edition, Enlarged. Illustrated. Cloth, 1.25 
 
 Woody. Essentials of Chemistry for the Medical Student. 
 Third Edition. Cloth, 1.25 
 
 CHILDREN. 
 
 Goodhart and Starr. The Diseases of Children. Second 
 Edition. By J. F. Goodhart, M.D., Physician to the Evelina 
 Hospital for Children; Assistant Physician to Guy's Hospital, 
 London. Revised and Edited by Louis Starr, M.D., Clinical 
 Professor of Diseases of Children in the Hospital of the Univer- 
 sity of Pennsylvania; Physician to the Children's Hospital, 
 Philadelphia. Containing many Prescriptions and Formulae, 
 conforming to the U. S. Pharmacopoeia, Directions for making 
 Artificial Human Milk, for the Artificial Digestion of Milk, etc. 
 Illustrated. . Cloth, 3.00; Leather, 3.50 
 
 Hatfield. Diseases of Children. By M. P. Hatfield, M.D., 
 Professor of Diseases of Children, Chicago Medical College. 
 Colored Plate, izmo. Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved, 1.25 
 
 Starr. Diseases of the Digestive Organs in Infancy and 
 Childhood. With chapters on the Investigation of Disease, 
 and on the General Management of Children. By Louis Starr, 
 if.D., Clinical Professor of Diseases of Children in the Univer- 
 sity of Pennsylvania. Illus. Second Edition. Cloth, 2.25 
 4^- Set pages 14 and 15 for list offQuiz-Compendtf
 
 8 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 
 
 DENTISTRY. 
 
 Fillcbrown. Operative Dentistry. 330 Illus. Cloth, 2.50 
 
 Flagg's Plastics and Plastic Filling. 4th Ed. Cloth, 4.00 
 Gorgas. Dental Medicine. Fifth Edition. Cloth, 4.00 
 
 Harris. Principles and Practice of Dentistry. Including 
 Anatomy, Physiology, Pathology, Therapeutics, Dental Surgery 
 and Mechanism. Twelfth Edition. Revised and enlarged by 
 Professor Gorgas. 1028 Illustrations. Cloth, 7.00 ; Leather, 8.00 
 Richardson's Mechanical Dentistry. Sixth Edition. By 
 Warren. 600 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, 4.50; Leather, 5.50 
 Sewill. Dental Surgery. 200 Illustrations. 3d Ed. Clo., 3.00 
 Taft's Operative Dentistry. 100 Illus. Cloth, 4. 25; Leather, 5.00 
 Talbot. Irregularities of the Teeth, and their Treatment. 
 Illustrated. 8vo. Second Edition. Cloth, 3.00 
 
 Tomes' Dental Anatomy. Fourth Ed. 235 Illus. Cloth, 4.00 
 Tomes' Dental Surgery. 3d Edition. 292 Illus. Cloth, 5.00 
 Warren. Compend of Dental Pathology and Dental Medi- 
 cine. Illustrated, ad Ed. Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved, 1.2$ 
 Warren. Dental Prostheses and Metallurgy. 129 Illustra- 
 tions. I2H10. I.5O 
 
 DICTIONARIES. 
 
 Gould's Student's Medical Dictionary. Containing the Defi- 
 nition and Pronunciation of all words in Medicine, with many 
 useful Tables, etc. 
 
 J4 Dark Leather, 3.25 ; % MOT., Thumb Index, 4.23 
 Gould's Pocket Dictionary. 12,000 Medical Words Pro- 
 nounced and Defined. Containing many Tables and an 
 Elaborate Dose List. Thin 64010. 
 
 Leather, gilt edges, i.oo; with Thumb Index, 1.25 
 
 Harris' Dictionary of Dentistry. Fifth Edition. Completely 
 revised by Prof. Gorgas. Cloth, 5.00; Leather, 6.00 
 
 Cleaveland's Pronouncing Pocket Medical Lexicon. Small 
 pocket size. Cloth, red edges .75 ; pocket-book style, i.oo 
 
 Longley's Pocket Dictionary. The Student's Medical Lexicon, 
 giving Definition and Pronunciation, with an Appendix giving 
 Abbreviations used in Prescriptions, Metric Scale of Doses, etc. 
 24010. Cloth, i.oo; pocket-book style, 1.95 
 
 EYE. 
 
 Hartridge on Refraction. ?th Edition. Illus. Cloth, 1.75 
 
 Swanzy. Diseases of the Eye and their Treatment. 176 
 
 Illustrations. Fourth Edition. Cloth, 300; Leather, 3.50 
 
 Pox and Gould. Compend of Diseases of the Eye and 
 
 Refraction. 2d Ed. Enlarged. 71 Illus. 39 Formulae. 
 
 Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.25 
 
 *- .S> fiaget a to 5 for Hit of Studtnts' Manuals.
 
 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 9 
 
 ELECTRICITY. 
 
 Bigelow. Plain Talks on Medical Electricity. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 Mason's Compend of Medical Electricity. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 Steavenson and Jones. Medical Electricity. A Practical 
 
 Handbook. Illustrated. i2mo. Cloth, 2. 50 
 
 HYGIENE. 
 
 Coplin and Bevan. Practical Hygiene. By W. M. L. Cop- 
 lin, Adjunct Professor of Hygiene, Jefferson Medical College, 
 Philadelphia, and Dr. D. Bevan. Illustrated. Cloth, 4.00 
 
 Parkes' (Ed. A.) Practical Hygiene. Seventh Edition, en- 
 larged. Illustrated. 8vo. Cloth, 4.50 
 
 Parkes' (L. C.) Manual of Hygiene and Public Health. 
 Second Edition. 121110. Cloth, 2.50 
 
 Wilson's Handbook of Hygiene and Sanitary Science. 
 Seventh Edition. Revised and Illustrated. Cloth, 3.25 
 
 MATERIA MEDICA AND THERAPEUTICS. 
 
 Potter's Compend of Materia Medica, Therapeutics, and 
 Prescription 'Writing. Sixth Edition, revised and improved 
 in accordance with U. S. P. 1890. See page If. 
 
 Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.25 
 
 Davis. Essentials of Materia Medica and Prescription 
 Writing. By J. Aubrey Davis, M.D., Demonstrator of Obstet- 
 rics and Quiz-Master on Materia Medica, University of Penn- 
 sylvania, tamo. Interleaved. Net, 1.50 
 
 Biddle's Materia Medica. Thirteenth Edition. By the late 
 John B. Biddle, M.D. Revised by Clement Biddle, M.D. 8vo. 
 Illustrated. Cloth, net, 4.00 ; Leather, net, 5.00 
 
 Potter. Handbook of Materia Medica, Pharmacy, and 
 Therapeutics. Including Action of Medicines, Special Thera- 
 peutics, Pharmacology, etc. By Saml. O. L. Potter, M.D., 
 M.R.C.P. (Lond.), Professor of the Practice of Medicine in 
 Cooper Medical College, San Francisco. Fifth Revised and 
 Enlarged Edition. 800 pages. 8vo. Cloth, 4.50; Leather, 5.50 
 
 Sayre. Organic Materia Medica and Pharmacognosy. 
 A Handbook for Students of Pharmacy and Medicine. By 
 L. E. Sayre, PH.G., Professor of Pharmacy and Materia Medica, 
 University of Kansas ; Member Committee of Revision of U. 
 S. P. 543 Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, 4.50 
 
 *S- See pages 14 and 15 /or list of t Quit-Contpendt f
 
 10 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 
 
 White and Wilcox. Materia Medica, Pharmacy. Phar- 
 macology, and Therapeutics. Second American Edition. 
 By Win. Hale White, M.U., F.R.C.P., etc.. Physician to and 
 Lecturer on Materia Medica, Gay's Hospital. Revised by 
 Reynold W. Wilcox, M.D..LI..D , Prof, of Clinical Medicine and 
 Therapeutics at the New York Post Graduate Medical School. 
 Visiting Physician St. Mark's Hospital, etc. Clo.,3.oo; Lea. ,3.50 
 
 MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE. 
 
 Reese. A Text-book of Medical Jurisprudence and Toxi- 
 cology. By John J. Reese. M.D., Prof, of Medical Jurispru- 
 dence and Toxicology in the Medical Depart., University of 
 Pennsylvania. Fourth Edition. Revised by Henry Leffmann, 
 M.D., Prof, of Chemistry, Pennsylvania College ot Dentistry; 
 Hygienist and Food Inspector, State Board of Agriculture, etc. 
 
 Cloth, 3.00 ; Leather, 3.50 
 
 NERVOUS DISEASES. 
 
 Cowers. Manual of Diseases of the Nervous System. 
 A Complete T_ext-book. By William R. Cowers, M.D., Prof. 
 Clinical Medicine, University College, London. Physician to 
 National Hospital for the Paralyzed and Epileptic. Second 
 Edition. Revised, Enlarged, and in many parts Rewritten. 
 With many new Illustrations. Octavo. 
 
 VOL. I. Diseases of the Nerves and Spinal Cord. 616 
 
 pages. Cloth, 3.50 
 
 VOL. II. Diseases of the Brain and Cranial Nerves. 
 
 General and Functional Diseases, 1069 pages. Cloth, 4.50 
 
 Ormerod. Diseases of Nervous System, Student's Guide to. 
 By J. A. Ormerod, M.D., Oxon., F.R.C.P. (London), Mem. Path.. 
 Clin., Ophthal., and Neurological Societies; Phys. to National 
 Hospital for Paralyzed and Epileptic; Dem. of Morbid Anatomy, 
 St. Bartholomew's Hospital, etc. 75 Illustrations. Cloth, 2.00 
 
 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY. 
 
 Davis. A Manual of Obstetrics. By Edw. P. Davis, Clinical 
 Lecturer on Obstetrics, Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. 
 16 Plates, and 134 Illustrations, izmo. id Edition. Cloth, 2.50 
 
 Byford. Diseases of Women. By W. H. Byford.M.o., Prof, 
 of Gynaecology in Rush Medical College, and H. T. Byford, 
 M.D., Surgeon to the Woman's Hospital, Chicago. Fourth Edi- 
 tion. Enlarged. 306 1 11 us. Octavo. Cloth, a.oo ; Leather, 8.50 
 
 Lewers' Diseases of Women. A Practical Text-book. 139 
 Illustrations. Second Edition. Cloth, 2.50 
 
 Wells. Compend of Gynaecology. Illustrated. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 Winckel's Obstetrics. A Text-book on Midwifery, includ- 
 ing the Diseases of Childbed. By Dr. F. Winckel. Author- 
 ized Translation, by J. Clifton Edgar, M.D., Lecturer on Ob- 
 stetrics, University Medical College, New York. Nearly aoo 
 handsome Illustrations. 8vo. Cloth, 6.00; Leather, 7.00 
 
 49- Sfe faff* a to y/or litt a/Nen< tfaMua.lt.
 
 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 11 
 
 Obstetrics and Gynaecology : Continued. 
 Parvin's Winckel's Diseases of 'Women. Second Edition. 
 
 Including a Section on Diseases of the Bladder and Urethra. 
 
 150 Illus. Revised. See page 3. Cloth, 3.00; Leather, 3.50 
 
 Landis' Compend of Obstetrics. Illustrated, sth Edition, 
 
 Enlarged. By Wells. Cloth, i.oo ; Interleaved for Notes', 1.25 
 
 PATHOLOGY, HISTOLOGY, ETC. 
 
 Stirling. Outlines of Practical Histology. A Manual for 
 Students, zd Edition. 368 Illustrations. I2mo. Cloth, 3.00 
 
 Reeves. Medical Microscopy. Colored Illustrations. 
 
 Cloth, net, 2.50 
 
 Wethered. Medical Microscopy. By Frank J. Wethered. 
 M.D., M.R.C.P. 98 Illustrations. Cloth, 2.50 
 
 Hall. Compend of General Pathology and Morbid Anat- 
 omy. 91 very fine Illustrations. Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved, 1.25 
 
 Gilliam's Essentials of Pathology. 47 Illus. Cloth, .75 
 
 Virchow's Post-Mortem Examinations. 3d Ed. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 PHYSICAL DIAGNOSIS. 
 
 Tyson's Student's Handbook of Physical Diagnosis. Illus- 
 trated. Second Edition, Enlarged. i2mo. Cloth, 1.50 
 
 PHYSIOLOGY. 
 
 Yeo's Physiology. Sixth Edition. The most Popular Stu- 
 dents' Book. By Gerald F. Yeo, M.D., F.R.C.S., Professor of 
 Physiology in King's College, London. Small Octavo. 234 
 carefully printed Illustrations. With a Full Glossary and Index. 
 See page 3. Cloth, 3.00; Leather, 3.50 
 
 Brubaker's Compend of Physiology. Illustrated. Seventh 
 Edition. Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.25 
 
 Kirke's Physiology. New 13* Ed. Thoroughly Revised and 
 Enlarged. 502 Illustrations, some of which are printed in colors. 
 (Blakiston's Authorized Edition.) Red Cl. , 4.00 ; Leather, 5.00 
 
 Landois' Human Physiology. Including Histology and Micro- 
 scopical Anatomy, and with special reference to Practical Medi- 
 cine. Fourth Edition. Translated and Edited by Prof. Stirling. 
 845 Illustrations. 2 vols. Cloth, net, 7.00 
 
 PRACTICE. 
 
 Taylor. Practice of Medicine. A Manual. By Frederick 
 Taylor, M.D., Physician to, and Lecturer on Medicine at, Guy's 
 Hospital, London ; Physician to Evelina Hospital for Sick Chil- 
 dren, and Examiner in Materia Medica and Pharmaceutical 
 Chemistry, University of London. Cloth, 2.00; Leather, 2.50 
 
 Roberts' Practice. Revised Edition. A Handbook of the 
 Theory and Practice of Medicine. By Frederick T. Roberts, 
 M.D., M.R.C.P., Professor of Clinical Medicine and Therapeutics 
 in University College Hospital, London. Ninth Edition. 
 Octavo. Cloth, 5.00 ; Sheep, 6.co 
 
 et pages 14 and 15 for list of f Quiz- Commends f
 
 12 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 
 
 Practici : Continued. 
 
 Hughes. Compend of the Practice of Medicine. 5th Edi- 
 tion, Enlarged. 
 
 Two parts, each, Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.25 
 PART i. Continued, Eruptive and Periodical Fevers, Diseases 
 
 of the Stomach, Intestines, Peritoneum, Biliary Passages, Liver, 
 
 Kidneys, etc., and General Diseases, etc. 
 PART n. Diseases of the Respiratory System, Circulatory 
 
 System, and Nervous System : Diseases of the Blood, etc. 
 Physicians' Edition. Fifth Edition. Including a Section 
 on Skin Diseases. With Index, i vol. Full Morocco, Gilt, 2. 50 
 
 from John A. Robinson, M.D., Assistant^ to Chair of Clinical 
 Medicine, now Lecturer on Materia Mtdica, Rusk Medical Col- 
 lege, Chicago. 
 "Meets with my hearty approbation as a substitute for the 
 
 ordinary note books almost universally used by medical students. 
 
 It is concise, accurate, well arranged, and lucid, . . . just the 
 
 thing for students to use while studying physical diagnosis and the 
 
 more practical departments of medicine. 
 
 Wythe's Dose and Symptom Book. Containing the Doses 
 
 and Uses of all the principal Articles of the Materia Medica, etc. 
 
 Seventeenth Edition. Completely Revised and Rewritten. 32010. 
 
 Cloth, i.oo; Pocket-book style, 1.25 
 
 PHARMACY. 
 
 Hartley. Medical and Pharmaceutical Chemistry. Third 
 Edition. Cloth, 300: Leather, 3.50 
 
 Coblentz. Manual of Pharmacy. Illustrated. By Virgil 
 Coblentz.PH D , Professor of Theory and Practice of Pharmacy, 
 College of Pnarraacy of City of New York. Octavo. 500 pages. 
 
 Cloth. 4.00 
 
 U. S. Pharmacopoeia, 1890, 7th Revision. 
 Cloth, net, 2 50; Sheep, net, 3 oo. (Add 27 cents if to go by mail.) 
 
 Sayre. Organic Materia Medica and Pharmacognosy. 
 543 Illustrations. See page Q. 8vo. Cloth, 4.50 
 
 Stewart's Compend of Pharmacy. Based upon Remington's 
 Text-book of Pharmacy. Fifth Edition, Revised in accordance 
 with new U.S P., 1890. Cloth, i.oo; Interleaved for Notes, 1.25 
 
 Robinson. Latin Grammar of Pharmacy and Medicine. 
 By H. D. Robinson, PH.D., Professor of Latin Language and 
 Literature, University of Kansas, Lawrence. With an Intro- 
 duction by L. E. Sayre, PH.G., Professor of Pharmacy in, and 
 Dean of. the Dept. of Pharmacy, University of Kansas. 12010. 
 Second Edition, Revised. Cloth, 2.00 
 
 SKIN DISEASES. 
 
 Crocker. Diseases of the Skin, their Description, Pathology, 
 Diagnosis, and Treatment, with Special Reference to the Skin 
 Kniplions of Children. By H. Radcliffe Crocker, P.R.C p., Phy- 
 sician for Diseases of the Skin in L'niversity College Hospital. 
 Second Edition. Revised and Enlarged, with 92 Wood-cuts. 
 
 Cloth, 5.00 
 
 Van Harlingen on Skin Diseases. Third Edition. Enlarged 
 and Illustrated. 12010. In Preit. 
 
 te faffs a to 5 for list of New KantuUt.
 
 STUDENTS' TEXT-BOOKS AND MANUALS. 13 
 
 SURGERY AND BANDAGING. 
 
 Moullin's Surgery, by Hamilton. 600 Illustrations (some 
 colored), 200 of which are original. Second Edition. 
 
 Cloth, net, 7.00; Leather, net, 8.00; Half Russia, net, 9.00 
 *** Complete circulars, with sample pages and Illustrations, free 
 upon application. 
 
 Jacobson. Operations in Surgery. A Systematic Handbook 
 for Physicians, Students, and Hospital Surgeons. By W. H. A. 
 Jacobson, B.A. Oxon., F.R.C.S. Eng. ; Ass't Surgeon Guy's Hos- 
 pital ; Surgeon at Royal Hospital for Children and Women, etc. 
 199 Illustrations. 1006 pages. 8vo. Cloth. 5.00; Leather, 6.00 
 Heath's Minor Surgery, and Bandaging. Tenth Edition. 158 
 Illustrations. 62 Formulae, and Diet Lists. Cloth, 2.00 
 
 Horwitz's Compend of Surgery, Minor Surgery and 
 Bandaging, Amputations, Fractures, Dislocations, Surgical 
 Diseases, and the Latest Antiseptic Rules, etc., with Differential 
 Diagnosis and Treatment. By ORVILLB HORWITZ, B.S., M.D., 
 Demonstrator of Surgery , Jefferson Medical College. $th Edition. 
 Enlarged and Rearranged. Many new Illustrations and Formulae. 
 i2mo. Cloth, i. oo ; Interleaved for the addition of Notes, 1.25 
 *** The new Section on Bandaging and Surgical Dressings con- 
 sists of 32 Pages and 41 Illustrations. Every Bandage of any 
 importance is figured. This, with the Section on Ligation of 
 Arteries, forms an ample Text-book for the Surgical Laboratory. 
 Walsham. Manual of Practical Surgery. Third Edition. 
 Bv WM. J. WALSHAM, M.D., F.R.C.S., Asst. Surg. to, and Dem- 
 of' Practical Surg. in, St. Bartholomew's Hospital; Surgeon to 
 Metropolitan Free Hospital, London. With 318 Engravings. 
 Seepages. Cloth, 3.00; Leather, 3.50 
 
 URINE, URINARY ORGANS, ETC. 
 
 Holland. The Urine, Gastric Contents, Common Poisons, 
 and The Milk. Chemical and Microscopical, for Laboratory 
 Use. Illustrated. Fifth Edition. I2mo. Interleaved. 
 
 Cloth, 1.25 
 
 Ralfe. Kidney Diseases and Urinary Derangements. 42 Illus- 
 trations. I2mo. 572 pages. Cloth, 2.75 
 
 Marshall and Smith. On the Urine. The Chemical Analysis of 
 the Urine. Colored Plates. I2mo. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 Memminger. Diagnosis by the Urine. Illus. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 Tyson. On the Urine. A Practical Guide to the Examination 
 of Urine. With Colored Plates and Wood Engravings. Eighth 
 Edition, Enlarged. i2mo. Cloth, 1.50 
 
 Van Niiys, Urine Analysis. Illus. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 VENEREAL DISEASES. 
 
 Hill and Cooper. Student's Manual of Venereal Diseases, 
 with Formulae. Fourth Edition. I2mo. Cloth, i.oo 
 
 ee pages 14 and 15 for list of f Quiz-Compends f
 
 PQUIZ-COMPENDS? 
 
 The Best Compends for Students' Use 
 in the Quiz Class, and when Pre- 
 paring for Examinations. 
 
 Compiled in accordance with the latest teachings of promi- 
 nent Lecturers and the most popular Text-books. 
 
 They form a most complete, practical, and exhaustive 
 set of manuals, containing information nowhere else col- 
 lected in such a condensed, practical shape. Thoroughly 
 up to the times in every respect, containing many new 
 prescriptions and formulae, and over six hundred illustra- 
 tions, many of which have been drawn and engraved 
 specially for this series. The authors have had large ex- 
 perience as quiz-masters and attaches of colleges, with 
 exceptional opportunities for noting the most recent ad- 
 vances and methods. 
 
 Cloth, each $1.00. Interleaved for Notes, $1.25. 
 
 No. I. HUMAN ANATOMY, " Based upon Gray." Fifth 
 Enlarged Edition, including Visceral Anatomy, formerly 
 published separately. ID Lithograph Plates, New 
 Tables, and 117 other Illustrations. By SAMUEL O. L. 
 POTTER, M.A., M.D., M.R.C.P. (Lend.), late A. A. Surgeon U. S. 
 Army, Professor of Practice, Cooper Medical College, San Fran- 
 cisco. 
 
 Nos. a and 3. PRACTICE OF MEDICINE. Fifth Edi- 
 tion. By DANIBL E. HUGHES, M.D., Demonstrator of Clinical 
 Medicine in Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. In two pans. 
 PART I. Continued, Eruptive, and Periodical Fevers, Diseases 
 of the Stomach, Intestines, Peritoneum, Biliary Passages, Liver, 
 Kidneys, etc. (including Tests for Urine), General Diseases, etc. 
 
 PART II. Diseases of the Respiratory System (including Phy- 
 sical Diagnosis), Circulatory System, and Nervous System; Dis- 
 eases of the Blood, etc. 
 
 %* These little books can be regarded as a full set of notes upon 
 the Practice of Medicine, containing the Synonyms, Definitions, 
 Causes, Symptoms, Prognosis, Diagnosis, Treatment, etc., of each 
 disease, and including a number of prescriptions hitherto unpub- 
 lished. 
 
 No. 4. PHYSIOLOGY, including Embryology. Seventh 
 Edition. By ALBBRT P. BRUBAKBR, M.D., Prof, of Physiology, 
 Penn'a College of Dental Surgery ; Demonstrator of Physiology 
 in Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. Revised, Enlarged, 
 with new Illustrations. 
 
 No. 5. OBSTETRICS. Illustrated. Fifth Edition. By 
 HENRY G. LANDIS, M.D. Edited by WILLIAM H. WELLS, M.D., 
 Assistant Demonstrator of Clinical Obstetrics, Jefferson College, 
 Philadelphia. New Illustrations.
 
 BLAKISTON'S ? QUIZ-COMPENDS ? 
 
 No. 6. MATERIA MEDICA, THERAPEUTICS, AND 
 PRESCRIPTION WRITING. Sixth Revised Edition, 
 Based upon U. S. P. 1890. With especial Reference to the 
 Physiological Action of Drugs, and a complete article on Pre- 
 scription Writing, including many unofHcinal remedies. By 
 SAMUEL O. L. POTTER, M.A., M.D., M.R.C.P. (Lond.).late A. A. 
 Surg. U. S. Army; Prof, of Practice, Cooper Medical College, 
 San Francisco. Improved and Enlarged, with Index. 
 
 No. 7. GYN^COLOGY. A Compend of Diseases of Women. 
 By WM. H. WELLS, M.D., Ass't Demonstrator of Obstetrics, 
 Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia. Illustrated. 
 
 No. 8. DISEASES OF THE EYE AND REFRACTION, 
 including Treatment and Surgery. By L. WEBSTER Fox, M.D., 
 Chief Clinical Assistant Ophfhalmological Dept., Jefferson Med- 
 ical College, etc., and GEO. M. GOULD, M.D. 71 Illustrations, 39 
 Formulae. Second Enlarged and improved Edition. Index. 
 
 No. 9. SURGERY, Minor Surgery and Bandaging. Illus- 
 trated. Fifth Edition. Including Fractures, Wounds, 
 Dislocations, Sprains, Amputations, and other operations; Inflam- 
 mation, Suppuration, Ulcers, Syphilis, Tumors, Shock, etc. 
 Diseases of the Spine, Ear, Bladder, Testicles, Anus, and 
 other Surgical Diseases. By ORVILLE HORWITZ, A.M., M.D., 
 Demonstrator of Surgery, Jefferson Medical College. Revised 
 and Enlarged. 98 Formulae and 167 Illustrations. 
 
 No. 10. CHEMISTRY. Fourth Edition. Inorganic and 
 Organic. For Medical and Dental Students. Including Urinary 
 Analysis and Medical Chemistry. By HENRY LKFFMANN, M.D., 
 Prof, of Chemistry in Penn'a College of Dental Surgery, Phila. 
 Fourth Edition, Revised and Rewritten, with Index. 
 
 No. ii. PHARMACY. Based upon " Remington's Text-book 
 of Pharmacy." By F. E. STEWART, M.D. , PH. G., Quiz-Master 
 at Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. Fifth Edition, Revised. 
 
 No. la. VETERINARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOL- 
 OGY. 29 Illustrations. By WM. R. BALLOU, M.D., Prof, of 
 Equine Anatomy at N. Y. College of Veterinary Surgeons. 
 
 No. 13. DENTAL PATHOLOGY AND DENTAL MEDI- 
 CINE. Containing all the most noteworthy points of interest 
 to the Dental student. Second Edition. By GEO. W. WARREN, 
 D.D.S., Clinical Chief, Penn'a College of Dental Surgery, Phila- 
 delphia. Second Edition, Enlarged and Illustrated. 
 
 No. 14. DISEASES OF CHILDREN. By DR. MARCUS P. 
 HATFIELD, Prof, of Diseases of Children, Chicago Medical 
 College. Colored Plate. 
 
 No. 15. GENERAL PATHOLOGY AND MORBID 
 ANATOMY. By H. NEWBBRY HALL, M. D., Professor of 
 Pathology and Medical Chemistry Post-Gradnate School ; Sur- 
 geon Emergency Hospital, Chicago, etc. 91 Illustrations. 
 
 Bound in Cloth, $1. Interleaved, for the Addition of Notes, $1.25. 
 
 fi@?" No series of books are so complete in detail, concise 
 in language, or so well printed and bound. Each one 
 forms a complete set of notes upon the subject under con- 
 sideration, 
 
 Illustrated Descriptive Circular Free.
 
 3O.OOO COPIES 
 Of These Books Have Already Been SoU. 
 
 GOULD'S STUDENT'S 
 
 MEDICAL DICTIONARY 
 
 Based on Recent Medical Literature. 
 
 Small 8vo, Half Morocco, as above, with Thumb Index, . . 4.?$ 
 Plain Dark Leather, without Thumb Index, 3.25 
 
 A compact, concise Vocabulary, including all 
 the Words and Phrases used in medicine, with 
 their proper Pronunciation and Definitions. 
 
 " One pleasing feature of the book is that the reader can almost 
 invariably find the definition under the word he looks for, without 
 being referred from one place to another, as is too commonly the 
 case in medical dictionaries. The tables of the bacilli, nucrococci, 
 leucomaiines and ptomaines are excellent, and contain a large 
 amount of information in a limited space. The anatomical tables 
 are also concise and clear. . . . We should unhesitatingly 
 recommend this dictionary to our readers, feeling sure that it will 
 prove of much value to them." American Journal of Medical 
 Science. 
 
 JUST PUBLISHED. 
 
 GOULD'S POCKET DICTIONARY. 12,000 
 Medical Words Pronounced and Defined. 
 Leather, gilt edges, JSi.oo; with Thumb Index, $1.25
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 JUN7 RB 
 
 Form L9-Series 4939